American English For Spanish Speakers

2022
American English For Spanish

Speakers
Mauricio Mateo
jazzylinguas@hotmail.com
Cel. 5564399133
Introducción
Este libro electronico ha sido escrito como producto de mis años enseñando inglés
americano. Pretende ser una herramienta para las personas que toman mi curso
de inglés americano off line, aun asi otras personas que quieran aprender inglés
americano pero que no cuenten con mucho tiempo para hacerlo verán que este
libro electronico les podrá ser de utilidad.
Este libro electronico te permitirá aprender desde como dar y pedir información
básica en inglés, presentarte y decir tu rutina diaria hasta como escribir una carta
formal para un trabajo.
Como mi objetivo no es solo enseñarte el lenguaje formal si no también otros

registros, en este libro encontrarás textos escritos en lenguaje informal, formal y
literario. El vocabulario y la gramatica han sido tomados de diferentes fuentes que
podrás encontrar en la bibliografia, aunque se debe aclarar que en la mayoria de
los casos se ha preferido para las explicaciones gramaticales el uso que tienen
determiandas escructuras gramaticales en el lenguaje informal. Tambien, he de
aclarar que se ha tomado casi exlusivamente el dialecto del inglés de Los Angeles
como base para la creacion de este libro, aunque tambien en el libro podrás
encontrar otras variantes.
Este libro se divide en 17 unidades, cada una compuesta de 7 lecciones. También

encontrarás ejercicios de comprensión de lectura, de producción oral y de
producción escrita los cuales pueden ayudarte a mejorar tus habilidades
linguisticas.
1
Index
1. Personal pronouns
2. Verb to be/adjectives
3. Negative and interrogative form of the verb to be/wh-questions
4. Plural
5. Indefinite article
6. Demonstrative
7. Comparative
8. Definite article
9. Possessive adjective
10. Have/has
11. There is/there are
12. Prepositions
13. At/on/in / Possessive pronoun
14. Superlative
15. Present simple

16. Negative and interrogative form of the present simple
17. Reflexive pronouns
18. Adverbs of frequency
19. Possessive case/ Personal object pronouns
20. Hour
21. Comparative of equality
22. Modal verbs (can, could, may, might)

23. Modal verbs to express advice (should, must) /had better
24. Modal verbs to express obligation (have to/musn’t) /needn’t
25. Modal verbs to express prohibition (musn’t) / not to be allowed/ to be forbidden
26. Some/any
27. Expression of the quantity
28. Containers
29. Past simple

30. Negative and interrogative of the past simple
31. Past simple of the verb to be
32. Used to
33. There was/there were
34. Modal verbs in the past simple/ Adverbs
2
35. Going to in the past simple/ Personal object pronouns (indirect object)
36. Future simple

37. There will be/ Modal verbs in the future simple
38. To be going to/ Substitution personal object pronouns
39. Relative pronouns
40. Present continuous and present simple for the future
41. Comparative and superlative of adverbs
42. Future simple, going to and present continous
43. Subjunctive present

44. Subordinated conjunctions
45. Personal object pronouns (two objects) / Imperative
46. Indefinite pronouns
47. Prepositions of movement
48. Connectors of addition and contrast
49. Proportional sentences / No, some, any
50. Present continuous

51. Stative verbs
52. Past continuous
53. Phrasal verbs
54. Future continuous
55. Relative pronouns II
56. Other comparative structures
57. Conditional type 0

60 Shortenings
60. Infinitive
62. Gerunds
63. Past participle
64. Present perfect

65. Never, already, yet, ever, since, for
66. Past perfect
67. Slang
68. Future perfect
69. Like, as / Would rather/ would prefer
3
70. Connectors of cause and effect/ Neither, either, both / Exclamations
71. Present perfect continuous

72. Order of the adjectives
73. Past perfect continuous
74. Slang II
75. Future perfect continuous
76. Countable and uncountable
77. Plural of compound nouns /Collective nouns / Connectors of cause and effect

79. If only, as if, as though
80. Wish clauses
81. Formal English
82. Modal verbs with have
83. Gerund composed/ Polite questions
84. Would vs used to /to be used to, to get used to
85. Purpose clauses

86. World builging
87. Question tags /So do I/ neither do I
88. Formal English II
89. None of, all and whole/ Enough/ such as, each/every /Rather/ Quite
90. One/ Demonstrative II
91. Definite and non-definite clauses
92. Passive voice of the simple tenses

93. Passive voice of the progressive tenses
94. Passive voice of the composed tenses
95. Passive voice of the continuous composed tenses
96. Newspaper English
97. Passive voice of the modal verbs
98. Passive voice with two objects/ Passive voice (reporting information)
99. Direct speech/ Indirect speech

100. Indirect speech with questions/ reported speech
101. Reported speech with special introductory verbs
102. British English I
103. Mixed conditionals
104. Have/get something done
105. Formal English III
4
106. Prepositional regency
107. Verbal predication
108. Adjective regency
109. Expressions that are not as in Spanish
110. British English II
111. Modal verbs III
112. Special future structures
113. Was/were able to/ would rather have/ would prefer to

114. Passive voice (advanced points) / Other passive structures/ Special uses of
the passive voice
115. Interpreting and comparing
116. Range of gramar structures
117. Connecting words / Complex sentences and adverbial clauses
118. Connectors of cause and propose II
119. Lenguage of persuasion/ Hypotesing
120. Invertion
121. Literary English
122. Literary English II
123. Very Fomal English
125. Participle Clauses
126. Special uses of if
126. Enphasis / Emphatic do
5
Alfabeto
El idioma tiene 26 vocales.
Letter Name
A EI
B BI
C SI
D DI
E I
F EF
G SHYI
H EICH
I AI
J SHYEI
K KEI
L EL
M EM
N EN
O OU
P PI
Q KIU
R AR
S ES
T TI
U IU
V FVI
WW DOBEL IU
X EKS
Y UAI
Z ZI
La letra “Ñ” no existe en inglés.
6
Pronunciación
Las consonantes b, c, d, f, k, l, m, n, p, q, t, w, x, e y se pronuncian igual que en

español.
La “G” en las silabas “ge” y “gi” se pronuncial como una I griega vibrda.
La “h” al inicio de palabra se pronuncial como jota.
La J siempre suena como una I griega vibrada.
La R siempre suena como la erre en “Rata”
La V suena como una b vibrada.
La Z suena como una ese vibrada.
Las consonants dobles se pronuncian como una.
Swimming /suiming/ not /suimming/
Vowels
Las vocalese n inglés no tienen una pronunciación especifica, asi que debes
aprenderte su pronunciación palabra por palabra.
Para fines practicos, te sugerimos aprenderte la table de abajo en lo que aprendes

la pronunciación de cada palabra.
/a/ /e/ /i/ /o/ /u/ /ə/

I
A E E (in o U -er
monosyllabic Wh -our
words) Oo
Ee -w
Ey
La E final de palabras polisilabas es muda.
7
Digraphs
La terminación “ture” se pronuncial /chur/.
Culture /Kulchur/
La Th se pronuncial como de en las palabras the, this, that, these y those. En los
demás casos se pronuncial como la zeta Española.
Think /θink/
La terminación “tion” se pronuncial /shion/.
Nation / Neishion/
En la combinación wr se pronuncial solo la erre.
Write /rait/
La combinación Tw se pronuncial /tu/.
Twenty /tuenti/
La Sh se pronuncial como la equis en Xola.
Store /store/
En la combinacion S + consonante solo se pronuncial el sonido de la ese.
Spoon /spun/
En la combinación Kn solo se pronuncial la / N/.
Know / Nou/
8
En inglés cuando una palabra termina en consonante y la siguiente en vocal el
sonido se junta.
What a beautiful woman = /uata biutiful woman/
Good afternoon = /godafternun/
Cuando la ultima silba de una palabra tiene una “t”, la “t” se suaviza y tiene un
sonido como el de la “r” suave del español.
Gotta /gora/
Por su puesto esto no es una explicación exaustiva de la pronunciación del inglés

americano, sin embargo esta te ayudará a pronunciar la lengua, sobre todo en las
primeras lecciones.
También hemos decir que no hemos usado el alfabeto fonetico internacional y la
que la pronunciación que es usada en este libro es una que se aproxima o más
posible a los sonidos del español a fin de hacer tu aprendizaje lo más facil posible.
9
Similitudes con el español
Alrededor del 60 por ciento del vocabulario más comun del inglés tiene raices
Latinas. Entonces, hay varias reglas que te pueden ayudar a aprender el
vocabulario del inglés más facilmente.
Regla Español Inglés

La terminación “dad”
pasa al inglés como “ty” Universidad University
La terminación “cion”
pasa al inglés como “tion” Nación Nation
La terminación “ancia”
pasa al inglés como Ambulancia Ambulance
“ance”
La terminación “ence”
pasa al español como Conferencia Conference
“ence”
Palabras terminadas en
“ico” y “ica” pasa como “c” Música Music
La terminación “ante” y
“ento” pasan al inglés sin Interesante Interessant
e. Talento Talent
La terminación “uro” y Futuro Future

“ura” pasa al inglés como Aventure Adventure
“ure”
La terminación “ia” pasa Autonomía Autonomy
al español como “y”.
Las terminaciones “ivo” e Activo Active
“iva” pasan al inglés
como “ive”
Estas reglas tienen exepciones, pero pueden hacer que tu aprendisaje sea más
facil.
10
First Unit
Welcome to
United States
11
En esta unidad aprenderás a:
 Saludar
 Dar y pedir datos personales
 Deletrear tun ombre
 Comparar
Temas
 Alphabet
 Pronunciation
 Personal subject pronouns
 Verb to be
 Plural
 Indefinite pronouns
 Demonstrative
 Comparative
Listening tips
Desde este punto, es necesario que escuhes grabaciones para el nivel A1 de

inglés. Puedes conseguirlas en librerioas de idiomas o en internet. Asegurate que
sean para el nivel A1.
Vocabulary and reading tips
Desde este punto es importante que leas la lista de verbos que viene al final
dellibro.
Para mejorar tu lectura, por el momento solo te recomendamos leer tus lecciones
del libro.
12
First Lesson
Welcome to United States
1. Hello, my name is Miguel and this is my wife María.

2. We live in Los Angeles now with our children.
3. My son’s name is Gabriel. He’s a student.
4. My daughter’s name is Daniela. She’s a doctor.
5. We love living in this beautiful city.
@h
First [ferst] primero, Lesson [leson] lección, welcome [guelkom] bienvenido], to [tu] a,
United States [ingland], Inglaterra, hello [jelou] hola, my [mai], mi(s), name [neim], nombre,
is [is] es/está, and [and] y, this is [dis is] ella es, wife [waif] esposa, to live [tu lifv] vivir, now
[nau] ahora, in [in] en, with [guit] con, our [auer] nuestr@(s), children [children] niños, son’s
name [sons neim] nombre de mi hijo, student [stiudent] estudiante, daughther’s name
[dodas neim] nombre de mi hija, to love [tu lofv], beautiful [biuriful], hermoso, country
[kountri], país. @
13
Primera lección
Bienvenido a Inglaterra
1. Hola, mi nombre es Miguel y ella es mi esposa María.

2. Vivimos ahora en Los Ángeles con nuestros hijos
3. Mi hijo se llama Gabriel. (él) es estudiante.
4. Mi hija se llama Daniela. (Ella) es doctora.
5. Nos encanta vivir en esta bella ciudad.
14
Personal subject pronouns
Personal subject pronoun Pronombre personal

I Yo
You Tú
He Él
She Ella
It -
We Nosotros
You Ustedes
They Ellos
El inglés tiene los mismos pronombres personales que el español (yo, tú, él, ella,
etc.) más uno extra (it) el cual se usa para:
a. Substituir todo lo que no es humano

Where is the cat?
It is on the table
b. Frases impersonales
It’s cold
c. Con el clima y la hora.

It is raining
It’s 2 o’clock
En inglés no existe el pronombre usted, en su lugar se usa you.
15
Exercise 1
Llena cada espacio en blanco con el pronombre personal que le corresponda.
1. _____ am Miguel.
2. _____ are María.
3. _____ is from Mexico.
4. _____ are the Smiths.
5. _____ is my dog.
6. _____ am happy.
7. _____ are my cousins.
8. _____ is Joana.
9. _____ are the new neigbours.
10. _____ is American.
Exercise 2
Usando el vocabulario de los países que viene al final del libro, llena los siguientes
espacios en blanco.
1. Hello, ________ Miguel. I’m from ________. (Mexico)

2. Jane, this is Francois. _______ from _______. (Francia)
3. Hello, _____ Vlabimir. I’m from _______. (Rusía)
4. Where are Eduardo and Laura. ________ from _________. (Italia)
5. Hello, ________ David and this is Ann. ________ from _____. (Estado
Unidos)
6. Are you from Australia?. No, I’m from _____. (España)
7. Hello, _____ Thomas. I’m from _____. (Alemania)
8. João, this is Ana. ________ from _____. (Brasil)
9. Are Steve and Katherin from Japan. No, ________ from _____. (Canada)
10. Hello, _____ Li. I’m from _____. (China)
16
Writing
Escribe una breve presentación de tí. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
17
Speaking
Contesta las siguientes preguntas.
What’s his name?
My name is ______________.
Where is he from?
I’m from ______________.
What does he/she do?
I’m a/an ______________.
American culture
The United States (Los Estados Unidos), cuyo verdadero nombre es United States
of America (Estados Unidos de America) está conformado por 50 Estados de los
cuales California y Texas son de los más importantes. Dentro de los 50 Estados
que tiene Estados Unidos también se encuentran Hawaii y Alaska.
18
Second lesson
A pretty woman
1. I just saw the most beautiful woman that I’ve ever seen.
2. How was she?
3. She was slim, blond and tall.
4. Where’s she?
5. Over there, next to Bill?
6. She’s Bill’s wife.
Second [second] Segundo, pretty [priri] lindo, woman [guomn] mujer, I seen [aifv shyost
sin] acabo de ver, the [da] el/lo/los/las, most [moust] más, woman [guomn] mujer, ever
[efva] algunas vez, how [jau] como, was [guas] era/estaba, where [uer] donde/a donde,
slim [slim] delgado, blond [blond] rubio, tall [tol] alto, there [der] ahí, next to [neks tu] junto,
Bill [roya] Bill.
19
Segunda leccion
Una linda mujer
1. Acabo de ver a la mujer más hermosa que haya visto.

2. Como era?
3. Delgada, rubia, alta
4. Donde está?
5. Alla, junto a Bill
6. Ella es la esposa de Bill
20
Verb To be
El verbo “to be” es el equivalente al inglés de los verbos ser y estar.
Recuerda que en inglés es obligatorio el uso del pronombre personal, entonces es

imposible deci “am Bill”,
La contracción de “is” con un sustantivo es posible expeto con aquellos que

terminan es ese.
Dog’s is big
Short and long for of the verb to be
Usamos la “long form” en textos formales.
Para todos los demás casos se ocupa la “short form”
21
Adjectives
En inglés los adjetivos no tienen genero ni plural. Por lo tanto,
“We are fast” puede significar tanto “somos rapidos” como “somos rapidas”
Happy Feliz Sad Triste

Strong Fuerte Weak Debil
New Nuevo Old Viejo
Young Joven Old Viejo
Tall Alto Short Chaparro
Hot Caliente Cold Frio
Big Grande Small Pequeño
Cheap Barato Expensive Caro
Long Largo Short Corto
Beautiful Bonito Ugly Feo
Fast Rapido Slow Lento
Light Claro Dark Obscuro
Slim Delgado Fat Gordo
Negative form of the verb to be
Para hacer la forma negativa de la forma larga del verbo to be, solo agregamos
not antes del verbo.
Para la forma corta, agregamos “aren’t despúes de you, we, you they. I am not
se contrae en I’m not.
Personal Subject Long form Short form Short form

pronoun (less common)
I I am not I am not
You You are not You aren’t You ‘re not
He He is not He isn’t He’s not
She She is not She isn’t She’s not
It It is not It isn’t It’s not
We We are not We aren’t We’re not
you You are not You aren’t You’re not
They They are not They aren’t They’re not
22
Las formas cortas del lado inzquierdo son menos communes.
Exercise 1
Usando la forma a firmativa y negative del verbo to be, llena los siguientes
espacios en blanco. (Usa la forma corta)
1. I _____ Daniel.
2. He_____ from France.
3. They _____ the Smiths.
4. It _____ my dog. (not)
5. You _____ María.
6. I _____ strong. (not)
7. You _____ my kids.
8. She _____ Ana.
9. They _____ the new neigbours. (not)
10. He _____ Mexican.
Exercise 2
Usando el vocabulario de los adjetivos que viene al final del libro, llena los
siguientes espacios en blanco.
1. I’m ________ (fuerte)

2. You’re _____ (hermosa)
3. He’s _____ (joven)
4. She’s _____ (delgada)
5. My dig is _____ (grande)
6. The car is _____ (nuevo)
7. My son is _____ (alto)
8. We’re _____ (frio)
9. You’re _____ (altos)
10. They’re _____ (rapidos)
23
Writing
Escribe un pequeño texto para una pagina de citas donde digas como es la pareja
que estas buscando. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Contesta las siguientes preguntas:
How are you?
Im ______________.
How’s your family?
My family is ______________.
24
Third lesson
New neighbors
1. Good morning!
2. Good morning!
3. What’s your name?
4. Miguel, and you?
5. Ann!
6. Nice to meet you, Ann!
7. Likewise!
8. Where are you from, Miguel?
9. I’m from Mexico but I moved to Los Angeles.
10. And what do you do, Miguel?
11. I work as an Spanish teacher in a school.
12. Do you work at UNAM Los Angeles, by any chance?
13. How do you know it?
14. Because you have the same uniform than me.
Neighbor [neibor] vecino, Good morning [gud morning] buenos dias, what’s your name
[uats yor neim] como te llamas, yours [yors] (el) tuyo, Nice to meet you [nais tum it yu]
gusto en conocerte, Likewise [laikguais] igualmente, where are you from [uer ar yu from]
de donde eres, I’m from Mexico [aim from meksokou] soy de Cambirdge, I’ve moved [aifv
syost mufv] recientemente me he mudado, what do you do [uat du yu do] a que te
dedicas, to work [ty guerk] trabajar, as [as] como, Spanish [Spanish] español, teacher
[ticha] maestro, a [a] un/una, school [skul] escuela, by any chance[bai eni cheins] de
casualidad, why [uai] por que, to ask [tu ask] preguntar, me [mi] me, that [dat] eso,
because [bicous] porque, you have [yu jafv] tienes, the [da] el/lo/la/los/las, same [seim]
mismo, uniform [iuniform] uniforme, than me [dan mi] que yo.
25
Tercera leccion
Nuevos vecinos
1. Buenos dias!
2. Buenos dias!
3. Como se llama?
4. Miguel, y usted?
5. Ann
6. Mucho gusto!
7. Igualmente!
8. De donde es?
9. Soy de México pero acabo de mudarme a Los Ángeles.
10. Y a que se dedica?
11. Soy maestro de inglés en una escuela.
12. De casualidad trabaja en el British Council?
13. Como lo sabe?
14. Porque tiene el mismo uniforme que yo.
26
Interrogative form of the verb to be
For building the interrogative form in English, we only put the verb at the
beginning of the sentence. This rule is not used with the present simple and the
past simple. See page 51 and 87.
Notice:
a. When we ask a question, we cannot answer with just a Yeah or No, it sounds
like when in Spanish is answer “a, si” or “no with sarcasm”.
For translating the “si” or “no” of the Spanish we must say “Yeah, I am” or “No,
he isn’t.
b. The negative answer uses always the short form.
c. The No is pronounced / No/.
Wh-questions
Wh-questions, in Spanish “particulas interrogativas”, are used to ask for more

specific information.
They are put before the verb.
Interrogative form Is he Bryan?

Interrogative form with wh-question How old is Bryan?
27
Wh-question Meaning
What Que
Cual
How Como
When Cuando
Where Donde
A donde
Why Por que
Who Quien(es)
A quien
How old Cuantos años (de edad)
How far Que tan lejos
How much Cuanto
How often Que tan seguido
How long Cuanto tiempo

cuantos años
How many Cuantos
Which Cual (cuando das opciones)
What time Que hora

A que hora
Where … from De donde
Whose De quien
How tall Cuanto mides
28
Exercise 1
Usando las wh-questions, llena los siguientes espacios en blanco.
11. ____ is Daniel ________.?

12. _____ is the concert?
13. _____ is this?
14. _____ is your name?
15. is your favourite color, green or red?.
16. _____ is the movie?
17. _____ is your birthday?
18. _____ is your country? It’s big.
19. _____ are you? I’m 27.
20. _____ kids do you have?
Exercise 2
Completa el siguiente dialogo con tu información personal.
1. Hello!
2. Hello!
3. What’s your name?
4. ________________. And you?
5. I’m Mike.
6. Where are you from?
7. ________________________. And you?
8. I’m from United States.
9. What do you do?
10. _______________________. And you?
11. I’m a teacher.
12. How old are you?
13. _______________________. And you?
14. I’m 25.
15. See you!
16. See you!
29
Writing
Escribe una carta para un trabajo donde te presents.
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Contesta las siguientes preguntas.
Where are you from?
I’m from ______________.
What lenguagues do you speak?
I speak ______________.
American culture
La lengua inglésa es la segunda lengua más hablada en el mundo por numero de

hablantes, solo despúes del Chino. Es la lengua official de Estados Unidos, Reino
Unido, Australia y nueva Zelanda. También es la lengua co-oficial de Canada,
India, de Taiwan y de algunos países que conforman el Commonweat.
Una de las instituciones encargadas de hacer examines para medir el nivel de

inglés Americano es la Educational Testing Service.
1
Forth lesson
At bank
1. Good afternoon. How can I help you, sir?

2. Can I open an account, please!
3. Certainly, sir. What’s your name?
4. John Smith.
5. Could you repeat your last name please?
6. Of course, Smith, S-M-I-T-H, Smith
7. Right, and what’s your address?
8. 25, Brooke Lane, Marsh town
9. What’s your telephone number?
10. It’s 217710 (two, one, double seven, one, oh)
11. What do you do, Mr. Martinez?
12. I’m a lawyer.
13. Can you sign here, please?
14. Sure!
15. Here you are. Your account is open.
16. Thank you!
17. You’re welcome!
To help [tu jelp] ayudar, you [yu] lo, sir [sar] señor, to open [tu open] abrir, account [akaunt]
cuenta, please [plis] por favor, certainly [sertanly] Seguro (formal), could [kud] podria, to
repeat [ripit] repetir, last name [last neim] apellido, please [plis] por favor, Right [right] muy
bien, address [adres] direccion, town [taun] pueblo, telephone [telefon] telefonico, sorry
[sorri] perdon, to repeat [tu ripit] repetir, it [it] lo/la (todo lo que no sea humano), sure [shor]
seguro (informal], what do you do? [uat du yu du] a que se dedica, lawyer [louya], tu sign
[tu sign] cantar, here you are [jia yu ar] aqui tiene, open [open] abierto, you’re welcome
[your guelkom] de nada.
Cuarta leccion
En el banco
1. Buenas tarde. Puedo ayudarle?

2. Quiero abrir una cuenta, por favor
3. Seguro, como se llama?
4. John Smith
5. Puede repetirme su apellido, por favor.
6. Sí, Smith, S-M-I-T-H, Smith
7. Cual es su dirección?
8. 25, Brooke Lane, Marsh town
9. Su telefono?
10. Es 217710
11. A que se dedica señor Smith?
12. Soy abogado.
13. Puede firmar aqui.
14. Sí
15. Aqui tiene, su cuenta está ya abierta.
16. Gracias!
17. De nada!
Reading
1. Where is he?
____________________________________________
2. What’s his name?
____________________________________________
3. What’s his adress?
____________________________________________
4. What’s his telephone number?
____________________________________________
1
Indefinite Article
Singular Plural
Affirmative It is a cat They are some cats
Negative It is not a cat They are not any cats
Interrogative Is it a cat? Are they any cats?
Usamos “a” para decir un/una.
A Boy
A House
A University
“A” se convierte en “an” cuando va enfrente de una palabra que comienza con
sonido de vocal.
An apple
An hour
2
Exercise 1
Escribe a/an en el espacio segun corresponda
1. _____ cat
2. _____ bed
3. _____ apple
4. _____ umbrella
5. _____ orange
6. _____ horse
7. _____ hour
8. _____ eagle
9. _____ chair
10. _____ horse
Exercise 2
Traduce las siguientes oraciones a inglés americano.
1. Un camión _______________.
2. Un país _______________.
3. Un aguila _______________.
4. Un hijo _______________.
5. Una inglesa _______________.
6. Un hogar _______________.
7. Un jitomate _______________.
8. Una hormiga_______________.
9. Una pluma_______________.
10. Una vaca _______________.
3
Writing
Escribe un dialogo donde dos personas esten en un banco. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
4
Speaking
What’s your name?
My name is ______________.
What’s your address?

It’s ______________.
What’s your telephone number?
It’s ______________.
What’s your e-mail address?
It’s ______________.
American culture
Los numero telefonicos se dan numero por numero. Asi una persona dirá
1,2,4,5,8,9,3,6 en lugar de 12-45-89-36.
El uso de sir y madam puede traer dificultades ya que no se ocupan igual que en
español. Por regla general sir y madam solo se utilizan cuando se habla con
alguién en una tienda, en un hotel, cuando un mesero se dirigé a un cliente, o
cuando se ofrece un servicio.
En Estados Unidos las personas solo tienen un apellido.
5
Fifth lesson
Numbers
1. Hi, María
2. Hi, Ann, how are you?
3. Good. And you?
4. Great.
5. María, when’s your birthday?
6. It’s next week.
7. Is it on 1st February? (it’s on the first of February)
8. No, it’s on 3rd February. (it’s on the third of February)
9. When were you born?
10. I was born in 1994 (nineteen, ninety four)
11. So, how old are you?
12. I’m thirty-sevent.
13. I thoung you were twenty.
14. No
15. Could you give me your telephone number to congratulate you that day?
16. Yeah! It’s 1149814
17. Thanks, see you next week!
18. See you!
Hi [jai] hola, birthday [birtdei] cumpleaños, February [februari] febrero, to congratulate

[kongratuleit] felicitar, See you [si ya] nos vemos.
6
Quinta leccion
Numeros
1. Hola, María
2. Hola, Ann, como estas?
3. Muy bien, y tu?
4. Bien
5. María, cuando es tu cumpleaños?
6. La siguiente semana.
7. Es el primero de febrero?
8. No, es el tres de febrero.
9. Cuando naciste?
10. En 1994
11. Entonces, cuantos años tienes?
12. Treinta y siete
13. Pense que tenias veinte
14. No
15. Puedes darme tu numero para felicitarte ese dia.
16. Sí, es 11-14-98-14
17. Gracias, nos vemos la siguiente semana.
18. Nos vemos.
Reading
1. When is his birthday?

____________________________________________
2. When was he born?
____________________________________________
3. How old is he?
____________________________________________
4. What’s his telephone number?
____________________________________________
7
Plural
General rule -s Cat Cats

S Bus Buses
X Box Boxes
Z -es Quiz Quizzes
Ch Church Churches
Sh Crash Crashes
O Potato Potatoes
Consonant + y -ies Country Countries
F -ve Wolf Wolves
Fe Knife Knives
Us -i Cactus Cacti
Is -es Oasis Oases
Irregular Plural
Singular Plural
Man Men Mouse Mice Tooth Teeth
Woman Women Fish Fish Medium Media
Child Children Sheep Sheep Cents Cents
Person People Duck Duck Goose Geese
Foot Feet
8
Exercise 1
Escribe los siguientes numeros.
1. 21 _________________________________________________________.
2. 101 ________________________________________________________.
3. 3300_______________________________________________________.
4. 57500_______________________________________________________.
5. 43 _________________________________________________________.
6. 61 _________________________________________________________.
7. 946 ________________________________________________________.
8. 11 _________________________________________________________.
9. 2179________________________________________________________.
10. 81357 ______________________________________________________.
Exercise 2
Escribe el plural de las siguientes palabras.
11. Bus _______________.

12. Country _______________.
13. Box _______________.
14. Wife _______________.
15. Peach _______________.
16. Cactus _______________.
17. Tomato _______________.
18. Tesis _______________.
19. Church _______________.
20. Flash _______________.
9
Writing
Escribe una carta donde le preguntes a un amigo por correspondencia donde le

digas: cuando es tu cumpleaños?, cuando naciste?, cuantos años tienes? Y ¿cual
es tu numero telefonico?.
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
10
Speaking
When is your birthday?
It’s on ______________.
When were you born?
I was born in ______________.
How old are you?
I’m ______________ years old.
What’s your telephone number?
It’s ______________.
_____ plus _____ is _____ _____ times _____ is _____
_____ divided by _____ is _____ ____ minus ____ is ____
American culture
En inglés no se utilizan los numeros cardinales para decir la fecha de tu

cumpleaños. En su lugar se utilizan los numeros cardinales.
En lugar de decir “mi cumpleaños es el 4 de abril” dirías “mi cumpleaños es el

cuarto de abril (My birthday is on forth of April).
11
Sixth lesson
At zoo
1. Children, we’re seeing today the most dangerous animals in the world.
2. That animal is an elephant.
3. It lives in Africa.
4. Those animals are monkeys, they live too in Africa.
5. This is a tiger, it lives in Asia.
6. Miss Anderson, what animal is that?
7. Which one?
8. That which is waking into the lion’s cage.
9. That’s a cat.
Zoo [zu] zoologíco, we´re seeing [guir sing] vamos a ver, today [tudei] hoy, dangerous
[dengerus] peligroso, animal [enimal] animal, elephant [elefant], to live [tu lifv], Africa
[eifrica] africa, monkey [monki] mono, too [tu] también, tiger [taiga] tigre, asia [eishia]
asia, which one [uich uan] cual, which [uich] cual, to walk into [guok θrau] caminar, lion
[laion] león, cage [keich] jaula, cat [kat] gato.
12
Sexta leccion
En el zoologico
1. Niños, hoy vamos a ver a los animals más peligrosos de el mundo.

2. Este es un elefante.
3. (Él) vive en Africa.
4. Esos son monos, los monos viven en Africa tambien.
5. Este es un tigre. Los tigres viven en Asia.
6. Señorita Anderson, que animal es ese?
7. Cual?
8. Ese que está caminando en la jaula del leon.
9. Ese es un gato.
Reading
1. Where are they?

____________________________________________
2. What animals live in Asia?
____________________________________________
3. Who’s Miss Anderson?
____________________________________________
4. Which animal is in the lion’s cage, a dog or a cat?
____________________________________________
13
Demonstrative
The demonstratives are words that indicate the distance in what someone or
something is.
Este Ese/aquel
Singular This Esta That Esa/aquella
Esto Eso/aquello
Plural These Estos Those Esos/aquellos

Estas Esas/aquellas
The interrogative and negative form are built as it were the verb to be.
This is not a ball
Are these your shoes?
Usage
We use the possessive to ask about something.
What’s this? -It’s a table.
14
Exercise 1
Completa los espacios en blanco usando los demostratives.
1. What is ________? It’s a dog.

2. What is ________? It’s a cat. (lejos)
3. What are ________? They’re rabbits.
4. What are ________? They’re lions. (lejos)
5. What is ________? It’s a dog.
6. What is ________? It’s a bird. (lejos)
7. What are ________? They’re rabbits.
8. What are ________? They’re lions. (lejos)
Exercise 2
Escribe en inglés las siguientes oraciones.
1. Este es un ratón. ______________________________________________.

2. Esas son hormigas. ____________________________________________.
3. Esta es una ballena. ___________________________________________.
4. Esos son unos caballos. ________________________________________.
5. Estas son jirafas. ______________________________________________.
6. Esa es una Tortuga. ___________________________________________.
7. Estos son tiburones. ___________________________________________.
8. Ese es un pez. ______________________________________________.
15
Writing
Reescribe el dialogo usando animales.
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
16
Speaking
Contesta las siguientes palabras:
What’s your favourite animal?
My favourite animal is ______________.
Do you like dogs/cats/rabbits …?
Yeah, I do (sí)/ No, I don’t (no)
What pet do you have?
Yeah, I do (sí)/ No, I don’t (no)
17
Seventh lesson
Women
1. My boyfriend is taller and stronger than yours. And he’s slimmer and nicer.
2. Yeah, but my boyfriend is more intelligent and more handsome.
3. So what? I really don’t care, because my boyfriend is going to be a sales
manager in an international company.
4. But your boyfriend is in prison!
5. Maybe, but he’ll be it as soon as he leaves.
Boyfriend [boifriend] novio, nice [nais] agradable, but [bot] pero, so what [so uat] y que,
really [rili] realmente, don’t care [don’t keir] no me preocupa, is going to be [is going tu bi]
va a ser, sales manager [seils manaya] gerente de ventas, important [important}
importante, company [kompani], prison [prishon] carcel, maybe [meibi] tal vez/quisaz, he
will be [ji guil bi] él será, as soon as [es sun es] tan pronto como, to leave [tu lifv] salir.
18
Septima leccion
Mujeres
1. Mi novio es más alto y más fuerte que el tuyo. Y es más Delgado y más
agradable.
2. Sí, pero mi novio es más inteligente y más guapo.
3. Y que, no me preocupa porque mi novio va a ser gerente de ventas en una
empresa internacional.
4. Pero tu novio está en la carcel!
5. Sí, pero lo será, encuanto salga…
Reading
1. Who is speaking?
____________________________________________
2. How’s his boyfriend?
____________________________________________
3. Where does he work?
____________________________________________
4. What will he be?
____________________________________________
19
Comparative
El comparative se utiliza para indicar que algo o alguién es más que otra cosa
u otra persona o para indicar que algo o alguién es menos que otra cosa u otra
persona.
General rule +er Fast Faster

RESUMÉC Double consonant Hot Hotter
+ er
Y (two syllables) Er --> ier Happy Happier
Two or more More Intelligent More intelligent
syllables
Irregular Comparative
Adjective Comparative
Bad Worse
Far Farther (for distance)

Further (for everything else)
Good Better
Little Less
Many More
Much
OldOlder/Elder (when we refer to knowing or experience)
20
Exercise 1
Contesta las siguientes oraciones usando el comparativo.
1. We’re ________ (tranquilo) than her.

2. I’m ________ (trabajador) than you.
3. You’re ________ (grosero) than them.
4. They’re ________ (responsable) than you.
5. He’s ________ (educado) than us.
6. I’m ________ (comprometido) than her.
7. She’s ________ (valiente) than me.
8. I’m ________ (flojo) than us.
9. It’s ________ (amable) than you.
10. You’re ________ (presumido) than them.
Exercise 2
Contesta las siguientes oraciones usando el comparativo.
1. We’re ________ (friendly) than her.

2. I’m ________ (shy) than you.
3. You’re ________ (comprensive) than them.
4. They’re ________ (funny) than you.
5. He’s ________ (educado) than us.
6. I’m ________ (big) than her.
7. She’s ________ (cariñosa) than me.
8. Brazil is ________ (hot) than Argentina.
9. It’s ________ (cold) than you.
10. You’re ________ (compromised) than them.
21
Writing
Escribe un texto donde compares a los miembros de tu familia.
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
22
Speaking
Are you taller than your dad?
Yeah, I am (sí)/ No, I’m not (no)
Are you friendlier than your other people?
Are you funnier than your other people?
Are you happier than your other people?
Are you faster than your friends?
23
Second
Unit
The Family
24
 Describir a una persona

 Decir donde están los lugares de la ciudad
 Decir como llegar a un lugar
 Decir como es tu casa
Temas
 Definite Article
 Possessive
 Have/got
 There is/there are
 Prepositions
 Possessive 2
 Superlative
25
Eighth lesson
Poetry
1. Hear this poem!

2. “Roses are red
3. The sky is blue
4. Mountains are brown like the brown of your eyes”
5. What a small poem!
6. Mm, that’s the reason for which you must never show a work in progress.
7. Don’t get mad! Let’s play a game?
8. What do you want us to do?
9. Let’s play chess?
10. I don’t like chess. Mm, don’t you want to play football?
11. Yeah, I like a lot football.
Poetry [poetry] poesia, to hear [jir] oir, rose [rous] rosa, red [red] rojo, sky [skai] cielo, blue
[blu] azul, mountain [mountain] montaña, brown [braun] cafe, like [laik] como, your [yor] tu,
eye [ai] ojo, small [smol] pequeño, poem [poem] poema, raison [rison], never [neva], to
show [tu shou] mostrar, work [guork] trabajo, progress [progress] progreso, to get mad [ptu
guet engri]enojarse, football [futbol] football americano, let’s [lets] vamos a, to play [tu plei]
jugar, game [gueim] juego, a lot [a lot] mucho,
26
Octava leccion
Poesia
1. Escucha este poema.
2. “Las rosas son rojas
3. El cielo es azul
4. Las montañas son cafes como el café de tus ojos”
5. Que poema tan corto!
6. Mm, por eso nunca debes mostrar un trabajo en progreso.
7. No te enojes. Vamos a jugar un juego.
8. Que quieres que hagamos?
9. Vamos a jugar ajedrez.
10. No me gusta el ajedrez. Mm, no quieres jugar football?
11. Sí, el football es mi deporte favorito.
Reading
1. What color is the sky?

____________________________________________
2. Which color is the roses, white or red?
____________________________________________
3. Does he like chess?
____________________________________________
4. What’s his favourite sport?
____________________________________________
27
The Article
Articulo definido Definite Article

El
La
Lo The
Los
Las
“The” se pronuncial /da/. Cuando “the” está antes de una palabra comenzada por
sonido de vocal se pronuncial /di/.
The cat /da kat/
The ocean /di ouschean/
No usamos el articulo definido:
1. Cuando hablamos en general (solo para sustantivos plurales)

Lions live in Africa
The lions of the circus are funny
2. Con el nombre de titulus cuando mencionamos el nombre de la persona.

King Bill is good
But The King is good
3. Con las palabras breakfast, lunch and dinner y el nombre de comidas.

I have dinner at seven
I like Enchiladas
4. Con los colores, juegos, deportes y dias de la semana.

Red is a good color.
Chess is boring.
I like football
Moday is my favourite day
28
Escribe el articulo donde falte.
1. _____ King Richard.

2. _____ whales live in the sea.
3. _____ Green.
4. _____chess is boring.
5. _____football is my favourite sport.
6. _____Enchiladas is delicious.
7. _____black is my favourite coulour.
8. _____Monday isn’t my best day.
9. _____King Richard.
10. _____Doctor Smith.
Traduce al español las siguientes oraciones.
1. El sol es Amarillo. ___________________________

2. El doctor está aqui. ___________________________
3. El café está aqui es negro. ___________________________
4. Los peces del acurio son dorados. ___________________________
5. Las nubes son blancas. ___________________________
6. El sol es Amarillo. ___________________________
7. Las naranjas son naranjas. ___________________________
8. La rosa de la mesa es morada. ___________________________
9. El basketball es un deporte. ___________________________
10. Las plantas son verdes. ___________________________
29
Writing
Busca en internet un collage y describelo usando los adjetivos y los colores. (50
palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
30
Speaking
What’s your favourite color?
My favourite color is ________
What’s your favourite sport?
My favourite sport is ________
What’s your favourite meal?
My favourite meal is ________
What’s your favourite game?
My favourite game is ________
What’s your favourite day of the week?
My favourite day of the week is ________
31
Ninth lesson
The family
1. Who’s this?
2. Who, the blond man?
3. Yeah!
4. He’s my dad.
5. He’s very tall.
6. Yeah, and my bro too.
7. Who are the women in orange?
8. They are my cousins.
9. And the man in black?
10. He’s my uncle and the woman next to him is my aunt.
11. And who’s kid with the broken pants?
12. That’s me.
Family [family] familia, man [mn] hombre, dad [fada] padre, tall [tol] alto, brother [broda]
hermano, orange [oranch] naranja, cousin [kasin] primo, black [blak] negro, uncle [onkol]
tio, next to [neks tu jim] junto a el, aunt [aunti] tia, little [lirul] pequeño, boy [boi] niño,
broken [broken] roto, pants [pants], That’s me [dats mi] soy yo.
32
Novena lección
La familia
1. Quien es?
2. Quien, el hombre rubio?
3. Sí
4. Es mi papa
5. Es muy alto
6. Sí, y mi hermano también
7. Quienes son las mujeres de naranja?
8. Son mis primas
9. Y el hombre de negro?
10. Es mi tio y la mujer que está junto a el es mi tia
11. Y quien es el niño con los pantalones rotos?
12. Soy yo.
Reading
1. How is his dad and brother?

____________________________________________
2. Who is in red?
____________________________________________
3. Who’s next to his uncle?
____________________________________________
4. Who’s the boy with the broken pants?
____________________________________________
33
Possessive Adjective
A possessive is a word that indicates that some one or someone belongs to

another person or thing or for indicate relationship.
My /mai/ Mi(s)
Your /yor/ Tu(s)
His Su (de él)
Her Su (de ella)
Its Su (de it)
Our /auer/ Nuestro/a/s
Your Su (de ustedes)
Their /der/ Su (de ellos/ellas)
Usage
A difference of the Spanish, the same form of the possessive for the plural
My car
My cars
In all the other cases, it is used on the same
34
Escribe el posesivo que falte en el espacio adecuado.
1. ________ dad is tall. (mí)

2. ________ mom is beautiful. (su) (de ellos)
3. ________ brothers are smart. (su) (de ellas)
4. ________ sister is funny. (tu)
5. ________ cousins are fast. (sus)
6. ________ uncle is old. (nuestro)
7. ________ aunt is young. (su) (de él)
8. ________ grandma is strong. (mis)
9. ________ grandma is tender. (su) (de ustedes)
10. ________ sons are weak. (sus) (de ella)
11. Mi novio es alto. ___________________________

12. Su casa es verde. ___________________________ (de mi perro)
13. Tu sobrino es nuevo. ___________________________
14. Su novia es inglesa. ___________________________ (de él)
15. Nuestro nieto es jovén. ___________________________
16. Tu sobrina es bonita. ___________________________
17. Su bisabuela es francesa. ___________________________ (de ellos)
18. Sus casas son naranajas. ___________________________ (de mis gatos)
19. Su hija es joven. ___________________________ (de ellos)
20. Su amigo es mexicano. ___________________________ (de ustedes)
35
Writing
Imagina que estas en tu escuela y te pide tu maestra que presentes a tu familia.

Has un pequeño texto donde describas a tu familia. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
36
Speaking
How are you?
How your family?
What coulour is your hair/eyes?
How’s your mouth/ Nose?
American culture
La idea de una familia Americana grande dista en nuestros dias mucho de la

realidad. Segundatos del 2018, el promedio de hijos por mujer es de 1.73.
37
Tenth lesson
At museum
1. This is the David. It was built by Miguel Angello. Look at how well the
sculptor has recreated the details of the human body and how well he has
made the head, the nose and the ears. Simply, perfect.
2. Honey, what do you think?
3. I think the way which he made the arms, the hands and the fingers is well in,
but he should have put more effort in the legs and in the knees, they look
like they were 88-years-old grandma’s legs.
4. Yeah. Is he Mike?
5. Who? The man that comes with the long black hair woman?
6. Yeah.
7. No, Mike has brown hair and his girldfriend doesn’t have black hair.
8. Do they have kids?
9. No, they don’t.
10. But have they have a dog, don’t they?
11. Yeah. Why so many questions?
12. Nothing, I’m boring, let’s go for a hamburger.
Museum [miusmium] museo, to build [tu bild] construer, sculptor [skultor] escultor,
perfectly [perfecli] perfectamente, to recreat [tu recrieit], recrear, ear [ir] oreja, simply
[simpli] simplemente, perfect [perfekt] perfecto, Honey [joni] querida, you think about it
[tu θing] tu que piensas, way [güei] forma, arm [arm] brazo, hand [jand] mano, finger
[finga] dedo, should have [shud jafv] debio haber, effort [efort] esfuerzo, leg [leg]
pierna, knee [ni] rodilla, 88-years-old [eigty yirs old] de 88 años, grandma [grandmoda]
abuela, you’re right [yur raight] tener razon, to come [tu kom] venir, hair [jeir] cabello,
kids [kids] hijos, dog [dog] perro, so many [so meni] tantas, question [kuestion]
pregunta, nothing [noθing] nada, boring [boring] aburrido, let’s go [ lets gou] vamos,
hamburger [jamburguer] hamburguesa.
38
Decima lección
En el museo
1. Este es el David, fue hecho por Miguel Angello. Miren lo bien que el escultor
a recreado los detalles de el cuerpo humano y lo bien que ha hecho la
cabeza, la nariz y las orejas, simplemente perfecto.
2. Que piensas, querida?
3. Pienso que la manera en la que ha hecho los brazos, las manos y los dedos
está bien, pero el debio haber puesto más esfuerzo en las piernas y las
rodillas, parecen las piernas y las rodillas de una abuela de 88 años.
4. Si, tienes razon. Ese es Bill?
5. Quien? El hombre que viene con la mujer de cabello largo negro?
6. Sí
7. No, Tom tiene el cabello café y su novia no tiene el cabello negro.
8. Ellos tiene hijos?
9. No
10. Pero tienen perro, no?
11. Sí, porque tantas preguntas?
12. No se, estoy aburrida, vamos por una hamburguesa.
Reading
1. Is he Tom?
____________________________________________
2. Does Tom have black hair?
____________________________________________
3. Do they have kids?
____________________________________________
4. Do they have a cat?
____________________________________________
39
Have/has
You have
You do not have
You don’t have
Do you have?
Yeah, I do
No, I don’t
She has
She does not have
She doesn’t have
Does she have?
Yeah, she does
No, she doesn’t
40
Escribe la forma correcta del verbo have/got en el espacio.
1. I __________ brown hair.

2. Michelle _________ fine lips.
3. You _________ black hair.
4. He _________ curly white hair.
5. They _________ small eyes.
6. She _________ wavy brown hair.
7. You _________ a small nouse.
8. It _________ big ears
9. María _________ small mouth.
10. We _________ straight black hair.
21. Mi frente es grande. ___________________________

22. Su cara es pequeña. ___________________________ (de mi perro)
23. Tu diente es nuevo. ___________________________
24. Su cuello es largo. ___________________________ (de él)
25. Nuestro cuerpo es moreno. ___________________________
26. Tu mano es grande. ___________________________
27. Su rodilla es pequeña. ___________________________ (de ellos)
28. Sus brazos son fuertes. ___________________________ (de mis gatos)
29. Su pie es pequeño. ___________________________ (de ellos)
30. Su codo está limpio. ___________________________ (de ustedes)
41
Writing
Escribe una descripción de tu pareja ideal para una pagina de citas. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
42
Speaking
Do you haveboyfriend/girlfriend?
Yeah, I have/ No, I haven’t.
Do you have kids?
Do you have brown hair?
Has your mom have fine lips?
Yeah, she has/ No, she hasn’t.
Has your dad have big ears?
Yeah, he has/ No, he hasn’t.
American culture
El Museo de Arte moderno de Los Angeles
43
Eleventh lesson
Directions
1. Excuse me, is there a bank near here?

2. Yes, there’s one in Thomson road.
3. How can I get there?
4. You’re going to go until Johnson street, then, you’re going to turn left, you
will see a movie theater.
5. You’re going to walk across the street and go to the bus stop.
6. You’re going to wait for the bus and get off in Greenwich park.
7. Go ahead and you get to Thomson street.
8. You’ll recognize it because there are a lot of Chinese restaurants there.
9. You can’t miss it.
10. Thanks very much! – You’re welcome.
Direction [direkshion] dirección, bank [bank] banco, road [rod] calle, to get [tu guet]
llegar , to go up [tu gou op], until [ontil] hasta (que), then [den] luego, to turn left [tu torn
left] dar vuelta a la izquierda, movie theater [sinema] cine, to walk across [guok akros]
atravezar, street [stit] calle, to go [tu gou], bus stop [bus stop] parada del camion, to
wait for [tu wueit for] esperar (a) , bus [bus] camion, to get down [guet daun] bajar(se),
park [park] parque, to go ahead [tu gou ajed] ir(se) todo derecho, to recognize [tu
rikonaiz] reconocer, Chinese [chainis] chino, restaurant [restaurant] restaurante, you
can’t miss it [yu kent mis it] no hay pierde, thanks very much [θenkiu] muchas gracias
44
Decima primera lección
Direcciones
1. Disculpe, hay un banco cerca de aqui?

2. Sí, hay uno en la calle Thomson.
3. Como puedo llegar?
4. Vaya a la calle Johson, luego de Vuelta a la izquierda, va a ver un cine.
5. Cruce la calle y vaya a la parade del camion.
6. Espere el camion y baje en Greenwich park.
7. Camine todo derecho y va a llegar a la calle Thomson.
8. La reconocerá porquee hay muchos restaurantes chinos.
9. No ay pierde.
10. Muchas gracias -De nada
Reading
1. Where is there a bank?

____________________________________________
2. What wil he see?
____________________________________________
3. Where does he have to get off?
____________________________________________
4. What is there in Thomson road?
____________________________________________
45
There is/ there are
Usamos “there is” y “there are” para decir “hay”
Usamos “there is” para los sustantivos sigulares y “there are” para los sustantivos
plurales.
46
Exercise 1
Escribe la forma correcta del verbo to be en los espacios en blanco.
1. There _____ a school in my neighborhood.

2. There _____ a lot of hotels here.
3. There _____ a hospital at the corner. (not)
4. _____ there a city near here?
5. There _____ two restaurants in this street.
6. There _____ an airport in the city. (not)
7. There _____ a port in the beach.
8. Are _____ there museums in the town?
9. There _____ several coach stations. (not)
10. There _____ a park next to the avenue.
Exercise 2
1. Hay una universidad. ___________________________

2. ¿Hay un castillo en el parque?. ___________________________
3. No hay un banco. ___________________________
4. Hay mercados en la calle. ___________________________
5. Hay un centro comercial. ___________________________
6. Hay casas. ___________________________
7. Hay una plaza. ___________________________
8. ¿hay una iglésia?. ___________________________
9. Hay un cine. ___________________________
10. No hay monumentos en la avenida. _________________________
47
Writing
Escribe un mensaje a un amigo donde le digas como llegar a tu casa desde el

aeropuerto de tu ciudad. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
48
Speaking
What is there in your neighborhood?
There is/are _____ in my city.
Is there any famous place in your neighborhood?
Yeah, there are/ No, there aren’t
What is there in your city?
There are _____ in my city.
Is there any famous place in your city?
Yeah, there is/ No, there isn’t
What are they?
49
Twelfth lesson
Home, sweet home
1. Dear parents,
2. It’s been difficult but I believe we’ve already found a house.
3. It’s in Beberley Hills neighborhood, it’s small, but It has all the amenities and
a yard.
4. This week the move truck got and we could seat the furniture.
5. The table and the chairs fitted perfectly in the kitchen but the problem was
the sofa and the armchair that were too big to fit in the living-room, and the
window of the bathroom was broken, I’ll fix that as soon as I got time.
6. The good thing is that the new office isn’t very far from the house, so I can
get there on foot.
7. I miss you,
8. Your son Miguel
Home, weet home [jom, suit jom] hogar, dulce hogar, parents [parents] padres, It has
been [it jas bin] ha sido, difficult [dificult] dificil, to believe [bilifv] creer, we’ve already
found [guifv alredi faund] al fin hemos encontrado, house [jaus] casa, neighborhood
[neigbourjud] colonia, all [ol] tod(s), amenities [amenitis] servicios, yard [yard] jardin,
week[guik] semana, move lorry [mufv lorry] camion de mudanza, could [kud] podria, to
seat [tu sit] acomodar, furniture [fornichia] mueble(s), table [teibol] mesa, chair [cheir]
silla, to fit [tu fit] encajar, living-room [lifving rum] sala, window [guindou] ventana,
bathroom [batrum] baño, broken [broken] roto, I’ll have to [ail jafv tu] tender que, fix
[fiks] arreglar, as soon as [as sun as] tan pronto como, the good thing [da gud θing],
office [ofis] oficina, so [so] asi que, can [kan] puedo, on foot [on fut] a pie, to miss [tu
mis] extrañar.
50
Decima segunda lección
Hogar dulce, hogar
1. Queridos padres,
2. Ha sido dificil pero creo que ya encontramos casa.
3. Está en la colonia Westminster, es pequeña, pero tiene todos los servicios y
tiene un jardin.
4. Esta semana el camion de la mudanza llego y pudimos meter los muebles.
5. La mesa y las sillas entraron perfecto en la conica pero el problema fue el
sillon y el sillon chiquito que eran demasiado grandes para caber en la sala,
y la ventana del baño estaba rota, la arreglaré en cuanto tenga tiempo.
6. Lo bueno es que la nueva oficina esta muy cerca de la casa, asi que ir
caminando.
7. Los extraño.
8. Miguel
Reading
1. Where is the house?

____________________________________________
2. What rooms does the house have?
____________________________________________
3. Is the house near the house?
____________________________________________
4. How does he get to his office?
____________________________________________
51
Prepositions
Inglés Español Inglés Español

Behind Atraz On the edge of En la orilla
Near (to) Cerca Above Mas alla de
Around Alrededor On the top of En la cima de
Round
Between Entre On the right A la derecha
Among Entre (cuando son 3 o On the left A la izquierda
mas cosas)
Next to Junto a Ahead Todo derecho
In front of En frente de/ A fuera Past Pasando
de (lugar)
Al otro lado de
Opposite En frente de (cuando Inside Adentro
hay algo enmedio que
los separa)
Cerca (que lo
By podemos ver o esta Outside Afuera
muy cerca de
dondeestamos)
Far (away) Lejos Upstairs Arriba
At the corner En la esquina Downstairs Abajo
Over Sobre (sin contacto) Under Abajo/debajo
Against Contra
52
In, On At
Usamos on:
a. Para indicar que algo está sobre una superficie.

The Glass is on the table.
b. Con las expresiones “on the first, second…. Floor”

He lives on the second floor.
c. Con los medios de trasporte.

We’re on the bus.
Usamos at:
a. Con tiendas, negocios y lugares barlicos.

We are at Bucher’s.
We are at Supermarket
b. Con el nombre de edificions y construcciones cuando se menciona su

nombre.
I’m at stadium Azteca. But I’m in the stadium.
c. Con los lugares de trabajo y centros educativos.
I work at Coca Cola.

I study at UNAM.
d. Con las expresiones “home” y “at work”
53
En todos los demás casos usamos “in”.
54
Exercise 1
Escribe la preposición correcta en los espacios en blanco. (varias opciones son

posibles)
1. The cat is _____ the table.

2. There is a sofa _____ the living-room.
3. There is a forest _____ the city.
4. The kitchen is_____ the door.
5. There are two beds _____ my room.
6. There is a house _____ the house.
7. There _____ the yard.
8. The restroom is _____ the stairs.
9. There is a swimming pool _____ garage.
10. There is an attic _____ my room.
Exercise 2
Traduce al inglés las siguientes oraciones.
1. Hay una araña sobre mi cabeza. ___________________________

2. Hay un museo en la orilla del mar. ___________________________
3. Hay una unidad habitacional junto a mi casa. ______________________
4. Hay un pueblo más alla de las montañas. __________________________
5. Hay un sillón grande a la izquierda de la sala. _______________________
6. Hay un comedor entre la cocina y la sala. __________________________
7. Hay un atico en la cima de mi recamará. ___________________________
8. Hay un comedor a la derecha de la ventana. ________________________
9. Hay un sillón chiquito en el sotano. ___________________________
10. Hay un departamento lejos de mi casa. ___________________________
11. Hay una araña sobre mi cabeza. ___________________________
55
Writing
Escribe una carta para una agencia de vienes raices donde que tipo de Vivienda
quieres y que tiene que tener. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
56
Speaking
How’s your haouse?
My house is _____.
What rooms does It has?
It has _____.
What is there in your room?
In my room there is/are _____.
Is there near your house?
Near from my house there is/are _____.
In what floor do you live.
I live on the _____ floor.
American culture
Wentsmister es una de las colonias más importantes de Los Ángeles. Está llena
de atracciones turísticas y monumentos históricos. En este lugar es donde se
encuentra el palacio de Buckingham, lugar de residencia de la reina del Reino
Unido.
57
Thirteenth lesson
Whose is this?
1. Is this my pen?
2. No, this is mine.
3. Where’s yours?
4. I don’t know, I let it on the table but it isn’t.
5. Have you looked for in your backpack, yet?
6. Yeah, but only my pencil, my case and my eraser are there.
7. Why don’t you ask Sally if you can borrow hers?
8. No, because she´s busy and I haven’t’ given her back hers.
Whose is this [jus is dis] de quien es, pen [pen] lapis, to let [tu let] dejar, table [teibol]
mesa, pencil [pensil] lapis, case [keis] lapicera, eraser [roba] goma, schoolbag [skulbag]
mochila, to ask [tu ask] preguntar, to lend [tu lend] prestar, busy [bizi] ocupado, to give
back [tu gifv back] regresar.
58
Decima tercera lección
De quien es?
1. Es esta mi pluma?
2. No, está es la mia.
3. Donde esta la tuya?
4. No se, la deje encima de la mesa pero ya no está.
5. Ya buscaste en tu mochila?
6. Sí, pero solo está mi lapiz, mi estuchera y mi goma.
7. Porque no le pides a Kate que te preste la suya?
8. No, porque está ocupada y no le he regresado la suya.
Reading
1. Is the pen him?

____________________________________________
2. Where was his pen?
____________________________________________
3. What are there in his school back?
____________________________________________
4. Does he have a computer in his school back?
____________________________________________
59
Possessive Pronouns
Personal pronoun Possessive pronoun

I Mine
You Yours
He His
She Hers
It *its own
We Ours
You Yours
They Theirs
*It no tiene un pronombre posesivo. La frase “its own” es usado en su lugar.
Usamos el posesivo con la estructura “a/the/this + possessive”
He is a friend of her (es un amigo de ella)
En todos los demás casos se usa igual que en español.
60
Exercise 1
Escribe la pronom possessive correcto en el espacio en blanco.
1. This chair is _____. (mia)

2. Those pens are ________. (nuestas)
3. That sharpener is ________. (suyas) (de ellas)
4. These pencils are ________. (tuyos)
5. This color is _____. (suyas) (de ustedes)
6. Those rucksacks are ________. (suya) (de él)
7. That notebook is ________. (mia)
8. These cases are ________. (suyas) (de ellos)
9. This chair is _____. (tuya)
10. Those erasers are ________. (suyas) (de ella)
Exercise 2
1. Esta hoja es mia. ___________________________

2. Este borrador es mio. ___________________________
3. Ese pizarrón es mio. ___________________________
4. Esta engrapadora es mia. ___________________________
5. Esos marcadores de textos son mios. ___________________________
6. Estas grapas son tuyas. ___________________________
7. Este diurex es mia. ___________________________
8. Esa regla es mia. ___________________________
9. Estos correctores son mios. ___________________________
10. Estas tijeras son mias. ___________________________
61
Writing
Rescribe el dialogo cambiando los possessive pronouns y los objetos. (50

palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
62
Speaking
Contesta las siguientes preguntas en inglés.
1. Whose is this pen?

It’s _____________
2. Whose is those books?
It’s _____________
3. Whose is that pencil?
It’s _____________
4. Whose is this ruler?
It’s _____________
5. Whose is these rocksacks?
It’s _____________
63
Fourteenth lesson
Animals
1. The most ancient animals in the planet are the turtles and the crocodiles,
whose ancestors lived on earth much earlier than dinosaurs.
2. The fastest animal at present is the leopard, but only on land because in the
sea the sharks are the fastest. The biggest shark is the whale shark, which
can measure until 20 yards of length.
3. Among the birds, the crows are the most intelligent; they can resolve
problems that only a dolphin could resolve.
4. And the most dangerous predator is the cat, which can hunt more than 100
species.
Ancient [ancient] antiguo, planet [planet] planeta, turtle [torcol] tortuga, crocrodile
[krokodail] cocodrilo, whose [jus] cuyo, ancestor [ancestor] antepasado, to live [tu
lifv] vivir, earth [eart] tierra, much [moch] mucho, early [erli] temprano, dinosaur
[dainosaur] dinosaurio, at present [at present] actualmente, leopard [leopard]
leopard, only [onli] solo/solamente, land [land] tierra, sea [si] mar, shark [shark]
tiburon, whale [ueil] ballena, which [uich] el cual, to meseure [meshur] medir, length
[lengt] longitude, bird [bird] pajaro, crown [kraun] cuervo, to resolve [tu risolfv]
resolver, problem [problem] problema, dolphin [dolfin] delfin, predator [predator]
depredador, to hunt [tu jont], species [spicis] especie.
64
Decima cuarta lección
Animales
1. Los animales más antiguos en el planeta son las tortugas y los cocodrilos,
cuyos ancestros vivieron en la tierra mucho antes que los dinosaurios.
2. El animal más rapido en el presente es el leopard, pero solo en la tierra
porque en el mar los tiburones son los más rapidos. El tiburón más grande
es el Tiburon ballena, que puede medir hasta 20 metros de largo.
3. Entre las aves, los cuervos son los animales más intelligentes, ellos pueden
resolver problemas que solo un delfin podria resolver.
4. Y el depredador más peligroso es el gato, que puede cazar más de 100
especies.
Reading
1. What are the most antiens animals?

____________________________________________
2. What is the fastest animal in the sea?
____________________________________________
3. Is the white shark the biggest shark?
____________________________________________
4. What is the most dangerous predator?
____________________________________________
65
Superlative
General rule +est Fast Fastest

RESUMÉC Double consonant Hot Hottest
+ est
Y (two syllables) Er --> iest Happy Happiest
Two or more Most Intelligent Most intelligent
syllables
I’m the fastest (soy el más rapido)

You’re the funniest.
He’s the most intellifent.
Irregular Superlative
Adjective Comparative Superlative

Good Better Best
Bad Worse Worst
Many More Most
Much
Little Less Least
Far Farther Farthest
Further Furthest
Old Older Oldest
Elder Eldest
66
Exercise 1
Escribe el superlativo del adjetivo dado en los espacios en blanco.
1. The eagle is _____ (powerful.) bird.

2. The tiger is _____ (big) cats in the world.
3. The spider is _____ (poisonous) insects.
4. The crocodile is _____ (strong) reptiles.
5. The rabbit is _____ (soft) pets.
6. The donkey is _____ (smart) mammals.
7. The camel is _____ (resistent) animals in the desert.
8. The bee is _____ (known) insects.
9. The scorpion is one of _____ (poisonous) insects.
10. The Kangaroo is one of _____ (fast) animals.
Exercise 2
1. La galllina es el animal más cobarde ___________________________

2. El mosquito es uno de los insectos más comunes
___________________________
3. La oveja es el animal más suave ___________________________
4. El gallo es el animal más ruidoso ___________________________
5. El pingüino es una de las aves más conocidas _______________________
6. El pulpo es el animal marino más conocido
___________________________
7. El toro es uno de los animales más fuertes
___________________________
8. El zorro es el can más inteligente ___________________________
9. La cebra es el animal más rapido ___________________________
10. La mosca es el insecto más comun ___________________________
67
Writing
Haz un articulo para la revista de tu escuela donde digas cuales son los animales
más grandes, fuertes, conocidos, etc. de tu país. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
68
Speaking
What is the biggest animal, the bear, the lion or the elephant?
I believe bears/lions/elephants are __________ animals.
What is the funniest animal, the cat, the dog or the hamster?
I believe cats/dogs/hamsters are __________ animals.
What is the strongest animal?
I believe _____ are __________ animals.
What is the smarter animal?
I believe _____ are __________ animals.
What are the most common animals in a zoo?
I believe _____, _____ and _____ are __________ animals in a zoo.
69
Third Unit
Party
70
 Hablar de tus gustos

 Decir tu rutina
 Decir la hora
 Hablar del clima
Temas
 Present simple
 Personal object pronouns
 Possessive case
 Reflexive pronouns
 Hour
 Comparative of equality
Desde este punto es importante que leas la lista de verbos irregulares que viene al
final del libro.
Para mejorar tu lectura, por el momento solo te recomendamos leer tus lecciones
del libro.
71
Fifteenth lesson
Good evening, Mister Smith
1. Mister Smith leaves from his job at five o’clock. For returning to his house at
the suburbs, he goes to the train station and takes the train.
2. When he arrives at his home, he listens to music or watches the television.
3. He usually watches a movie on FOX or watch a documentary,
4. After that, he has something for dinner and washes the dishes.
5. Sometimes, he does shooping in the supermarket which is opposite his
house or does exercise.
6. Before going to bed, Mister Smith reads a book and puts on his pyjama.
7. On the weekend, Mister Smith takes spanish lessons in the morning and
meets his friends in the afternoon.
Good evening [gud ifvning] buenas noches, mister [mista] señor, to go out [tu gou aut]
salir, from [from] de, job [shyob] trabajo, o’clock [o klock] en punto, train [trein] tren, to get
[tu guet] llegar, home [jom] casa, to have dinner [tu jafv dina] cenar, to wash the dishes [to
guash da dishis] lavar los platos, to turn on [tu turnon] prendar, documentary [dokumentari]
documental, sometimes [somtaims] algunas veces, movie [movie] pelicula.
72
Decima quinta lección
Buenas noches, señor Smith
1. El señor Smith sale de su trabajo a las 5 en punto. Para regresa a su casa

en los suburbios, el va a la estación Waterloo y toma el tren.
2. Cuando llega a su casa, escucha musica o ve una pelicula.
3. Usualmente ve una pelicula en FOX o ve un documental.
4. Despúes de eso, el cena algo y lava los trastes.
5. Algunas veces, compra la despensa en el supermercado que esta enfrente
de su casa o hace ejercicio.
6. Antes de dormir, el señor Smith lee un libro y se pone su pillama.
7. El fin de semana, el señor Smith toma clases de español en la mañana y se
ve con sus amigos en la tarde.
Reading
1. What does he get to his house?

____________________________________________
2. What does he do when he arrives home?
____________________________________________
3. What does he do after having dinner?
____________________________________________
4. What does he do On the weekend?
____________________________________________
73
Present Simple
To Eat To go To play To fry

I Eat Go Play Fry
You Eat Go Play Fry
He Eats Goes Play Fry
She Eats Goes Plays Fries
It Eats Goes Plays Fries
We Eat Go Play Fries
You Eat Go Play Fry
They Eat Go Play Fry
Usamo el presente simple para:
1. Para hablar de estados permanentes.

Tina lives in Los Angeles.
2. Para hablar de acciones que se repiten o que son habituales.

The Mornarca Butterflies always come in summer.
I go to the bed at 11.
3. Para hablar de leyes naturales

Water boils at 100 centigrade
4. Para hablar de itenerarios y horarios.

The movie starts at 7:00.
The train leaves at 9:00.
5. En comentarios deportivos.
Chicarito passes the ball.
6. Para hablar de la historia de un libro, una pelicula, etc.

Harry Potter is the story about a kid who is magitian.
En todos los demás casos se usa como en español.
74
Exercise 1
Escribe la forma correcta del verbo dado en los espacios en blanco.
1. I _____ (wake up) early.

2. It _____ (arrive) at his work.
3. We _____ (come back) early.
4. You _____ (get up) early.
5. He _____ (work) in a company.
6. I _____ (have) dinner.
7. He _____ (take) a shower.
8. You _____ (study) a lot.
9. They _____ (go) to the bed.
10. She _____ (leave) early.
Exercise 2
Llena las siguientes frases con el verbo que le corresponde. (varias opciones son
posibles)
1. It __________ the T.V.

2. I __________ the disches.
3. He __________ the dog.
4. We __________ listening to music.
5. I __________ books.
6. He __________ exercise.
7. You __________ dinner.
8. I __________ spanish.
9. She __________ videos.
10. You __________ the storeping.
75
Writing
Imagina que te has ido a vivir a otro país. Dile a un amigo tuyo cual es tu rutina
allá (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
76
Speaking
What do you do at workdays?
I _____ at workdays.
What do you do in the afternoon?
I _____ in the afternoon.
What do you do when you arrived home?
When I arrived home I _____.
What do you do On the weekend?
I _____ On the weekend.
What do you do in your free time?
I _____ in my free time.
American culture
La estación Waterloo es la estación ferroviaria más grande y concurrida del Reino

Unido.
La BBC (British Broadcasting Corporation) es la televisorá y estación de radio más
importante del Reino Unido. A pesar de ser del gobierno, la BBC es considerada
por los británicos como una institución imparcial. La BBC cuenta con servicios
especiales para cada país del Reino Unido.
77
Sixteenth lesson
A bad moment
1. Hey, what’s your name?

2. My name is Cathy, what’s yours?
3. My name is Ted, do you like Red Hot Chilly Peapers?
4. Yeah, but I prefer The Rolling Stones.
5. What another band do you like?
6. I like a lot to listen to Maroon 5
7. Do you like classical music?
8. No, I find that boring.
9. What about Jazz?
10. I Iove that.
11. Do you want to go to a jazz club with me?
12. Of course, just let me finish the test.
Bad [bad] mal, moment [moment] momento, hi [jai] hola (informal), to like [tu laik] gustar, to
prefer [prefer] preferir, band [band] banda, a lot [a lot] mucho, to listen to [tu lisen tu]
escuchar, classical [klasikal] clasico, to find [faind] hacerse (parecer), boring (boring)
aburrido, to love [tu lofv] encantar/amar, to want [guant] querer, go dancing [gou dancing]
ir a bailar, of course [of kours] por supuesto, just [shyust] justo, to let [tu let] dejar, to finish
[finish] terminar, test [test].
78
Decima sexta lección
Un mal momento
1. Hola, como te llamas?

2. Me llamo Cathy, y tu?
3. Mi nombre es Ted, te gusta Red hot Chilly Peappers?
4. Sí, pero prefiero Maroon 5.
5. Que otra band ate gusta?
6. Me gusta mucho escuchar a los Rolling Stones
7. Te gusta la musica clasica?
8. No, se me hace aburrida.
9. Y el Jazz?
10. Me encanta.
11. Quieres ir a un club de jazz conmigo?
12. Sí, solo dejame terminar el examen.
Reading
1. What’s her name?

____________________________________________
2. Does she like Coldplay?
____________________________________________
3. What does she prefer?
____________________________________________
4. Does she like Rock and Billy?
____________________________________________
79
Affirmative form Negative form
I eat pizza I do not eat pizza
I don’t eat pizza
He eats meal He does not eat pizza
He doesn’t eat pizza
We make the interrogative form by adding do or does (for he,she, it) in front of the
personal pronoun.
Affirmative form Interrogative form form Answers

You eat pizza Do you eat pizza? Yeah, I do
No, I don’t
He eats pizza Does he buy pizza Yeah, he does
No, he doesn’t
80
Exercise 1
Escribe la forma correcta del verbo dado en los espacios en blanco. Recuerda
hacerlo en la forma negative.
1. I _____ (like) art.

2. It _____ (love) this novel.
3. We _____ (not mind) the music.
4. You _____ (like) this painter.
5. He _____ (can’t stand) that song.
6. I _____ (not like) the piano.
7. He _____ (be crazy about) french architecture.
8. You _____ (like) this esculture.
9. They _____ (like) this tail.
10. She _____ (can’t bear) literature.
Exercise 2
Llena las siguientes frases con el verbo que le corresponde. (varias opciones son
posibles) Recuerda que la respuesta debe estar en forma negativa
1. It __________ the guitar.

2. I __________ the theater.
3. He __________ the song.
4. We __________ bass.
5. I __________ books.
6. He __________ write.
7. You __________ drumms.
8. I __________ dance.
9. She __________ these videos.
10. You __________ paiting.
81
Writing
Imagina que te has ido a vivir a otro país. Enviale una carta a un amigo donde le
digas que es lo que te gusta de ese país. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
82
Speaking
What do you love doing?
I love _____.
What do you like watching?
I like watchin _____.
What don’t you mind doing?
I don’t mind _____.
What don’t you like eating?
I like eating _____.
What can’t you stand?
I can’t stand _____.
American culture
Debido a que nuestro studio se centra en el inglés estadunidense, sería una

Buena idea que escucharas bandas como Oasis, Jamiroquai y Doves debido a
que en estas se puede ver claramente el acento del inglés estadunidense. Otras
bandas britanicas famosas son Coldplay y Los Beatles.
Entre los escritores estadunidenses más famosos se encuentran William

Shakespear, cuya obra más famosas fue “Hamblet”, y Bill Dikens.
83
Seventeenth lesson
On the telephone
1. Hello!
2. Hi! Ann, how are you?
3. Hi! Cathy, good, thanks, what about you?
4. Good. Thanks
5. Do you want to go to a party on Saturday?
6. I can’t. I have a date.
7. Do you continue dating with Ted?
8. Yeah.
9. He loves you very much.
10. And I love him.
11. What does he do?
12. He’s a musician and he’s very well. He plays the guitar and the piano.
13. Do you believe he wants to play in the party?
14. I don’t know.
15. Why don’t you ask him if he’s interested and you call me.
16. I’ll ask him.
17. Well, I have to go. See you!
18. Bye!
Guitar [guitar] guitarra, piano [piano] piano, musician [miusishian] musico.
84
Decima septima lección
Al telefono
1. Bueno!
2. Hola, Ann, como estas?
3. Hola, Brenda, muy bien y tú?
4. Bien. Quieres ir a una fiesta el sabado?
5. No puedo. Tengo una cita.
6. Sigues saliendo con Ted?
7. Sí.
8. Él te quiere mucho.
9. Y yo lo quiero a él.
10. A que se dedica?
11. Es musico y es muy Bueno. Él toca la guitarra y el piano.
12. Crees que quiera tocar en la fiest?
13. No sé.
14. Porque no le preguntas y si está interesado me llamas.
15. Ok, le pregunté.
16. Bueno, tengo que irme. No vemos!
17. Adios!
Reading
1. Who calls?
____________________________________________
2. Does she love him?
____________________________________________
3. What does he do?
____________________________________________
4. What does he play?
____________________________________________
85
Personal Object Pronouns
Personal Pronoun Personal Object pronoun Pronombre de bjeto

I Me Me
You You Te
He Him Lo
She Her La
It It Lo/la (de it)
We Us Nos
You You Los/las (de ustedes)
They Them Los/las (de ellos/ellas)
Usamos los pronombres de objeto de la misma forma que en español.
To with the verbs
A diferencia del español, en inglés no usamos (to) con el objeto directo cuando
nos referimos a seres vivos.
I bath my dog. (baño a mi perro)
No I bath to my dog.
86
Exercise 1
Escribe el personal object pronoun correcto en los espacios en blanco.
1. I see _____. (te)

2. He watches _____. (la) (it)
3. We listen to _____. (los) (ellos)
4. You lie _____. (me)
5. He sees ____. (nosotros)
6. I heard _____. (la) (ella)
7. It smells _____. (los) (ustedes)
8. You touch ______. (lo) (it)
9. They call _____. (nos)
10. She loves _____. (lo) (él)
Exercise 2
Sustituye las siguientes frases como en el ejemplo.
I see Mike. I see him.
1. The dog smells the cat. ________________________.

2. You lie your husdand. ________________________.
3. He sees María. ________________________.
4. I hear Mike and Daniel. ________________________.
5. We listen to the radio. ________________________.
6. He waches the TV. ________________________.
7. You touch the cows. ________________________.
8. They call you and me ________________________.
9. She loves Mike. ________________________.
87
Writing
Rescribe el dialogo cambiando las personas, los objetos y los pronombres de

objeto. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
88
Speaking
Do you like watching the T.V.?
Do you like listening to Shakira?
Do you like listening Pavaroty?
Do you like listening to rock bands?
American culture
Apesar de su reputación de ser un país con mucha Lluvia, el Reino Unido tiene
una tasa de presipitación igual similar a los ddemás países europeos.
Los veranos en el Reino Unido son calidos y los inviernos son frios. Sin embargo,
la nieve es infrecuente.
89
Eighteenth lesson
A letter
1. Hi, Laura, I hope you’re good. I write you this letter because I want to tell
you how the life is in this country.
2. The life here isn’t very different from the life in Mexico, the only big
differences that the people here surf a lot and the weather. It’s very hot in
spring and rainy in summer, I always have to carry an umbrella and a
raincoat. In fall, the weather is cool and windy and in winter it’s very cold.
3. I hope you can visit me soon,
4. Love,
5. Daniela.
Letter [leder] carta, to write [tu rait] escribir, life [laif], country [kountri] pais, only [onli]
solamente, open [open] abierto, whether [gueder] clima, hot [jot] calor, spring [spring]
primavera, rainy [reini] lluvioso, summer [somer] verano, to carry [tu carri] llevar, umbrella
[ombrela] paraguas, raincoat [reinkot] impermeable, fall [fol] otoño, cool [kul] frio, to be
windy [tu bi guindi] hacer aire, winter [winter] invierno, cold [kold] frio, to hope [tu jop]
esperar, to visit [tu fvisit] visitar, Love [lofv] con amor.
90
Decimo octava lección
Una carta
1. Hola, Laura, espero que este bien. Te escribo esta carta porque quiero
decirte como es la vida en este país.
2. La vida aqui no es muy diferente a la vida en México, las unicas grandes
diferencias que he encontrado aqui es que la gente aqui surfea mucho
Otra diferencia es el clima. Hace mucho calor en primavera y llueve en el
verano. Siempre teng que cargar un paraguas y un abrigo. En otoño, hace
frio y en invierno hace mucho frio.
3. Espero que puedas visitarme pronto,
4. Con amor,
5. Daniela
Reading
1. Who is this?
____________________________________________
2. What’s the weather like up there?
____________________________________________
3. What’s the weather like down there?
____________________________________________
4. Are they happy?
____________________________________________
91
Adverbs of frequency
An adverb of frequency is a word that indicates how often something happens.
Adverb of frequency Meaning

Always Siempre
Almost always Casi siempre
Usually Normalmente/ Usualmente
Frequently Frecuentemente
Quiet often Bastante Seguido
Often Seguido
Sometimes A veces
Seldom Rara vez
Rarely Raramente
Hardly ever Dificilmente
Almost never Casi nunca
Never Nunca
92
Exercise 1
Usando el vocabulario del clima, llena los espacios en blanco con la palabra
correcta.
1. Mexico is _______. The temperature is 20..

2. France is _______. The temperature is 5.
3. Brazil is _______. The temperature is 30.
4. Italy is _______. The windy always blows..
5. Germany is _______. The temperature is 20.
6. United States is _______. The temperature is 8.
7. United States is _______. The temperature is 16.
8. China is _______. It always rain.
9. Australia is _______. The temperature is 35.
10. Swissland is _______. The temperature is -20 degrees.
Exercise 2
Traduce las siguientes oraciones.
1. El clima está bien. ________________________________.

2. El clima de Los Ángeles es nevoso.
________________________________.
3. La niebla es obscura. ________________________________.
4. La lluvia es fuerte. ________________________________.
5. Esta nublado. ________________________________.
6. El sol es amarillo. ________________________________.
7. La nueve es gris. ________________________________.
8. El clima está con niebla. ________________________________.
9. El viento es rapido. ________________________________.
10. Esta soledado. ________________________________.
93
Writing
Escribe un articulo para una revista donde digas como es el clima de tu país (50
palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
94
Speaking
What’s the weather like in spring in your country?
It’s __________ in spring in my country.
What’s the weather like in summer in your country?
It’s __________ in summer in my country.
What’s the weather like in fall in your country?
It’s __________ in fall in my country.
What’s the weather like in winter in your country?
It’s __________ in winter in my country.
What weather do you like?
I like _____ weather.
95
Nineteenth lesson
A new schedule
1. Hello, Ann!
2. Hello, Elizabeth.
3. How are the things in L.A.?
4. Good, but I feel very tired.
5. Why?
6. Because I have a lot of things to do.
7. What do you usually do?
8. At workdays, I usually wake up at seven to do exercise. After that, I take a
shower and have breakfast.
9. While I’m on the train to work, I always listen to music because the trip from
my house to L.A. isn’t very long.
10. Do you wear something different?
11. Yeah, actually, now I usually wear a long white dress with a light sweater
and my husband continue wearing the same thing that in Chicago, a white
shirt with a dark green tie and a brown suit.
12. I see, I have to hang because I have to open the door. I’ll call you back later.
Bye!
13. Bye!
To wake up [tu gueik op] despertarse, after that [after dat] despúes de eso, to take a
shower [tu teik a shogua] bañarse (en la regadera), at workdays [at guorkdeis] dias
lavorales/entre semana, train [trein] tren, trip [trip] viaje, suburbs [soborbs] zona
conurbada, actually [akchuali] de hecho, to wear [tu guer] vestir, white [guait] blanco, dress
[dres] vestido, shirt [shirt] camisa, dark [dark] obscuro, green [grin] verde, tie [tai] corbata,
suit [suit] traje.
96
Decima septima lección
Un nuevo horario
1. Hola, Ann!
2. Hola, Elizabeth.
3. Como estan las cosas en Los Ángeles?
4. Bien, pero estoy muy cansada.
5. Por que?
6. Porque tengo muchas cosas que hacer.
7. Que haces?
8. Entre semana, siempre me levanto a las cinco para hacer ejercicio.
Despúes de eso, me baño y desayuno.
9. Mientras estoy en el tren para el trabajo, siempre escucho musica porque el
viaje desde mi casa en los suburbios a Los Angeles no es muy largo.
10. Vistes algo diferente?
11. Sí de hecho, ahora, normalmente visto un vestido largo blanco y un suiter
ligero y mi esposo sigue vistiendo lo mismo que en Chicago, una camisa
blanca con una crbata verde obscure y un traje café.
12. Ya veo. Tengo que colgar porque tengo que abrir la puerta. Te llamo al rato.
Adios.
13. Adios!
Reading
1. What time does she wake up?

____________________________________________
2. What does she have for breakfast?
____________________________________________
3. What does her husband wear?
____________________________________________
4. What does she have to take with her?
____________________________________________
97
Reflexive verbs
Personal pronoun Verb Reflexive pronoun

I Cut Myself
You Yourself
He Himself
She Cuts Herself
It Itself
We Ourselves
You Cut Yourselves
They Themselves
We use the reflexive pronouns when:
1. We want to indicate that the action of the verb falls in the subject.
2. When we want to say that we enjoy doing something alone, that we can do
something without help or alone.
I like going to the movie theater by myself.
A difference to the Spanish, most of the verbs in English do not require a reflexive
pronoun.
Compare I wake up. Not I wake up myself.
Even so, English use the reflexive with kids, animals and when the person was
cannot do it alone.
My kid dress himself
My dog cut itself
After the accident, he couldn’t wake up himself.
3. To translate “el mismo, yo mismo, etc”

He wrote the book by himself.
98
Exercise 1
Usando los adverbios de frecuencia, llena los espacios en blanco con la plabra
correcta.
1. I _____ wake up early. (a veces)

2. He _____ arrives at his work. (nunca)
3. We _____ come back early. (siempre)
4. You _____ get up early. (seguido)
5. He _____ work in a company. (frecuentemente)
6. I _____ have chicken for dinner. (dificilmente)
7. He _____ takes a shower. (rara vez)
8. You _____ study a lot. (siempre)
9. They _____ go to bed. (normalmente)
10. She _____ leaves early. (raramente)
Exercise 2
Corrige las siguientes oraciones.
1. The car of the neighbor. ___________________________.

2. Houses’s windows. ___________________________.
3. It’s Anns. ___________________________.
4. The bone of the dog. ___________________________.
5. It’s a book of history. ___________________________.
6. My dad’s friend’s house. ___________________________.
7. The animals of farm. ___________________________.
8. The car of the my brother’s girlfriend. ___________________________.
9. The animals about zoo. ___________________________.
10. The car of Victor. ___________________________.
99
Writing
Imagina que te acbas de mudar a un país extranjero. Escribe una carta tu major
amigo donde le digas que es lo que haces en un dia normal en tu nuevo país.
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
100
Speaking
What time do you wake up?
I wake up at It’s __________.
What time do you take a shower?
I take the shower at __________.
What time do you leave from your house?
I leave from my house at __________.
What time do you come back?
I come back at __________.
What time do you brush your teeth?
I brush my teet at __________.
101
Twentieth lesson
What time is it?
1. What time is it, Daniela?

2. It’s eleven fifteen, why?
3. I must leave at 12PM, I want to watch the match.
4. What time does it start?
5. At 2PM.
6. What time are you going to the work, Daniela?
7. At 1:30PM.
8. Mike, Sahra, are you staying here?
9. No, we aren’t. Our train leaves at 1:45PM.
10. What train do you take?
11. The train to New York.
12. Daniela, do you take the bus to go to your job?
13. No, I take the subway.
14. I’m going to my house by cab, do you want a ride to the subway station?
15. Yeah, but we’d better hurry up, if not, I’m going to be late.
What time is it [uat taim is it] que horas son, match [match] partido, to start [tu start]
empezar, work [guork] trabajo, here [jia], cab [taksi] cab, to give a ride [tu gifv a raid] dar
un aventon, to hurry up [tu jorri op] dares prisa, if not [if not] si no, to be late [tu bi leit]
llegar tarde.
102
Vigesima lección
Que horas son?
1. Que horas son, Daniela?

2. Son 11:15, por que?
3. Tengo que irme a las 12, quiero ver el Partido.
4. A que horas empieza?
5. A las 2
6. A que hora te vas a ir a trabajar, Daniela?
7. A la una y media.
8. Mike, Ann, se van a quedar?
9. No, nuestro tren sale al cuarto para las dos.
10. Cual tren toman?
11. El tren a New York.
12. Daniela, tomas el tren para ir a tu trabajo?
13. No, tome el metro.
14. Me voy a ir a mi casa en cab, quieres que te de un aventon a la estacion del
metro?
15. Sí, pero será major que nos apuremos, sino, llegaré tarde.
Reading
1. What is the time?

____________________________________________
2. What time does the match start?
____________________________________________
3. What time does Daniela leave?
____________________________________________
4. What time does the train leave?
____________________________________________
103
Hour
En el Reino Unido existe un sistema para decir la hora unico.
8:00 it’s eight o’clock (we use o’clock when the hour has not got minutes)
En el lenguaje informal la palabra “o’clock” se omite.
8:05 It’s five past eight (we use past with minutes from 1 to 29 , except with 15)
8:15 it’s quarter past eight (we use quarter past with 15 minutes)
8:30 it’s eight and a half (we use and a half with 30 minutes)
8:35 It’s twenty-five to nine ( we use with the minutes from 31 to 59, except 45)
8:45 It’s quarter to nine (we use quarter to with 45 minutes)
Around (como a las) (más formal)
About (como a las)
104
Exercise 1
Escribe la hora con la forma britanica.
1. 5:00. ___________________________________
2. 11:00. ___________________________________
3. 6:04. ___________________________________
4. 12:00. ___________________________________
5. 11:40. ___________________________________
6. 7:15. ___________________________________
7. 3:00. ___________________________________
8. 11:00. ___________________________________
9. 8:30. ___________________________________
10. 4:45. ___________________________________
Exercise 2
Completa la oración.
1. The subway closes _______________________. (1:00)

2. The helicopter comes back _______________________. (5:35)
3. The bus arrives _______________________. (6:00)
4. Train leaves _______________________. (2:05)
5. The couches leaves _______________________. (5:40)
6. The tram leaves _______________________. (7:05)
7. The airplane flies _______________________. (3:15)
8. I ride my bicycle _______________________. (9:50)
9. The cabs leaves _______________________. (8:15)
10. The ship arrives _______________________. (4:30)
105
Writing
Escribe una carta a un amigo por mensaje donde le digas cual es tu rutina
diciendole la hora exacta en la que haces tus actividades. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
106
Speaking
What time do you get up?
I get up __________.
What time do you go to school?
I go to school __________.
What time do you have lunch?
I have lunch at __________.
What time do you have dinner?
I have dinner at __________.
What time do you go to bed?
I go to the bed at __________.
American culture
En el reino Unido existen tres sistemas para decir la hora. El reloj como lo
conocemos nosotros, el reloj de 24 horas, utilizado en horarios de trenes, cines,
etc, y el sistema británico que es el que acabamos de ver.
Los restaurantes cierran a las 5 de la tarde.
107
Twenty first lesson
At the mall
1. María, what do you think about these shoes?

2. They are very beautiful, but they aren’t as beautiful as these ones.
3. What do you think about this red dress?
4. It’s very elegant, but it isn’t as cheap as this gray.
5. You’re right. Did you hear the latest about Karen is pregnant again?
6. No, how many kids does she has?
7. Three
8. They’re a lot. Do you like kids?
9. Yeah, but I don’t want to have as many as her. Although if I had as much
money as her, I’d have them.
To think [θhink] pensar, dress [dres] vestido, gray [grei] gris, shoe [shu] zapato, to be right
[tu bi raight] tener razon, Did you hear the news [did yu jir da nius] ya te enteraste,
pregnant [pregnant] embarazada, again [aguein] otra vez, although [olθoug] aunque, if I
had [if ai jad] si tuviera, money [moni] dinero.
108
Vigesima primera lección
En el centro comercial
1. María, que piensas de estos zapatos?

2. Son mu bonitos, pero no son tan bonitos como estos.
3. Que piensas que este pantalón rojo?
4. Es muy elegante, pero no es tan elegante como este gris.
5. Tienes razón. Ya te enteraste que Karen está de nuevo embarazada.
6. No, cuantos hijos tiene?
7. Tres
8. Son muchos. Te ustan los niños?
9. Sí, pero no quiero tener tantos como ella. Aunque si tuviera tanto dinero
como ella, sí los tendria.
Reading
1. How are the shoes?

____________________________________________
2. What color are the pants?
____________________________________________
3. How are they?
____________________________________________
4. How many kids does Paula have?
____________________________________________
109
Comparative of equality
Usamos la estructura “as … as” para decir “tan … como”.
I am as happy as you.
He is as well as her.
Usamos la esctructura “as much … as” para decir “tanto … como”.
She can drink as much alcohol as a man.
Usamos la estructura “as many … as” para decir “tantos … como”.
She has as kids as you.
110
Exercise 1
Haz oraciones usando las palabras que te dan. Usa el comparative of equality.
1. These shoes _____________________________trainers. (good)

2. Those socks _____________________________ gloves. (old)
3. These pants _____________________________shorts. (new)
4. That costume _____________________________jacket. (black)
5. This T-shirt _____________________________ shirt. (solf)
6. That dress _____________________________pants. (beatiful)
7. These high heels _____________________________shoes. (bad)
8. That shirt _____________________________poullover. (hot)
9. This sweatshirt _____________________________sweater. (dirty)
10. Those jacket _____________________________ costume. (new)
Exercise 2
Traduce las siguientes oraciones al inglés.
1. Esta corbate es tan larga como la otra.

2. ________________________________________.
3. Este boton es tan nuevo como este.
4. ________________________________________.
5. Este sombrero es tan nuevo como esta gorra.
6. ________________________________________.
7. Esta bufanda es tan corta como esta corbata.
8. ________________________________________.
9. Esta falda es tan bonita como este vestido.
10. ________________________________________.
11. Estos jeans son tan baratos como este pantalón.
12. ________________________________________.
13. Esta sueter es tan viejo como esta chamarra.
14. ________________________________________.
15. Estos tennis son tan buenos como estos zapatos.
16. ________________________________________.
17. Esta gorra es tan roja como este sombrero.
18. ________________________________________.
111
Writing
Escribir un articulo donde digas que es lo que visten en tu país en las diferentes
estaciones del año. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
112
Speaking
What do you usually wear?
I usually wear __________.
What kind of clothes do you like?
I like __________ clothes.
What do the people of your country wear?
They were __________.
What do you wear in summer?
I weat __________ in summer.
What do you wear in winter?
In winter, I wear __________.
American culture
La falda esconsa, conocida como kit, es un símbolo de los países de escosia y de

irlanda. Se utiliza en situaciones importantes como en bodas, conferencias.
Otro símbolo de escocia es la gaita.
113
Forth Unit
Meal
114
En está unidad aprenderás a:
 Hablar de las reglas de tu país

 Dar consejos
 Decir cual es tu comida favorita
 Decir lo que comen en tu país
Temas
 Modal verbs
 Partitive
 Containers
 Expressions of quantity
115
Twenty-second lesson
The weather
1. Mommy, can we go to the park today?

2. I’m not sure.
3. Why not mommy?
4. Because It’s cold outside and you haven’t done your homework yet.
5. But I don’t have much, and I promise you I’ll do it as soon as we come back
6. Yeah, but it’s late.
7. But it’s only 6 o’clock.
8. Yeah, but look at that clouds, they’re gray it could rain.
9. But mommy, it’s winter! It might not rain
10. Yeah, but it could.
Mummy [momi] mamá, park [park] parque, to be sure [tu bi shor] estar seguro, homework
[jomwork] tarea, to promise [promais] prometer, as soon as [es sun es] tan pronto como,
late [leit] tarde, only [only] solo, to look at [tu luk at] mirar, cloud [claud] nuve, winter
[guinta] invierno.
116
Vigesima segunda lección
El clima
1. Mamá, Podemos ir al parque?

2. No estoy Seguro
3. Por que no, mamá?
4. Porque hace frio afuera y todavia no has terminado tu tarea.
5. Pero no tengo mucha, y prometon que la hare en cuanto volvamos.
6. Sí, pero es tarde.
7. Pero son apenas las 6.
8. Si´, pero mira las nuves, estan grises, podría llover.
9. Pero mamá, es invierno, no puede llover.
10. Sí, pero podría.
Reading
1. What does he want?

____________________________________________
2. What does he has to do?
____________________________________________
3. What time is it?
____________________________________________
4. What season is it?
____________________________________________
117
Can, could, may, might
En inglés hay tres verbos para traducer el verbo “poder” del español. Estos verbos
son can, may y might.
Capacidad Permiso Probabilidad

Can Yes Informal 100
May No Formal 50
Might No Very Formal 30
Could No Formal (with conditions)
118
Exercise 1
Haz oraciones usando las palabras que te dan. (sigue el ejemplo)
Park/run/in/the. You can run in the park.
1. Bakery/you/buy/in/the. ____________________________________.
2. Read/in/the/library ____________________________________.
3. Greengroser’s/the/in ____________________________________.
4. Butcher’s/the/in ____________________________________.
5. Park/in/the (inormal) ____________________________________.
6. Bookstore/the/books/in/buy ____________________________________.
7. ¿Puedo ir al baño? (formal) ____________________________________.
8. Swimming pool/the/in/swim ____________________________________.
9. Run/in/the/forest ____________________________________.
10. Take/candies/some (informal) ____________________________________.
Exercise 2
1. Can I go to the bathroom? (formal) _______________________.

2. Might you speak louder? _______________________.
3. He could speak spanish. _______________________.
4. She may play the guitar _______________________.
5. It might rain (muy seguro) _______________________.
6. ¿Can we come? (formal) _______________________.
7. He could speak english _______________________.
8. Ustedes pueden
9. Ella puede
10. ¿Ellos pueden ir? (informal) _______________________.
119
Writing
Rescribe el dialogo cambiando las personas, el clima, la estacion y la hora. (50

palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
120
Speaking
What can you do in winter?
I can __________ in winter.
What can’t you do in your school?
I can’t __________ in my school.
Can you swim?
Yeah, I can/ No, I can’t
Can you run resolve difficult maths problems?
Yeah, I can/ No I can’t
Might it rain today in your city?
Yeah, it might/ No, it mightn’t
121
Twenty-third lesson
Ilnesses
1. What’s wrong with Ted?

2. He feels very bad.
3. What does he have?
4. He has headache and stomachache?
5. Does he have fever?
6. No, he doesn’t.
7. He must have the flu, he should take and aspirin.
8. He’s already taken one but he stills feels bad.
9. He must go to the doctor.
10. He’s already gone.
11. He’d better look for another. When did he start feeling bad?
12. After he came back from that bar.
Madame [ma’am] señora, to tell [tu tel] decir, problem [problem] problema, boyfriend
[boyfriend] novio, I’ve tried [ifv traid] he intentado, to continue [tu continiu] continuar, to try
[tut rai] intentar, to look for, to be sorry, time, to be over, see you, next, week.
122
Vigesima tercera lección
Enfermedades
1. Que tiene Ted?

2. Se siente muy mal.
3. Que tiene?
4. Le duele la cabeza y el estomago.
5. Tiene fiebre?
6. No
7. Debe tener gripa, deberia tomar una aspirina.
8. Ya se tomo una pero se sigue sintiendo mal.
9. Debe ir al doctor.
10. Ya fue.
11. Será major que busque otro. Cuando se empezo a sentir mal?
12. Despúes de que regreso del bar.
Reading
1. What does he have?

____________________________________________
2. Does he have fever?
____________________________________________
3. Has he taken an aspirin?
____________________________________________
4. What had he better look for?
____________________________________________
123
Modal verbs to express advice
Should No tan fuerte You should drink Tal vez un amigo

less te da ese consejo
Had better Fuerte You’d better drink Tal vez un doctor

less te dice que tu
salud esta en
peligro
Must Muy fuerte You must drink Tal vez un doctor

less te dice eso ya
que estas
enfermo
124
Exercise 1
Usando must, should, shouldn’t o had better, rellena os espacios en blanco.
1. I ____________ take an aspirin if she’s got headache. (bajo)

2. It ____________ eat better, it’s almost in the bones (medio)
3. They ____________ go to the hospital because they’ve broken their leg.
(alto)
4. You ____________ do drink less or you’re going to get drunk (medio)
5. We ____________ go to the doctor, he’s cut his finger off. (alto)
6. I ____________ take a tea if she has stomach ache. (bajo)
7. He ____________ go to the doctor, he’s got very high fever. (medio)
8. You ____________ go to the dentist if you have tootache. (bajo)
9. He ____________ go to the doctor, she has a very strong infection. (alto)
10. She ____________ take a medicin against the diarrea (bajo)
Exercise 2
1. You should do exercise. (alto) _______________________.

2. He’d better sleep more. (medio) _______________________.
3. I’d better drink less (bajo) _______________________.
4. You’d better play more. (medio) _______________________.
5. She must eat heltier. (bajo) _______________________.
6. I should be early (alto) _______________________.
7. She must relax. (medio) _______________________.
8. We’d better go. (bajo) _______________________.
9. He should work less. (alto) _______________________.
10. You must go to the doctor. (bajo) _______________________.
125
Writing
Rescribe el dialogo cambiando los sintomas. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
126
Speaking
How often do you get sick?
I __________ get sick.
What are the most commons sickness that you have?
The most common sickness in my country are __________.
What do you take when you have headache?
I take _________ when I have headache.
What should a person who has stomach ache take?
He should take __________.
What should a person who has diarrhae take?
He should take __________.
American culture
El reino unido tiene un servicio de salud universal muy bueno. Cuando las
personas están enfermas, pueden ir al DOCTOR (general practioner) que es el
doctor que tienen asignado o pueden ir con un doctor particular, cosa que no
resulta una mala opción teniendo en cuenta la cantidad de personas que
atendienden al servicio barlico de salud.
127
Twenty-fourth lesson
Rules
1. Son, if you want to go out with your friends, you have to do what I tell you.
2. Ok, mom, what do I have to do?
3. You have to tidy your room.
4. I’ve already done it mom, what else do I have to do?
5. You have to clean the floor and wash the dishes.
6. Do I have to do the washing-up?
7. No, you don’t have to do it, but you have to walk the dog.
8. Ok, mom, I’ll stay in.
Friend [friend] amigo, what [guat] lo que, to tidy your room [tu tidi yor rum] recoger tu
cuarto, to clean [tu klin] limpiar, floor [flor] piso, to wash the dishes [guash da dishes]
lavar los trastes, to do the washing-up [du da guashing op] lavar la ropa (en la
lavadora), to walk the dog [tu guok da dog] pasear al perro, to stay in [tu stei in]
quedarse en casa.
128
Trigesima cuarta lección
Reglas
1. Hijo, si quieres salir con tus amigos, tienes que hacer lo que te digo.
2. Ok, mamá, que tengo que hacer?
3. Tienes que recoger tu cuarto.
4. Ya lo hice, mamá, que más tengo que hacer?
5. Tienes que limpiar el piso y lavar los trastes.
6. Tengo que lavar la ropa?
7. No, no tienes que hacerlo, pero tienes que pasear al perro.
8. Ok, mamá, me quedo.
Reading
1. Does he have to tidy his room?

____________________________________________
2. Does he have to clean the floor?
____________________________________________
3. Does he have to do the washing-up?
____________________________________________
4. Does he have to walk the dog?
____________________________________________
129
Modal verbs to express obligation
Modal verb Uso Significado

Must Obligación interna o Tener que
moral (tu solito te Deber
bligas a hacer algo)
Have (got) to Obligfación externa Tener que
Has (got) to (alguién o algo te
obliga a hacer algo)
Have to (nothing happen if I do not follow them)
Mustn’t (bring a negative consequence)
Modal verb Uso Significado

Have not got to No tener que
(haven’t to) Sin obligación
Has not got to
(haven’t to)
Needn’t No tener que
No necesitar (no
hay razón)
130
Exercise 1
Usando must, have to, don’t have to, doesn’t have to y needn’t, rellena los
espacios en blanco.
1. I ____________ do exercise, I’m a bit fat. (interno)

2. It ____________ eat better, it’s almost in the bones (externo)
3. They ____________ study hard, they’re very brains. (sin obligación)
4. You ____________ drink less or you’re going to get drunk (externo)
5. We ____________ go, if we don’t want. (sin obligación)
6. I ____________ be late if I don’t want to have problems. (interno)
7. He ____________ study for the test. (externo)
8. You ____________ eat less if you don’t want to get fat. (interno)
9. We ____________ work, they’re vacations. (sin obligación)
10. She’s thinking she ____________ eat less to not get fat (interno)
Exercise 2
Corrige las siguientes oraciones usando los modal verbs to express obligation.
11. You have to do exercise. (interno) _______________________.

12. He don’t have to sleep more. (externo) _______________________.
13. I must drink less (sin obligación) _______________________.
14. You don’t have to play more. (interno) _______________________.
15. She don’t have to eat heltier. (externo) _______________________.
16. I must be early (sin obligación) _______________________.
17. She don’t have to relax. (externo) _______________________.
18. We must go. (sin obligación) _______________________.
19. He have to work less. (interno) _______________________.
20. You don’t have to go to the doctor. (externo) _______________________.
131
Writing
Escribe un reglamento para tu salón de clase o lugar de trabajo. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
132
Speaking
What do you have to do in your house?
I have to __________.
What do you have to do in your workplace?
I have to __________.
What do you must do?
I must __________.
What don’t you have to do in your house?
I don’t have to __________.
What don’t you have to do in your job?
I don’t have to __________.
133
Twenty-fifth lesson
At hotel
1. Welcome to Bristol’s Palace,how can I help you?

2. I’d like a room, please!
3. Certainly, what’s your name?
4. Simon Smith
5. Would you like a double or single room?
6. Single, please!
7. How many nights?
8. Two please
9. Here you are your key, sir.
10. Thank you, excuse me, are there any regulations that I have to follow?
11. Yes, it’s not allowed to come in the swimming pool after 8.
12. Ok, what else?
13. The guest can’t make parties in their rooms
14. Ok, and are pets allowed?
15. Yes, they are
16. So, let me bring my tiger from the cage.
Hotel [jotel] hotel, palace [palas] palacio, double [dobul] doble, single room [singul rum]
habitacion individual, night [naigt] noche, key [ki] llave, regulations [reguleichions], to follow
[tu folou] seguir, to be not allowed [its not alout] no estar permitido, swimming pool [siming
pul] alberca, guest [guest] huesped, party [parti] fiesta, pet [pet] mascota, to bring [tu bring]
traer.
134
Vigesima quinta lección
En el hotel
1. Bienvenido al Bristol’s Palace,como puedo ayudarle?

2. Quiero un cuarto por favor.
3. Seguro, como se llama?
4. Simon Smith
5. Quiere una habitación doble o una habitación individual?
6. Individual, por favor.
7. Cuantas noches?
8. Dos, por favor
9. Aqui tiene su llave, señor.
10. Gracias, disculpe, hay algun reglamento que deba de seguir?
11. Si, no está permitido nada ren la alberca despúes de las 8.
12. Ok, que más?
13. Los huespedes no pueden hacer fiestas en sus cuartos.
14. Ok, se permiten las mascotas?
15. Sí.
16. Entonces, dejeme traer mi tigre de la jaula.
Reading
1. Where is he?
____________________________________________
2. What does he want?
____________________________________________
3. Does he want a singe room?
____________________________________________
4. Are pets allowed?
____________________________________________
135
Modal verbs to express prohibition
Modal verb Ejemplo Significado

Can’t You can’t be without shoes in No poder
your aunt’s house
It’s not allowed to It’s not allowed to park here No se permite
It’s forbidden It’s forbidden to throw trash Esta prohibido
Mustn’t You musn’t feed the animals of No debes
the zoo
136
Exercise 1
Usando can’t, it’s not allowed to, it’s forbidden y musn’t, rellena los espacios en
blanco.
1. I ____________ be here, it’s a private party. (no poder)

2. Your dog ____________ come in to the museum (ilegal)
3. ____________ to park here. (no se permite)
4. You ____________ camp hier. (ilegal)
5. We ____________ go to the party. (no poder)
6. ____________ come in with pets. (no se permite)
7. He ____________ do the test. (no poder)
8. You ____________ feed the animals. (ilegal)
9. He ____________ drink in the stret. (no se permite)
10. ____________ make noise in this area (esta prohibido)
Exercise 2
Corrige las siguientes oraciones usando los modal verbs to express prohibition.
1. You musn’t sleep here. (no poder) _______________________.

2. It’s not allowed to drink alcohol. (esta prohibido) _____________________.
3. I can’t come in in the evening (no deber) _______________________.
4. It’s forbidden to come in with kids. (no se permite)
_______________________.
5. She musn’t park here. (no poder) _______________________.
6. It’s now allowed to fish in this area (esta prohiido)
_______________________.
7. She musn’t sell in this place. (no poder) _______________________.
8. We can’t go. (no se permite) _______________________.
9. He musn’t smoke. (no poder) _______________________.
10. It’s forbidden to make campfires. (no se permite)
_______________________.
137
Writing
Escribe un reglamento para tu escuela. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
138
Speaking
What is allowed in your country?
It’s allowed __________.
What is forbidden in your country?
Its forbidden __________.
What musn’t you do in your country?
You musn’t __________.
American culture
Cuando vayas a Gran Bretaña, tal vez te ofrescan el Full English breakfast, un
desayuno que consiste en huevos, tocino, salchichas, jitomates asados y aveces
frijoles con salsa de tomate y riñones, y un té o café. También, existe el continental
breakfast, que consiste en pan, bolleria y café o simplemente un té o un café.
139
Twenty-sixth lesson
Meal
1. The first meal of the day is breakfast, usually eaten between about 7:30 and
9:00.
2. Many British people eat toast with some butter or margarine and jam, others
have simply a bowl of cereal or a porridge.
3. Many people have a tea-break about 11:00. If a meal is eaten in the late
morning instead of both breakfast and lunch, it is called brunch.
4. From 12:30 to 2:00 it is eaten lunch, usually composed by a sandwich or a
simple meal such as cheese and cookies or soup and bread.
5. Tea-time is a small meal eaten in the late afternoon (usually between about
3:30 and 5:00). People may drink tea, and often eat cookies, cakes or
savoury foods such as sandwiches, crumpets or tea-cakes.
6. High tea is a light meal eaten in the early evening (for example, 6 o'clock)
served with a pot of tea; this is popular in north United Kingdom and
Scotland.
7. Supper is the most common name for the meal eaten in the evening (usually
between 7:00 and 8:30). Dinner is another common name for supper.
8. A dinner party is a formal evening meal in which guests have been invited,
but remember, even when you haven’t been invited, go and enjoy a cup of
tea.
Meal [mil] comida (hecha), breakfast [breikfast] desayuno, eaten [iten] comido, british
[british] estadunidense, toast [toust] pan tostado, butter [bota] mantequilla, margarine
[margarin] sutituto de mantequilla, jam [shyam] mermelada, bowl [boul] tazon, cereal
[cirial] cereal, porridge [porreich] atole, instead [insted] en lugar de, both breakfast and
lunch [bot breikfast and lonch] tanto del desayuno como, sándwich [sandguich] sanwich,
simple [simpol] simple, cheese [chis] queso, biscuit [biscuit] galleta, soup [soup] sopa,
bread [bred] pan, to drink [tu drink] beber, tea [ti] te, often [ofen] seguido, to eat [tu it]
comer, cake [keik] pastel, savoury [seifveri] entremes, food [fud] comida, such as [soch es]
tal(es) como, light [laight] ligero, early [erli] temprano, to serve [tu serfv] servir, pot [pot]
olla, popular [popiular] popular, north [nort] norte, United States [ingland] Inglaterra,
Scotland [scotland] Escocia, dinner [dina] cena, common [komon] comun, supper [sopa]
cena, formal [formal] formal, in which [in guich] en la cual.
140
Trigesima sexta lección
Meal
1. La primera comida del dia es el desayuno, normalmente comido entre las

7:30 y las 9:00.
2. Muchas personas britanicas comen pan con mantequilla o margarita y
mermelada, otros comen simplemente un plato de cereal o un pudin.
3. Muchas personas tienen un tea-break como a las 11:00. Si una comida se
comea al final de la mañana en lugar del desayuno y la comida se llama
brunch.
4. De las 12:30 a 2:00 se come la comida, normalmente compuesta de un
sandwich, o una comida simple como queso y galletas o sopa y pan.
5. El Tea-time es una pequeña comida que se come al final de la tarde

(normalmente entre las 3:30 y las 5:00). Muchas personas toman te, y
seguido galletas, pasteles o comidas saladas como sandwiches, crumpets o
pastelillos.
6. El High-tea es una comida ligerá comida temprano en la noche (por ejemplo
a las 6) servida con olla de te; el High-tea es popular en el nortee de
Inglaterra y de Escocia.
7. Supper is el nombre más comun para la comida que se come en la noche
(normalmente entre las 8:30). Dinner es otro nombre comun para la Supper.
8. Una Dinner party es una comida formal en la noche en la que los invitados
son invitados, pero recuerda, aun cuando no hayas sido invitado, ve y
disfruta de una taza de te.
Reading
1. What does many British have for breakfast?

____________________________________________
2. What time does luch is eaten?
____________________________________________
3. What is High tea?
____________________________________________
4. What’s supper?
____________________________________________
141
The Partitive
Usamos siempre some o any cuando hablamos de:
1. Liquids
I’d like some more coffee
2. Meals
I eat some spaghetti
3. Small things
I’m eating some peanuts.
4. Powder
Could you give me some more sugar?
5. Things that we can divide
Pass me some pizza.
Cuando una oracion es afirmativa usamos some y cuando una oracion es negative
o interrogative usamos any.
Cuando hablamos en general usamos “the” en lugar the some o any.
142
Exercise 1
Usando some, any o nada, rellena los espacios en blanco.
1. I drink ____________ water.

2. We don’t have ____________ chicken for dinner. (not)
3. You eat ____________ fruit salad.
4. They drink ____________ tea.
5. Do you want ____________ beef?
6. He eats _____ apples and _____ pears.
7. You drink ____________ wine.
8. Does he have ____________ milk?
9. She doesn’t have ____________ meat for dinner. (not)
10. Would you like ____________ sugar in your coffee?
Exercise 2
Corrige las siguientes oraciones que esten mal usando some o any. Algunas
oraciones están bien.
1. You don’t eat some bread. _______________________.

2. He doesn’t drink some alcohol. _____________________.
3. I don’t want any salt. _______________________.
4. I don’t drink some beer. _______________________.
5. I eat some watermelon. _______________________.
6. He has any meat for dinner. _______________________.
7. She drinks some chocolate. _______________________.
8. We can eat some cake. _______________________.
9. He doesn’t eat some pork. _______________________.
10. I don’t drink any wine. _______________________.
143
Writing
Escribe una carta para un amigo donde le digas que es lo que comen en tu país.
(100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
144
Speaking
What do you eat?
I eat __________.
What do the people eat in your country?
They eat __________.
Do you eat fast-food?
Yeah, I do/ No, I don’t
What do you eat On the weekend?
I eat __________ On the weekend.
What’s your favourite meal?
My favourite meal is __________.
American culture
El platillo típico de Inglaterra es el “Fish and Fries”, el cual consiste en papas a la

francesa con pescaditos, normalmente envueltos en una hoja de periódico.
145
Twenty-seventh lesson
At restaurant
1. Good evening, can I take your order?

2. I’ll have a plate of spaghetti, please.
3. And you madam?
4. I’m not sure, can I ask you today’s specials?
5. Tonight, madame, we have roast chicken, beef with boiled vegetables, and
fish with rice.
6. I’ll have the fish with rice, please.
7. Would you like anything to drink?
8. Do you have red wine?
9. I’m sorry sir, there isn’t red wine left, we only have white wine, beer and
mineral water.
10. I’ll have the beer. And you, honey?
11. I’ll have the white wine.
Later
12. Can I offer you a dessert?

13. No thank you.
14. Excuse me, may we have the ticket, please?
15. Here you are, sir.
16. Do you accept credit card?
17. Of course, sir, Visa or Master Card.
18. Dear, I’ve forgotten my wallet. Could you pay the bill?
19. Yeah, but this is really the last time.
Good evening [gud ifvning] buenas noches, plate [pleit] plato, spaguetti [spagueti]
espagueti, tonight [tunaigt] esta noche, roast [roust] rostizado, chicken [chiken] pollo, beef
[bif] carne de res, to boil [tu boil] hervir, vegetable [fveishtabol] vegetal, fish [fish] pescado,
rice [rais] arroz, wine [guain] vino, there’s no red wine left [der isnt red guin left , beer [bir]
cerveza, mineral water [mineral guata] agua mineral, to offer [tu ofer] ofrecer, dessert
[desert] postre, bill [bil] cuenta, to accept [asept] aceptar, credit card [credit card] tarjeta de
credito, I’ve forgotten [aifv fortoten] he olvidado, wallet [gualet] cartera, to pay [tu pei]
pagar, last time [last taim] ultima vez.
146
Trigesima septima lección
En el restaurant
1. Buenas noches, que van a ordenar?

2. Yo quiero un pato de espagueti, por favor.
3. Y usted señora?
4. No estoy segura, que tienen?
5. Esta oche, señora, temenos pollo rostizado, carne de cordero con vegetales
hervidos y pescado con arroz.
6. Quiero el pescado con arroz, por favor.
7. Para beber, que les gustaria?
8. Tiene vino rojo?
9. Lo siento, ya se no acabo el vino tinto, solo temenos vino blanco, cerveza y
agua mineral.
10. Quiero una cerveza y tu querida?
11. Quiero el vino blanco.
Más tarde
12. Puedo ofrecerles un postre?

13. No gracias.
14. Disculpe, señorita. Puede traernos la cuenta, por favor?
15. Aqui tiene señor.
16. Tiene tarjeta de credito?
17. Sí, Visa o Master Card.
18. Querida, se me olvido mi cartera. Puedes pagar?
19. Sí, pero ahora si es la ultima vez.
Reading
1. What does the woman order?

____________________________________________
2. Do they have red wine?
____________________________________________
3. Do they accept credit card?
____________________________________________
4. Who pays?
____________________________________________
147
Expressions to express quantity
A lot of Mucho/muchos (+)

Lots of
Much Mucho (-) (?)
Many Muchos (-) (?)
A little/ a bit Un Poco de
A few Unos cuantos/pocos
Too + adj Demasiado
Too much + noun
uncountable noun
Too many + plural noun Demasiados
Enough Suficiente
Plenty of Bastante/suficiente (bastante
pero no exagerado)
Quite Bastante
Containers
We do not some/any with words which express a specific quantity.
Pound Libra
Pound Pound
Bag Bolsa
Bunch Racimo
Dozen Docena
Piece Pieza
Slice Rebanada
Loaf Pan individual
Bar Barra
Packet Paquete
Littre Litro
Glass Vaso
Cup Copa
Bottle Botella
Cartoon Caja de
Bowl Tazon
148
Exercise 1
Usando las expression to express quantity, rellena los espacios en blanco.
11. I drink ____________ tea. (mucho)

12. We have ____________ meat for dinner. (bastante pero no exagerado)
13. You eat ____________ fruits. (unas cuantas)
14. They drink ____________ water. (mucha) (negative)
15. Do you want ____________ beef? (bastante)
16. He has ____________ apples and pears. (pocos)
17. You drink ____________ wine. (un poco de)
18. Does he have ____________ vegetables? (demasiados)
19. She has ____________ chicken for dinner. (poca)
20. I don’t want ____________ cream in my coffee. (demasiada)
Exercise 2
Corrige las siguientes oraciones que esten mal usando las expressons to express
quantity. Algunas oraciones son correctas.
11. You don’t eat a lot of bread. _______________________.

12. He doesn’t drink too much alcohol. _____________________.
13. I don’t want too many salt. _______________________.
14. I don’t drink enough beer. _______________________.
15. I eat a lot of watermelon. _______________________.
16. He eats a lot of fruits. _______________________.
17. She drinks too much chocolate. _______________________.
18. We can eat few cake. _______________________.
19. He doesn’t little pork. _______________________.
20. I don’t drink lots of wine. _______________________.
149
Writing
Imagine that a doctor has given to you a diet. Write what you can eat and the
quantities. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
150
Speaking
How much bread do you eat a week?
I eat __________ a week.
How much water do you drink a day?
I drink __________ of water a day.
What do you eat?
I eat __________.
Does in your country use pounds or dollars?
We use __________.
American culture
La cerveza es la bebida más tomada en el Reino Unido, solo después del té.
151
Twenty-eighth lesson
Languages
1. Do you speak French?

2. No, I don’t
3. Do you speak English?
4. Yes, I do
5. Do you believe I can learn it easily?
6. Why do you say that?
7. Because I’ve been studying it with this book and I feel the more I study, the
less I know.
8. That’s because you’re learning with an Old English book.
French [french] francés , English [inglish] ingles, to learn [tu learn] aprender, easily [isili]
facilmente, I’ve been studying [aifv bin stiuding] he estado estudiando, book [buk] libro, old
[old] viejo.
152
Trigesima octava lección
Idiomas
1. Hablas francés?
2. No.
3. Hablás inglés?
4. Sí
5. Crees que aprender inglés es facil?
6. Porque lo preguntas?
7. Porque he estado estudiando con este libro y siento que entre más studio,
menos se.
8. Eso es porque estás aprendiendo con un libro de inglés antiguo.
Reading
1. Does he speak french?

____________________________________________
2. What language does he speak?
____________________________________________
3. What happens to him?
____________________________________________
4. What kind of book is he learning with?
____________________________________________
153
Proportional sentences
The more I learn, the less I know (entre mas aprendo, menos se)
Some, any and no
We can use some with the meaning of (algun).
We can see some deer if we go to the forest.
We can use any with the meaning of (cualquier)
I can go there any day.
We use No:
a. with the meaning of (ningun); the verb must be in affirmative form.
Say: I can go no day of the next week.
Don’t say: I can’t go no day of the next week.
b. To replace a negative sentence with any not
154
Exercise 1
Usando las proportional sentences haz oraciones.
1. I/run/I/get slim. ________________________________________________.

2. You/study/I/get slim. ___________________________________________.
3. I/walk/I/good/feel. _____________________________________________.
4. We/eat/I/chocolate/bad/feel. _____________________________________.
5. I/think/it/I/get mad. ____________________________________________.
6. she/swim/easy/become. ________________________________________.
7. I/drink/I/good/feel. _____________________________________________.
8. he/sleep/I/bad/feel. ____________________________________________.
9. I/eat/I/vegetables/I/good/feel. ____________________________________.
10. you/practice/I/undersand. _______________________________________.
Exercise 2
Usando las proportional sentences, corrige las siguientes oraciones. Algunas

oraciones son correctas.
1. The more I run, the fastest I’m. ___________________________________.

2. The most you study, the more you know ___________________________.
3. The more I walk, the more the knee hurts me. _______________________.
4. The most chocolate we eat, the bader we feel. _______________________.
5. The more I think on it, the more I get mad. _________________________.
6. The more she swims, the easier it becomes. ________________________.
7. The more water I drink, the goodest I feel. __________________________.
8. The more he sleeps, the better he feels. ____________________________.
9. The more vegetables I eat, the more delicious it becomes. _____________.
10. The more I practice, the more simple it becomes. ____________________.
155
Writing
Hace un pequeño anuncio para una escuela donde digas que lenguas puedes
aprender, el costo del curso y los horarios. (50 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
156
Speaking
What lenguagues do you speak?
I speak __________.
Do speak a regional lenguague?
Yeah, I do/ No, I don’t
What lenguagues are spoken in your country?
In my country __________ is/are spoken.
What languagues would you like to learn?
I’d like to learn __________.
Would you like to learn a regional lenguague?
Yes, I would/ No, I woudn’t
American culture
En el Reino Unido se hablán 4 idiomas: inglés, escoses, irlandés y gales, sin

embargo, el inglés es el único que es oficial.
El inglés tiene raices Latinas, francesas y germanicas.
157
Fifth Unit
The Past
158
In this unit you will learn:
 To talk about your routine in the past

 To talk about an historic moment
 To talk about what you did in your last vacations
 To talk about your past plans
Topics
 Past simple of the verb to be

 There was/there were
 Past simple
 Modal verbs in the past simple
 Adverbs
 Going to in the past simple
 Personal object pronouns (indirect object)
 Used to
 Too, too much, too many, enough
159
Twenty-nine lesson
Relatives
1. Hello, aunt! how are you?

2. Fine, thank you, and you?
3. Pretty fine.
4. Look at how tall you’re, last time I saw you, you were very short.
5. I remember when you were a child, you were a little ugly and look at the
handsome man you are today.
6. Aunt!
7. You were very naughty, you liked much to bother the neighbor’s cat until he
scratched you, ho, ho, I remember how you went with your mom to tell her the cat
had scratched you.
8. Aunt!
9. And you were a little fat. I remember you like to eat candies. You always had
done in the hand.
10. Aunt!
11. What do you want, dear?
12. I want to introduce my girlfriend to you.
Long time no see you [long taim] hace mucho que no te veia, last time [last taim] la ultima
vez, a little [a lirul] un poquito, handsome [jandsom] guapo, to bother [tu boder] molestar,
tail [teil] cola, until [ontil] hasta (que), to scratch [skratch] arañar, chubby [chobi] gordito,
sweet [suit] dulce, to introduce [tu introdius] presenter, girlfriend [gerlfrend] novia.
160
Vigesima Novena Lección
Parientes
1. Hola, tia como estas?

2. Bien y tu?
3. Bien, gracias, y usted?
4. Bastante bien
5. Mira lo alto que estas, la ultima vez que te vi estabas muy chiquito.
6. Recuerdo que cuando eras niño, estabas un poco feo y mira el hombre tan guapo
que eres hoy.
7. Tia!
8. Eras muy travieso, te gustaba mucho molestar al gato del vecino hasta que te
raguño, jo, jo, recuerdo como fuiste con tu mamá a decirle que el gato te habia
arañado.
9. Tia!
10. Y estabas un poco gordo. Recuerdo que te gustaba comer dulces. Siempre tenias
uno en la mano.
11. Tia!
12. Que pasa cariño?
13. Quiero presentarte a mi novia.
Reading
1. Who’s tha woman?

____________________________________________
2. How is he?
____________________________________________
3. How was he when he was a kid?
____________________________________________
4. What did he always have?
____________________________________________
161
Past simple of the verb to be
I was (yo era/fui/estaba/estuve)
You were (tú eras/fuiste/estabas/estuviste)
162
Writing
Imagina que te encuentras una foto de tu familia de hace 10 años. Describe a las
personas que esten en la foto. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
How were you when you were a kid?
What were you like?
How was your neighborhood?
What were your friends like?
Where you noisy chubby, fast, strong, etc?
163
Thirtieth lesson
An unwelcome moment
1. There was a good restaurant in Thomson street, but Yesterday I drove by it

was closed.
2. Maybe, it went broke like everything in this city.
3. Well, where do we go?
4. I’ve heard there was a new stand where they make excellent french food at
Marchall avenue, why don’t we go there?
5. No, I’m sick and tired of eating out, why don’t we eat in tonight?
6. That’s a good idea, but I don’t feel like cooking, why don’t we order
something?
7. That would be great; the telephone number of that italian restaurant we like
is next to the fridge.
Some minutes after
8. What did they tell you?

9. It was wrong number
10. So, let’s go to Johnson street, I remember there were a lot of pizzeria stores
when we went together there.
11. We never went there together.
Unwelcome [onguelkom] inesperado, Yesterday [yesterdei] ayer, to drive by [tu draifv bai]
pasar (en carro), to go broke [tu gou brouk] ir a la quiebra, everything [efvrithing] todo, city
[siti] ciudad, other [oda] otro, place [pleis] lugar, to be sick and tired [tu bi sik and tairt]
estar harto, to eat out [tu it aut] comer afuera/salir a comer, tonight [tunaigt] esta noche,
that’s a good idea [dats a gud aidia] es una buena idea, to feel like [tu fil laik] tener ganas
de, to order [tu order] ordenar, something [somthing] algo, that would be great [dat gud bi
greit] estaria bien, finish [finish] finlandes, fridge [fridch] refri, wrong number [rong nomba]
numero equivocado, let’s go [lets gou] vamos, street [strit] calle, pizzeria store [pitseria
store] pizzeria, together [tugueda] juntos.
164
Trigesima lección
Un momento incomodo
1. Habia un buen restaurant en la calle Thomson, pero ayer que pasé estaba
cerrado.
2. Tal vez, quebro como todo en esta ciudad.
3. Bueno, a donde vamos?
4. Escuche que habia un nuevo puesto donde venden exelente comida
francesa en la Avenida marchall, porque no vamos?
5. No, estoy cansado de comer en la calle, porque no comemos en casa esta
noche?
6. Es una Buena idea, pero no tengo ganas de cocinar, porque no ordenamos
algo?
7. Estaría bien, el numero del telefono de ese restaurant italiano que nos
gusta esta junto al refri.
Algunos minutos despúes
8. Que te dijeron?
9. Me dijeron que era numero erquivocado.
10. Entonces vamos a la calles Johson, recuerdo que habian muchas pizzerias
cuando ibamos juntos allá.
11. Nunca fuimos allá juntos.
Reading
1. What is there in Thomson road?

____________________________________________
2. What do they sell in the new stand?
____________________________________________
3. What is next to the fridge?
____________________________________________
4. What did they tell him?
____________________________________________
165
There was/were
Singular Plural
Affirmative There was a bank in that There were trees in this
street avenue
Negative There was not/wasn’t a bank There were not/weren’t trees
in that street in this avenue
Interrogative Was there a bank in that Were there trees in this
street avenue
There was (hubia/hubo)
There were (habian/hubieron)
166
Writing
Imagina que fuiste de vacaciones a otro país. Escribe una carta a un amigo donde
le digas que es lo que habia (50 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What was there in your neighborhood?
Was there a hostital, movie theater, museum, etc?
Has it changed?
What is there now?
What isn’t there no
167
Thirty first lesson
Shakespeare
1. William Shakespeare, the great writer, was born in Stratford-upon-Avon in

1564.
2. He studied at school of his town and had a very good life until his father was
accused of illegal commerce and was sent to prison.
3. When he was 18 years old, he married Anne Hathaway with whom had
three children.
4. His work “The Tragedy of Hamlet, Prince of Denmark” more known as
Hamblet continues being today one of the most important literary works of
all the times.
5. William Shakespeare died in 1616 and was buried in the Church of the Holy
Trinity.
Great [greit] gran, Writer [raita] escritor, to be born [tu bi born] nacer, accused [akiust]
acusado, illegal [iligal] illegal, commerce [komers] comercio, get married [guet merriet]
casarse, whom [jum] quien, tragedy [trayedi] tragedia, prince [prins]principe, Denmark
[denmark] Dinamarca, literary [literari] literario, to be buried [tu bi burit] ser enterrado, Holy
[joli] santa, trinity [triniti] trinidad.
168
Trigesima primera lección
Shakespeare
1. William Shakespeare, el gran escritor, nacio en Stratford-upon-Avon Upon

avon en 1564.
2. Estudió en la escuela de su pueblo y tuvo una vida muy feliz hasta que su
padre fue acusado de Comercio ilegal y fue enviado a prisión.
3. Cuando tenía 18 años se casó con Anne Hathaway con quien tuvo 3 hijos.
4. Su obra la tragedia de Hamlet príncipe de Dinamarca mejor conocida como
Hamlet continúan siendo hoy una de las obras literarias más importantes de
todos los tiempos
5. William Shakespeare murió en 1616 y fue sepultado en la Iglesia de holy
Trinity.
Reading
1. Where was Shakerspeare born?

____________________________________________
2. Who did he marry with?
____________________________________________
3. What is one of the most important literary work?
____________________________________________
4. When did Shakerspear die?
____________________________________________
169
Past simple
To call To travel To drop To play To fry

I Called Travelled Dropped Played Fried
You Called Travelled Dropped Played Fried
He Called Travelled Dropped Played Fried
She Called Travelled Dropped Played Fried
It Called Travelled Dropped Played Fried
We Called Travelled Dropped Played Fried
You Called Travelled Dropped Played Fried
They Called Travelled Dropped Played Fried
We make the negative form by adding did/didn’t in front of the verb.

I called you I did not call you
I didn’t call you
We make the interrogative form by adding did in front of the personal pronoun.
Affirmative form Negative form Answers

I called you Did you call me Yesterday? Yeah
No
Usage
We use the past simple to translate the “preterito perfecto” and the “preterito
imperfect” of the Spanish.
I went to school Yo fui a la escuela

Yo iba a la escuela
170
Writing
Escribe tu biografia. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Where did you go in your last vacations?
How was it?
What did you do in your last vacations?
With whom did you go?
How long were you there?
171
Thirtieth second lesson
A letter
1. Dear mom and dad,

2. Yesterday I came back from Cancun.
3. I did lots of things and I met a lot of people.
4. The first day I was there, I went to the beach. I swam and snorkelled.
5. The next day, I visited Chichenitza; it’s an amazing place. I went up to the
top of the pyramid and took some photos.
6. The last day, I went to a mexican restaurant and ate Enchiladas, it was
delicious.
7. Yesterday, I came back, I hope see you soon because I brought you some
presents, I’m sure you’ll like.
8. Loves,
9. Sahra
To go up [tu gou op] subir, pyramid [pairamid] piramide, photo [foto] foto.
172
Trigesima segunda lección
Una carta
1. Queridos mamá y papa,

2. Ayer regrese de Cancún.
3. Hice muchas cosas y conocí a muchas personas.
4. El primer día que estuve ahí, fui a la playa. nade y snorkelie.
5. El siguiente día, visité Chichénitzá; es un increible lugar. subí a la cima de
la pirámide y tomé algunas fotos.
6. El último día, fui a un restaurante mexicano y comí enchiladas, estaban
deliciosas.
7. Ayer regresé, espero verlos pronto por qué les compre unos regalos, estoy
segura de que les van a gustar.
8. Con amor,
9. Sahra
Reading
1. Where di she come from?

____________________________________________
2. What did she do on the beach?
____________________________________________
3. What did she do last day?
____________________________________________
4. Who did write the letter?
____________________________________________
173
We make the negative form by adding did/didn’t in front of the verb.

I called you I did not call you
I didn’t call you
We make the interrogative form by adding did in front of the personal pronoun.
Affirmative form Negative form Answers

I called you Did you call me Yesterday? Yeah
No
174
Writing
Escribe una carta a un amigo donde le digas que es lo que hiciste/no hiciste en tus
vacaciones pasadas. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Did you go to an exotic place in your last vacations?
Did you stay in a resort?
Did you eat something new?
Did you go with your friends?
Did you have fun?
175
Thirty third lesson
Youngsters
1. Tell us, grandpa, how were you when you were young?
2. When I was young, I was very different from I’m today.
3. I used to be stronger and more adventurous.
4. I could easily walk miles and I could easily run faster than you.
5. And how was the grandma?
6. You know, she was very beautiful, she had a long brown hair I liked it a lot.
7. She was a very cheerful person, she always smiled and made the others
around her feel happy.
8. The problem was I had to let her in her house before 10.
9. And what time did you take her to her house?
10. At 10 am.
Youghsters [youngstas] jovenes, adventurous [adfvenchiurus] aventurado, cheerful

[chirful] alegre, to smile [tu smail] sonreir.
176
Trigesima tercera lección
Jovenes
1. Dinos abuelo, cómo eras cuando eras joven?

2. Cuando era joven era muy diferente a como soy hoy.
3. Era más fuerte y más aventurero.
4. Podía caminar fácilmente millas y podía fácilmente correr más rápido que
ustedes.
5. Y cómo era la abuela?
6. Ya sabes ella era muy hermosa, ella tenía un cabello café que me gustaba
mucho.
7. Ella era muy una ella era una persona muy alegre, ella siempre sonreía y
hacía a los otros alrededor de ella se sintieran felices
8. El problema era que tenía que dejarla en su casa antes de las 10.
9. Y a qué hora la llevabas a su casa a las 10:00 de la mañana.
Reading
1. How was he when he was young?

____________________________________________
2. What could he do?
____________________________________________
3. How was the grandma?
____________________________________________
4. What was she like?
____________________________________________
177
Modal verbs in the past simple
Affirmative form Negative form Interrogative form

I could run faster I could not speak English Could you speak
I couldn’t speak English German?
I had to wake up early I didn’t have to wake up early Did you have to wake up
early
The most of the modal verbs do not have a past form; the only modal verbs that
have a past form are can (could) and have (got) to and must that become (had).
178
Writing
Un amigo te ha enviado un mesaje preguntandote por tus vacaciones. Escribe le

un mensaje donde le digas que pudiste/no pudiste hacer en tus vaciones por el
clima. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Could you ride on a bicycle when you were a kid?, Could you play the guitar?,
Could you speak english?, Did you have to do the washing up?, What time did you
have to do your bed?, Did you have to wake up early?
179
180
Adverbs
Adjective Adverb
Strong Strongly
Happy Happily
Gentle Gently
1. General rule says that we build an adverb by adding –ly to the adjective.
Strong becomes strongly
2. When an adjective ends in “consonant + y”, we change the “y” for “ily”
Happy becomes happily
When the adjective ends in –le, we change the “e” for “y”.
Gentle becomes gently
Irregular adjectives
Adjective Adverb
Good Well
Fast Fast
Hard Hard
Early Early
Long Long
181
Thirty forth lesson
San Valentine day
1. How was your san Valentine day, son?

2. It was good, my girlfriend and me walked through the city, we went to the
park, to the river and to Santa Monica.
3. We were going to go to the beach, but we thought it was late to go there.
4. What did you give to her?
5. I was going to give a three puzzle to her but at the end, I gave her a teddy
bear.
6. And what did she give you?
7. She made a pizza to me.
8. A pizza?
9. Yeah, because she knows my heart is hers, but my stomach is of the food.
Valentin [fvalentin] Valentin, To walk through [tu walk θru] pasear en, three [θri] arbol,
puzzle [putsel] rompecabezas, at the end [at di end] al final, teddy [tedi] de peluche, bear
[ber] oso, heart [jart] corazon, stomach [stomak] estomago.
182
Trigesima cuarta lección
14 de febrero
1. Cómo estuvo tú 14 de febrero, hijo?

2. Estuvo bien mi novia y yo anduvimos por la ciudad, fuimos al parque al río y
al Palacio de Buckingham.
3. íbamos a ir a la playa pero pensamos que ya era tarde.
4. Que le regalaste?
5. Le iba a regalar un rompecabezas en forma de árbol pero al final le di un
oso de peluche.
6. Y qué te dio ella?
7. Me hizo una pizza.
8. Una pizza?
9. Sí porque sabe que mi corazón es de ella pero mi estómago es de la
comida.
Reading
1. How was his San Valentin’s day?

____________________________________________
2. Where did they go?
____________________________________________
3. What did he give to her?
____________________________________________
4. What did she give to him?
____________________________________________
183
Personal Object Pronouns as indirect Object
The indirect object is the person, animal or thing that doesn’t receive the action of
the verb but that is beneficiated by the action of it.
Subject Verb Direct object Indirect object

My mom Bought A cake To the class
In the last sentences, we know that the indirect object is the class because the
action of the verb “buy” fall into the cake, her mom didn’t buy the class, but the
class was beneficiated by the action of the verb.
Sometimes we can omit the direct object, but we recognize it by the preposition (to)
I wrote to you (I wrote something to you)
I wrote you (I wrote in your body)
In informal speech this difference is disapering and people usually say I wrote you
in both cases.
184
Writing
Un amigo tuyo te pregunta como estuvo tu cumpleaños. Escribele un mensaje

donde le digas todo lo que hiciste incluyendo lo que te regalaron. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What time did you give to your couple last San Valentin’s day?
What did they give you?
What did they give you in your birthday?
Have you ever written a letter? To whom?
185
Thirty fifth lesson
Memories
1. Grandpa, tell us, what did you do when you were a child?
2. Well, as in that time there wasn’t much money, my friends and me had to
work.
3. I remember we worked at the greengrocer’s that was opposite the church of
the town. I remember the owner used to give us sweet potato that we used
to eat with honey and milk.
4. On the weekend, we used to go to the playground that was next to the
theater. Also, we went to the forest where we liked to fish and to climb trees.
Once, my friends and me were telling horror stories when a bear appeared,
we were very scared. Fortunately, the bear went fast and let us have a good
time.
Money [moni] dinero, greengrocer’s [gringrousers] verduleria, owner [auna] dueño, sweet
potato [suit poteitou] camote, honey [joni] miel, milk [milk] leche, On the weekend [at
wuikend] el fin de semana, playground [plai graund] juegos, to fish [tu fish] pescar, to climb
[tu climb] trepar, tree [tri] arbol, once [uans] una vez, to tell [tu tell] contra, to appear [tu
apir] aparecer, fortunately [fortunateli] afortunadamente, to have a good time [tu jafv a gud
taim] divertirse (expression).
186
Trigesima quinta lección
Recuerdos
1. Abuelo dinos, qué hacías cuando eras niño?

2. Bueno como en ese tiempo no había mucho dinero mis amigos y yo
teníamos que trabajar.
3. Recuerdo que trabajamos en una verdulería que estaba enfrente de la
Iglesia del pueblo. Me acuerdo que el dueño nos regalaba camote, el cual
comiamos con miel y leche.
4. El fin de semana íbamos a los juegos que estaban junto al teatro tambien
íbamos al mar donde nos gustaba pescar y escalar árboles. Una vez mis
amigos y yo estábamos contando historias de terror cuando un oso
apareció, estábamos muy asustados. Lo bueno es que el oso se fue rapido
y nos dejó pasarla bien.
Reading
1. What did his grandpa do when he was a kid?

____________________________________________
2. Where was the green grocers?
____________________________________________
3. What did his friends and him do On the weekend?
____________________________________________
4. What did appear?
____________________________________________
187
Used to
I used to study English at school We use “used to” with all the people.
I didn’t use to football at park we use didn’t used to for negating
Did you used to 10 hours a day? We use Did … used to for asking?
Yeah
No
Use
We use “used to” in general to translate the “preterito imperfecto” del español.
I used to drive long hours when I used to work as a cab driver
“conducia largas horas cuando trabajaba de cabsta”
We do not use “used to” with the expression “When I was/you were/etc”
When I was a kid, I used to play football at school team.
Not When I used to….
We can change used to for the past simple without change in the meaning”
I used to drive long hours when I used to work as a cab driver
I drove long hours when I worked as a cab driver
188
Writing
Escribe uno de los mejores recuerdos que tengas de tu infancia. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What time did you use to wake up when you were a kid?
What time did you use to go to school?
What did you used to do?
What time did you use to go to bed?
What did you use to do On the weekend?
189
Sixth Unit
The Future
190
 To talk about the future

 To talk about your future plans
 To talk about a polemic topic
 To do an essay.
Topics
 Future simple
 There will be
 Modal verbs in the future simple
 Substitution personal object pronouns
 To be going to
 Present continuous and present simple for the future
 Future simple, going to and present simple
 Connectors of addition and contrast
 Comparative and superlative of adverbs
191
Thirty-six lesson
At supermarket
1. Honey, what will we take with us for dinner?

2. Some carrots, potatoes, tomatoes and an onion for the soup.
3. What else?
4. We need bananas, apples and a melon for the fruit salad.
5. How much will we buy?
6. One pound of each one.
7. Will we take oranges?
8. No, we have home.
9. What else?
10. That’s all.
At the cash desk
11. Good morning, sir, have you found everything you were looking for?
12. Yes, how much are they?
13. 10 dollars and 99 cents.
14. Oh god, I’ve forgotten my wallet in the car. Honey, could you lend me?
15. Yeah, but I swear this is really the last time.
Supermarket [supermarket] supermercado, for dinner [for dina] para cenar, carrot [karrot]
zanahoria, tomato [tomeitou] jitomate, onion [onion] cebolla,nsoup [soup] sopa, what else
[uat else] que mas, banana [banana] platano, apple [epol] manzana, melon [melon] melon,
fruit [fruit] fruta, each one [ich uan] de cada uno, orange [oranch] naranja, That’s all [dat si]
eso es todo, cash desk [kash desk] caja, pound [paund] libra, cent [sent] centavo, to forget
[tu forguet] olvidar, wallet [gualet] cartera, to swear [suer] jurar, last time [last taim] ultima
vez.
192
Trigesima sexta lección
En el supermercado
1. Querida, que llevamos para cena?

2. Zanahorias papas tomates y una cebolla para la sopa.
3. Qué más necesitamos plátanos manzanas y un melón para la para el
cóctel.
4. Cuánto compramos 1 kg de cada.
5. Llevamos naranjas?
6. No, tenemos en casa.
7. Qué más?
8. Eso es todo.
En la caja
1. Buenos dias, señor, encontró todo lo que buscaba?

2. Sí cuánto es?
3. 10 libras y 99 centavos.
4. O que la, se me olvidó la cartera en el carro. Querida puedes prestarme?
5. Sí, pero te juro que esta es realmente la última vez.
Reading
1. What did they take to dinner?

____________________________________________
2. What else did they need?
____________________________________________
3. How much did they buy of each thing?
____________________________________________
4. How much were they?
____________________________________________
193
Future simple
Personal subject pronoun will Verb in the base form

I Call
You Think
He Come
She will Eat
It Go
We Sleep
You Study
They Buy
Use
We use the future simple:
1. To talk about predictions on base we think, believe or imagine.
She'll probably be here tomorrow.
2. With on-the-spot decisions.

We've run out of milk; I'll go and buy some.
3. With promises.
I'll be on time, don't worry!
4. With offers and requests.

I'll do the wash the dishes after dinner.
Will you buy the milk when you come back home?
5. With threats and warnings.

I’ll kill you!
I won't speak to you again if you continue speking aloud.
194
Writing
Reescribe el dialogo cambiando la comida y las cantidades. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Where will you live in 10 year time?, what will you do?, will you have kids?, will the
man live on other planets? Will the society be the same?
195
Thirty seventh lesson
The future
1. I believe there will be flying cars in the future.

2. The people will be able to teleport to far places in the universe.
3. Also, there will be moon cities and spaceships to take us anywhere that we
want.
4. On earth, there won’t be hunger because the scientists will have developed
super seeds that will be able to grow faster and resist any climate.
5. We’ll have medicines that will be able to heal any sickness in days.
6. Sir
7. What?
8. I think you’ve drunk too much, could you retire, please?
9. No problem, there will be a bottle of whisky waiting for me home any way.
Flying car [flaying kar] auto volador, to teleport [tu teleport] teletransportarse, universe
[iunifvers] universe, moon [mun] luna, earth [erl] tierra, hunger [junga] hambre, scientist
[saientist] cientifico, to develop [defvelop] desarrollar, super [sopa] super, seed [sid]
semillas, to grow [graou] crecer, to resist [resist] resistir, climate [klimate] clima, medicine
[medisin] medicina, sickness [ilnes] enfermedad, to retire [ritair] retirarse, no problem [no
problem] no hay problema, whisky [guiski] whisky, any way [ani guei] de cualquier modo.
196
Trigesima septima lección
El futuro
1. Creo que habrán autos voladores en el futuro.

2. Las personas serán podrán teletransporse a lugares lejanos en el universo.
3. También habrán ciudades en la luna y naves espaciales para llevarnos a
cualquierlugar que quedramos.
4. En la tierra no habrá hambre ya que los científicos habrán desarrollado
súper semillas que podrán crecer más rápido y resistirán cualquier clima.
5. a tendremos medicinas que podrán curar cualquier enfermedad en días.
6. Señor
7. Que?
8. Pienso que ya ha bebido demasiado, puede retirarse por favor.
9. No hay problema, de todos modos habrá una botella de whisky
esperándome en mi casa.
Reading
1. What will there be in the future?

____________________________________________
2. What will the people be able to do?
____________________________________________
3. What will we have?
____________________________________________
4. What will be waiting for him?
____________________________________________
197
There will be
We use there will be to talk about something that will exist.
There will be flying cars in the future
There will be fewer trees in the forest.
We use there will not/won’t be in negative sentences
There won’t be enough food for all.
There won’t be as many species animals as today.
We use will there be in interrogatives sentences
Will there be more poor people in the future?
Yeah
No
198
To be able to/ to be capable to
We use to be able to in the future, and perfect tenses instead of can
Say: I will able to do it
Don’t say: I can do it
We use to be capable to in the same way that in Spanish.
Writing
Escribe un articulo para una revista donde escribes como crees que será la vida
en 10 años. (100 palabras)
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What things will there be in the future?, will there be flying cars?, what other
intentions will there be in the future?, will there houses in others planets? what will
the human be able to do?
199
Thirty eighth lesson
Elections
1. What are you going to do these vacations, Mathew?

2. I’m going with my cousins to Florida.
3. What are you going to do there?
4. We’re going swimming.
5. Cool!
6. Do you want to come?
7. I’d like but I have to work
8. Where do you work?
9. I work in a multimillionaire international company.
10. It must be a good place to work.
11. Yeah, if you like hamburgers.
Vacations [fvakeishions] vacaciones (periodo intersemestral), multimillionaire

[multimilioner] multimillonaria, international [internashional] internacional.
200
Trigesima octava lección
Elecciones
1. Qué vas a hacer en las vacaciones, Mathew?

2. Voy a ir con mis primos a Florida.
3. Qué van a hacer?
4. Vamos a ir a nadar.
5. Que padre!
6. Quieres ir?
7. Me gustaría pero tengo que trabajar.
8. Dónde trabajas?
9. Trabajo un empresa multimillonaria internacional.
10. Debe ser un buen lugar para trabajar.
11. Sí, si te gustan las hamburguesas.
Reading
1. What is he going to do in his vacations?

____________________________________________
2. What is he going to do in Florida?
____________________________________________
3. What did he say to Mathew?
____________________________________________
4. Where does Mathew work?
____________________________________________
201
Going to
Personal subject Verb to be Going to Verb in the base

pronoun form
I Am
You Are Going to
He/she/it Is Eat
We/you/they Are
We make the negative and interrogative form of going to in the same way we make
it with the verb to be.
I’m not going to go to Hawaii
Are you going to eat out?
Yeah
Usage
We use the structure to be going to (ir a) to talk about:
1. Plans and intentions

I’m going to major in law.
2. Predictions based on we can see or know

She’s going to have a baby.
3. Ambitions that we have for the future

I’m going to buy a new house
Note: In informal english, going to is pronounce /gona/. In informal texts, you can
find it written as “gonna” instead of “going to”.
202
Writing
Haz una invitación para un amigo donde le preguntes si quiere ir de vacaciones

contigo. Escribele todo lo que hará (100 palabras)
Speaking
What are your plans for this year?, are you going anywhere?
203
Thirty-Ninth lesson
Environment
1. Good evening ladies and gentlemen and welcome to this conference about
environment.
2. As everyone knows, the global warming is a problem that has caused that
the level of the sea and the temperatures raise and the poles melt.
3. Despite the efforts of different institutions the levels of pollution continue
raising.
4. The main contaminants are the emissions of the companies, the trash, and
in the case of the see the oil spills.
5. However, we’ve seen that the recycling and consciousnesses campaigns
have paid dividends.
6. Also, something that has helped us is that the renewable energies have
become cheaper and cheaper and the people worries more for having a
green life.
7. In all, there’s still a long way to go across, but we’re on the way.
Environment [enfvairoment] medio hambiente, lady [leidi] dama, gentlemam [shyenglemn]

caballero, global warming [global guarming] calentamiento global, to cause [tu kaus]
causar, level [lefvel] nivel, temperature [temperchia] temperature, to raise [tu rais]
aumentar, pole [poul] polo, to melt [tu melt] derretirse, effort [efort] esfuerzo, institution
[institushion] institucion, pollution [polushion] contaminacion, main [θrila] principal,
contaminant [kontaminant] contaminante, emissons [emishon] emission, rubish [robish]
basura, case [keis] caso, oil spills [oil spils] derrames gaseros, recycling [resaikling]
reciclaje, consciousnesses [konsiusneses] concientisacion, campaign [kampein] campana,
pay dividends [pei difvidents] dar frutos, renewable [riniubol] removable, energy [enershi]
energia, to go across [tu gou akros] atravesar.
204
Cuadragesima primera lección
Medio hambiente
1. Buenas noches, damas y caballeros y bienvenidos a esta conferencia sobre

el medio ambiente.
2. Como todos saben, el calentamiento global es un problema que ha causado
que el nivel del mar y las temperaturas suban y los polos se derritan.
3. A pesar de los esfuerzos de diferentes instituciones, los niveles de
contaminación continúan aumentando.
4. Los rincipales contaminantes son las emisiones de las empresas, la basura,
y en el caso del mar los derrames gaseros.
5. Sin embargo, hemos visto que las campañas de reciclaje y de
concientizacion han dado frutos.
6. También, algo que nos ha ayudado es que las energias renobables se han
vuelto cada vez más baratas y que las personas se preocipan más por
llevar una vida verde.
7. En conclusion, hay todavia un largo camino que recorrerm pero estamos en
el camino.
Reading
1. What is the conference about?

____________________________________________
2. What does the global warmig cause?
____________________________________________
3. What are the main pollutants?
____________________________________________
4. What are cheaper?
____________________________________________
205
Connectors of contrast and effect
Tough (informal) Aunque

Although (neutro)
Even tough (formal)
Even when Aun cuando
But Sino
However Sin embargo
Even so No obstante
To the contrary Al contrario
On the contrary
To the contrary Por el contrario
On the contrary
In spite of A pesar de
Despite
Even though Si bien
Despite that Con todo y eso
More like Mas bien
Rather (formal)
Instead En cambio
However Ahora bien
Regardless De todas maneras
Anyway De todas formas
In any case De cualquier forma
Neither Tampoco
Nevertheless Aun asi
On the other hand Por otro lado
In addition Ademas
Yet
In addition to Ademas (de)
As well as
Besides
Even Incluso
Equally Igualmente
By the same token
(formal)
Furthermore Es mas
What is more
Therefore Por lo tanto
Whereas Mientras que
No matter how No importa como
Regardless Sin considerar
Or Ni
In all En conclusion
206
More importantly Otro elemnto importante
Writing
Escribe un articulo para tu periodico escolar donde digas que piensas del cambo
climatico. (100 palabras)
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What can you do for making a greener planet?, do you use reneable energies?,
what reneable energies do you use? Does your city do something against the
global warming?
207
Forty lesson
A beautiful city
1. The more the time advance, the more we can see the effects caused by the
overpopulation.
2. Let’s to interview the specialist in environment Melanie Mateo.
3. Thank you, nowadays the overpopulation is one of the main problems in the
big cities and Los Angeles isn’t an exception.
4. Melanie, could you tell us what some of the problems that the
overpopulation causes are?
5. Of course! The main problems that overpopulation causes are the pollution,
the lack of resources and transport.
6. Melanie, could you tell us more about one of these problems that affect so
much to we, the people of Los Angeles?
7. Of course, we take the problem of the transport. Because of the traffic and
the jams, we have to the point where in some parts of the city at the rush
hour you can arrived faster at your job by walking than driving.
8. Talking about the transport, it’s true that we count with several means of
transport such as the subway, the buses and the train in the city. However,
these can be easily exceed because of the big quantity of people that use
them every day.
9. In all, there’s still much to do in main of overpopulation.
To advance [tu adfvans] avanzar, overpopulation [ofverpopuleishion] sobrepoblacion, to

interview [tu interfviu] entrevistar, nowadays [noguadeis] actualmente, lack [lak] falta,
resource [risours] recurso, transport [transport] transporte, so much [so moch] tanto,
because of [bikous of] debido a, jam [shyam] embotellamiento, rush hour [rosh aua] hora
pico, several [sefveral] varios, mein of transport [min of transport] medio de transporte,
such as [soch es] como, exceed [eksid] exedido, quantity [kantiti] cantidad, main [mein]
materia.
208
Cuadragesima segunda lección
Una hermosa ciudad
1. Entre más avanza el tiempo, más podemos ver los efectos causados por la
sobrepoblación.
2. Vamos a entrevistar a la especialista en medio ambiente, Melanie Mateo.
3. Muchas gracias, en estos dias la sobreoblación es uno de los proncipales
problemas en las grandes ciudades y Los Ángeles no es la exepción.
4. Melanie, podrias decirnos cuales son algunos problemas que caisa la
sobrepoblacion?
5. Los principals problemas que la sobrepoblación causa es la contaminacion,
la falta de recursos y de transporte.
6. Melanie, puedes decirnos más sobre uno de estos problemas que afecta
tanto a los Londinenses?
7. Por supuesto, tomemos el problema de el transporte.
8. Debido al ttrafico y los embotellamientos, hemos llegado al punto donde en
algunas partes de la ciudad a la hora pico puedes llegar más rapido a tu trabajo
caminando que conduciendo.
9. Hablando del transporte, es verdad que contamos en la ciudad con varios medios
de transporte como el metro, los camiones y el tren. Sin embargo, estos son
facilmente exedidos por la enorme cantidad depersonas que los usan cada dia.
10. En conclusion, todavia hay mucho que hacer en materia de sobrepoblación.
Reading
1. Who are they going to interview?

____________________________________________
2. What’s the biggest problems in the big cities?
____________________________________________
3. What problem does she speak about?
____________________________________________
4. What mean of transport does Los Angeles has?
____________________________________________
209
Comparative and superlative of adverbs
Adverb Comparative Superlative

Strongly More strongly Most strongly
Fast Faster Fastest
1. We make the comparative by adding more to the adverb.

I walk more slowly than you (camino mas lento que tu)
2. The adverbs fast, hard, early and soon make the comparative by adding –
er.
I run faster than you
3. We make the superlative by adding the most to the adverb.

I walk most slowly (soy el que camina mas lento)
4. Adverbs which have the same form that the adjective add –est.
I run the fastest
5. The adverbs well has an irregular form.

I play the guitar the best
6. The adverbs which have an irregular form maintain the irregular form.
he eat least meat in our family
Irregular adverbs
Adverb Comparative Superlative

Well Better Best
Badly Worse Worst
May/much More Most
Little Less Least
210
Writing
Escribe una lista de los problemas que tiene tu colonia y escribe cuales son sus
posibles soluciones . (100 palabras)
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What problems does your city have?, is the transport in your city good? What
means of transport does your city have?, how can you get faster to your house, on
foot or by car? What can be done to improve the quality of live in your city?
American culture
Los Ángeles, Birminham, Leeds, Glasgow y Shelfield son las cinco ciudades del
Reino Unido con mayor numero de habitantes. En total, Los Ángeles cuenta con
una poblacion de 9388000 habitantes.
211
Forty-first lesson
At the movie theater
1. Hi, Steve!
2. Hi, Laura, how are you?
3. Good, what about you?
4. Great!
5. What are you doing this weekend?
6. We’re going to the movies.
7. What movie are you going to see?
8. We’re seeing Peaches’ season.
9. What is it about?
10. The plot said that was the story about a man that fell in love with a woman,
while he had a passion with another one while he had a girlfriend.
11. What story!
12. I suppose it’s a romantic movie.
13. Actually, it said it was a thriller.
14. I don’t like thrillers, I find them boring, I prefer horror movies.
15. So do we, but this time we want to see something different.
16. I see
17. Do you want to come?
18. What time does the movie start?
19. At seven.
20. We can’t, at that time we’ll be very busy seeing a movie?
21. Which?
22. Peaches’ season.
Peache [pich] Durazno, season [sison] temporada, plot [plot] sinopsis, to fall in love [tu fol
in lofv] enamorarse, romantic [romantik] romantico, Actually [aktuali] de hecho, thriller
[θrila] pelicula de suspenso, horror [jorror] de terror, so do we [so du güi] a nosotros
tambien, busy [bizi] ocupado.
212
Trigesima novena lección
En el cine
1. Hola, Steve.
2. Hola, Laura, como estas?
3. Bien, y tu?
4. Bien.
5. Que vas a hacer este fin de semana?
6. Vamos a ir al cine.
7. Que película van a ver?
8. Vamos a ver Peaches’ season.
9. De que se trata?
10. La sinopsis decía que era la historia de un hombre que se enamoro de una
mujer, mientras tenia una pasión con otra mientras tenia novia.
11. Que hostoria.
12. Supongo que es una perlicula romantica.
13. De hecho, decia que era una pelicula de suspenso.
14. No me gustan las peliculas de sispenso, se me hacen aburridas, prefiero
laspeliculas de terror.
15. Nosotros tambien, pero esta vez queremos ver algo diferente.
16. Ya veo.
17. Quieren ir?
18. A que horas es la pelicula?
19. A las siete.
20. No Podemos, a esa hora estaremos muy icupados viendo una pelicula.
21. Cual?
22. Peaches’ season.
Reading
1. What are they do this weekend?

____________________________________________
2. What movie are they seeing?
____________________________________________
3. What is it about?
____________________________________________
4. What do they prefer?
____________________________________________
213
Present continuous and present simple to express the future
In some cases we can use the present continuous and the present simple to talk
about future events
Present continuous
Personal subject pronoun Verb to be Gerund

I Am Going
You Are Playing
He/she/it Is Studying
We/you/they Are Dying
We use the present continuous to talk about fixed arrangements (cosas que estan
en la agenda)
I’m seeing the dentist on Monday (we’ve already make an appointment)
Present Simple
We use the present simple to talk about future with timetables and schedules.
The movie starts at 8 o’clock
The train leaves at 17.
214
Writing
Escribe un articulo para un periodico donde digas que te parecio una pelicula. (100
palabras)
Speaking
Ask your partner: What time does your favourite program start? What kind of
movies do you like? What’s your favourite movie?
215
Forty-second lesson
Guest list
1. So, Beth, have you told your parents how many invitations they want?
2. My mom told me we reserved 4 for her and other fifty for her friends.
3. So, let’s to call to the buffet people to tell them that there’s going to be a
hundred guests.
4. Will we invite all of them to the church?
5. I don’t know, what do you think?
6. I believe is going to be better if we just invite the closest to the church and
the others to the wedding hall.
7. Is the civil registry judge getting to the church or to the wedding hall?
8. At the church, I’ve already talked to him.
9. Have you talked to the pray?
10. No, I’ll call him this afternoon.
11. Right, have you talked to your bridesmaids?
12. Yeah, they’re wearing a green dress, and have you talked to your friends?
13. They’re wearing a black suit.
14. Okey, so, see you later.
15. See you later, love.
16. I love you
17. Me too.
Guest [guest] invitado, list [list] lista, invitation [infviteishion] invitacion, to reserve [riserfv]
reservar, buffet [bufet] buffet, close [klous] cercano, wedding [guedind] boda, civil [sifvil]
civil, registry [reshyistri] registro, wedding hall [gueging jol] salon de bodas, pray [prei]
padre, bridesmaid [bridesmeid] dama de honor, see you later [si yu leita] nos vemos al
rato.
216
Trigesima novena lección
Lista de invitados
1. Entonces, Beth, ya le dijiste a tus padres cuantas invitaciones quieren?

2. Mi mamá dijo que le reservaramos para ella y otras cicuenta para sus
amigas.
3. Entonces, vamos a llamarles also del buffer para decirles que van a ser cien
invitados.
4. Invitamos a todos a la iglesia?
5. No se, que piensas?
6. Creo que va a ser mejor si solo invitamos a los más cercanos a la iglesia y
a los otros al salón bodas.
7. Va allegar el juezadel registro civil a la iglesiao al salon?
8. A la iglesia, ya hablé con él.
9. Ya le llamaste al padre?
10. No, le voy a llama ren la tarde.
11. Bien, ya hablaste con tus damas de honor?
12. Sí, van allevar un vestido verde. Y tu ya hablaste con tus amigos?
13. Van a llevar un traje negro.
14. Ok, entonces nos vemos al rato.
15. Te amo.
16. Yo tambien.
Reading
1. How many people will there be?

____________________________________________
2. Are they going to invite all the guest to the church?
____________________________________________
3. What time is the judge arring at the church ?
____________________________________________
4. What are his friends wearing?
____________________________________________
217
Present continuous, future simple and going to
Sometime these three tenses can be confused, so we can analysis them by the
distance in the future and the probability something happen.
Tense Usage Example
We use the future The man will visit other galaxies in the future.
simple to talk about
things that will
happen in a long
future (more than
one year).
Future simple
When we are doing I will get married next year. (You do not have a girlfriend)
something to come
true we want to do, I’m going to get married next year (you’ve already got
we use going to. girlfriend but you haven’t talk about it or you are talking
about it but you have not decided when.
We use going to to I’m going to buy a new car in March.

Going to talk about things
that will happen in a
near future (less
than a year but
more than a week)
We use the future I will buy a car in march

simple when (you do not have money to buy it)
something is not
sure that will
happen
We use the present What are doing this weekend?
218
simple to talk about I’m meeting my friends
future events in a I’m getting married Saturday evening
Present very near future.
continuous (MaxiMom one
week)
When we have
already made the I’m getting married next year
appointment we can
use the present
continuous to talk
about longer future
events.
Writing
En una hoja escribe cuales son tus planes a corto, mediano y largo plazo. (100
palabras)
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What are you doing tonight? What are you doing this weekend?, are you moving
this year? Are you looking fo a new work? Will you get married this year?
219
Seventh Unit
Subjunctive
220
 To talk about wishes

 To say how to arrive to a place
 To give instructions
Topics:
 Subjunctive present
 Subordinated conjunctions
 Personal object pronouns (two objects)
 Imperative
 Indefinite pronouns
 Relative pronouns
 Connectors of cause and effect
 Prepositions of movement
221
Forty third lesson
At doctor’s
1. What’s wrong?
2. I don’t know, I’m feeling dizzy and I have stomachache and diarrhoea.
3. Did you eat out Yesterday?
4. No, I ate in, as usual.
5. Have you taken something?
6. Yeah, I took an aspirin for the headache and a medicine for the stomach in
the morning, but I continue feeling bad.
7. I recommend you go to the doctor.
8. I believe you’re right.
At doctor’s
9. Good morning, sir, how can I help you?

10. I feel very bad
11. Do you have fever?
12. No, I don’t
13. Runny noose
14. No.
15. Can I take a look?
16. Sure!
17. Mm, looks like you have some inflammation back there.
18. Let me check your temperature. Okay. Your temperature seems normal.
19. Take these pills for three days and avoid going out to the street without
sweater
20. Thank you!
222
Sexta leccion
En el doctor
1. Que tienes, Bill?

2. No se, me siento mareado, me duele el estomago y tengo diarrea.
3. Comiste en la calle ayer?
4. No, comi en mi casa como siempre.
5. Ya te tomaste algo?
6. Sí, me tome una aspirina para la cabeza y una medicina para el estomago
en la mañana, pero me sigo sintiendo mal.
7. Te recomiendo que vayas con al DOCTOR.
8. Creo que tienes razon.
En el DOCTOR
9. Buenos dias, puedo ayudarlo?

10. Me siento mal
11. Tiene fiebre?
12. No
13. Escurrimiento nasal
14. No
15. Dejeme ver.
16. Sí
17. Parece algo inflamada
18. Dejeme ver su temperature. Bien. Su temperature parece normal.
19. Tome estas pildoras tres dias y evite salir a la calle sin suiter.
20. Muchas gracias.
21. De nada.
Reading
1. What has Mike have?

____________________________________________
2. Where did he eat?
____________________________________________
3. What does the doctor says he has?
____________________________________________
4. What does the doctor recommend to him?
____________________________________________
223
Subjunctive
We use the subjunctive to express wishes, desires, and hopes.
Subjunctive in English is uncommon, but it exists.
There are three forms of the subjunctive.
Main Subordinate clause

clause
Informal He goes to the doctor
(more use in I He doesn’t do it
UK) recommend that
Informal He should go to the doctor
He shouldn’t do it
Notice that it is said “I recommend that you ” and not “I recommend you that “
That can be omitted in the spoken language.
In informal speech, we can omit the “that”.
I recommend that you should go to the doctor. (formal)
I recommend you should go to the doctor. (informal)
Verbs with special constructions in the subjunctive
The verbs want, tell, ask, advise and the expressions would like to and “it’s time”
have a special construction
I want you to buy some chicken Quiero que compres pollo

He tells me to wait him Me dice que lo espere
We ask you to stay more time Te pidieron que te quedaras mas
tiempo
They advise us not to drink too much Nos recomiendan no tomar mucho
It’s time us to go Es hora de que nos vayamos
224
Writing
Un amigo tuyo no sabe si terminar su relacion o no. Escribele un mensaje donde le

digas tu punto de vista. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Do you go to the DOCTOR or to a private doctor?, how often do you get sick?,
what are the most commons sickness that you have?, do you prefer normal
medicine or natural medicine?, is going to the doctor cheap in your country?
225
Forty forth lesson
Buying a house
1. I want you to buy me a big house.

2. But, love, I’ve told you we can’t afford something big and less a two-floor
house.
3. Good morning, sir, how can I help you?
4. We want to see the houses that you offer.
5. Okay, we have some luxury houses 5 minutes walking from the city center
with yard, kitchen, living-room, master bedroom and child’s bedroom,
6. Yes but …
7. But if you like the country, we sell lovely cottages by the lake.
8. We’re thinking about something less expensive.
9. Well if you want something less expensive, we also sell two-bedroom
apartments with balcony.
10. We were thinking about a ranch, do you have?
11. I’m sorry, they sold out all we had, but if you’re looking for something cheap,
I recommend you buy a house in the suburbs, the payments are not very
high and the worth of the house will increase in the next years.
12. What do you think, love?
13. I think we should continue looking for.
226
Cuadragesima cuarta leccion
Comprar una casa
1. Quiero que me compres una casa grande.

2. Pero, amor, ya te dije que no podemos comprar una casa grande y menos
una casa de dos pisos.
3. Buenos dias, como puedo ayudarles?
4. Queremos ver las casas que vende.
5. Está bien, temenos algunas casas lujosas a 5 minutos caminando del
centro con jardin, cocina, sala, recamara y recamara para niños.
6. Sí pero…
7. Pero si a ustedes les gusta el campo vendemos unas encantadoras
cabañas junto al lago.
8. Estamo pensanddo en algo menos caro.
9. Bueno, si quieren algo menos caro, tambien vendemos departamentos con
dos recamaras con balcon.
10. Estabamos pensando en un studio, tiene?
11. Lo siento, se vendieron todos los que teniamos, pero si estan buscando
algo barato, les recomiendo comprar una casa en los suburbios, los pagos
no son muy altos y el valor de la casa subirá en los siguientes años.
12. Que piensas amor?
13. Pienso que debemos seguir buscando.
Reading
1. What do they want?

____________________________________________
2. Where are the cottages?
____________________________________________
3. What rooms do the apartments have?
____________________________________________
4. What does she think?
____________________________________________
227
Subjunctive conjunction
Because Ya que
Puesto que
Unless A no ser que
A menos que
Salvo que
Since Dado que
Desde que
So De manera que
So that De modo que
De tal suerte
In order for De forma que
In a way De tal modo que
De tal forma que
So that Para que
In order to A fin de que
That Que
Before Antes de que
Until Hasta que
While Mientras que
After Despúes de que
Whenever Siempre que
Without having to Sin que
For fear that Por miedo de que
Despite Pese a que
In spite of
228
Writing
Imagine que tea cabas de mudar. Escribe una ccarta a un amigo donde le digas
como es tu nueva casa. (100 palabras)
Speaking
Ask your partner:
How many rooms does your house have?, what are they? how’s your ideal
house?, would you like to have it in the city or in the country?, Where would you
like to be?
229
Forty fifth lesson
TV programs
1. Good morning, ladies and gentlemen and welcome to another edition of our
program Cooking in America.
2. Today, we’re going to learn how to cook Cornish pasty.
3. First, place the flour, salt, and butter into a large bowl.
4. Using your fingertips, rub the butter into the flour and salt until the mixture
resembles fine breadcrumbs, working as quickly as possible to prevent the
dough from becoming warm.
5. Add the cold water to the mixture and, using a cold knife, stir until the dough
binds together, adding more cold water a teaspoon at a time if the mixture is
too dry.
6. Wrap the dough in plastic wrap and chill for a minimum of 15 minutes and
up to 30 minutes.
Start making the Cornish pasty.
7. Gather the ingredients. (onion, potato, rump steak)

8. Heat the oven to 220 C/425 F/Gas 7.
9. Divide the pastry into 4 equal pieces and roll each piece into rounds the size
of a tea plate - approximately 6 to 7 inches in diameter.
10. Place the onion, potato, swede and meat into a large mixing bowl and
combine thoroughly. Season well with salt and pepper.
11. Divide the meat mixture evenly among each pastry circle and place to one
side. Brush the edges with beaten egg.
12. Fold the circle in half over the filling so the two edges meet. Crimp the two
edges together to create a tight seal. Brush each pasty all over with the
remaining beaten egg.
13. Place the pasties on a greased baking sheet and bake for 45 minutes until
golden brown.
14. Serve hot or cold and enjoy!
230
Cuadragesima cuarta leccion
Programas de televisión
1. Buenos dias, dams y caballeros y vienvenidos a otra edicion de nuestro

program Cooking in America.
2. Hoy, vamos a aprender como hacer pastes.
3. Primero, coloque la harina, la sal y la mantequilla en un tazon grande.
4. Usando las puntas de los dedos, embarre la mantequilla en la harina y la
sal hasta que la mezcla quede como bolas, haciento esto lo más rapido
possible para que la masa no se caliente.
5. Añada agua fria a la mezcla y usando un cuchillo frio, corte la maza, añada
más agua fria, una cucharadita a la vez si la mezcla está demasiado seca.
6. Envuelva la masa en plastic para envolver y enfrie unos 15 minutos como
minimo y 30 como maximo.
Empezar a hacer los pastes.
7. Ingredientes necesarios. (cebolla, papa, bistek de cordero)

8. Caliente el horno a 200C/425F/Gas 7.
9. Divida los pastes en cuatro pieza y doble cada una, debe ser del tamaño de
un platito, aproximadamente de 6 a 7 pulgadas de diametro.
10. Coloque la cebolla, la papa, el rabano y la carne en un tazon para mezclar y
combine. Sasone con sal y pimienta.
11. Doble el circulo para juntar las dos puntas. Embarre cada paste con lo que
quede del huevo batido.
12. Coloque los pastes en una hoja encerada para hornear 45 minutos hasta
que queden doradas.
13. Sirva calientes o frias y disfrutelas!
1. What ingredients do you need?

____________________________________________
2. How long do you have to ut in on the refrigerator?
____________________________________________
3. What other ingredients do you need?
____________________________________________
4. How long do you have to bake it?
____________________________________________
231
Imperative
Verb Imperative
To do Do
We make the imperative by taking out to.
We make the negative imperative by adding do not/don’t to the affirmative

imperative.
Do
Don’t do
Personal Object Pronouns (two objects)
Personal Verb Direct objet To Indirect object

pronoun
I Made A cake To You
Personal Verb Indirect object - Direct object
pronoun
I Made You - It
232
Writing
Escribe como hacer tu receta favorita. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What do you usually eat in your country?, what meals do you believe that are
famous abroad?, what ingredients does the most famous of your country have? do
you prefer healthy food or junk food?, what’s your favourite junk food?
233
Forty sixth lesson
An interesting story
1. It was a cold day of winter. It’d been a long day and the only thing which I
thought in was sleeping. When I arrived at home, I only had some cookies
for dinner and went to bed.
2. When I was about to fall sleep, I heard a noise that came from the
downstairs floor.
3. I got up and I went downstairs. I looked for everywhere, but I couln’t find out
from where the noise had come.
4. When I was in the living-room, I heard again the noise. It came from the
kitchen.
5. As I think that maybe someone had broken into the house, I took a knife and
went slowly to the kitchen. When I came in, there was no one, suddenly I
heard a noise that came behind me, I turned the head fast and when I saw it
was only a kitten.
6. And then?
7. Nothing, it’s the cat I got today.
8. What an interesting story!
234
Cuadragesima sexta leccion
Una historia interesante
1. Era un dia frio de invierno. Habia sido un largo dia y lo unico en lo que
pensaba era en dormir. Cuando llegué a mi casa, lo unico que comi fueron
unas galletas y me fui a dormir.
2. Cuando estaba apunto de dormirme, escuche un ruido que venia del piso
de abajo.
3. Me levante y bajé. Busque por todos lados pero no pude descubrir de
donde venia el ruido.
4. Cuando estaba en la sala, escuche el rudio otra vez. Venia de la cocina.
5. Pensando que tal vez alguien habia entrado a la casa, tome un cuchillo y
me dirigi a la cocina.
6. Cuando entre, no habia nadie, derepente escuche un ruido que venia de
atras de mi, voltie rapido la cabeza y cuando vi era solo un pequeño gato.
7. Y luego?
8. Nada, es el gato que tengo hoy.
9. Que interesante historia!
Reading
1. What did he heard?

____________________________________________
2. What did he do when he heard the noise?
____________________________________________
3. What did he think?
____________________________________________
4. What was the noise?
____________________________________________
235
Indefinite pronouns
People Things Places

Some Someone Something Somewhere
(alguien) (algo) (en algun lugar)
No No one Nothing Nowhere
(nadie) (nada) (en ningun lugar)
Any Anyone Anything Anywhere
(cualquiera) (cualquier cosa) (en cualquier lugar)
Every Everyone Everything Everywhere
(todos) (todo) (en todos lados)
Notice: Some and No becomes any in:
a. negative and interrogative sentences.
I do not know anyone Not I do not know no one
Do you know anyone? Not I do not know someone
b. With negative words in formal language.
I never go anywhere Not I never go somewhere
c. With the conditional

Call me if anyone calls Not Call me if someone calls
Note: The world “body” can be change for “one. (someone, anyone, no one,
everyone)
236
Writing
Escribe una pequeña historia. Trata de usar la mayor cantidad de Indefinite

pronouns que puedas. (100 palabras)
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What would you feel if you were in a country where you know no one?, did you live
anything special when you were younger?, what?, have you ever have found
something on the street? What? When?
237
Forty seventh lesson
In London
1. There are many places to visit in London.

2. The most famous place in London is the Big Ben, but remember it’s just the
clock which is named Big Ben, the name of the tower was Clock Tower until
2012 when was renamed as Ann Tower.
3. Another place to visit is the Buckingham Palace, place where the queen of
United Kindom lives.
4. There’s another place to visit in London which is the London eye, also
known as the “Millennium Wheel”, which is placed beside the Thames River.
5. If you don’t have enough money to visit these places, don’t worry, London
boast an array of attractions that are free to visit, including the Victoria and
Albert Museum, Hyde Park and Kensington gardens.
6. If you come toLondon, don’t forget to eat some Fish and Chips or take a a
cup of tea in one of its magnificent restaurants.
238
Cuadragesima sexta leccion
En Londres
1. Hay muchos lugares que visitor en Londres.

2. El más Famoso es el Big Ben, pero recuerda que es solo el reloj el que se
llama Big Ben, el nombre de la torre era Clock hasta el 2012 cuando se le
cambio el nombre a Ann Tower.
3. Otro lugar que visitor es el palacio de Buckungham, lugar donde la reina de
inglaterra vive.
4. Hay otro lugar que visitor en Londres que es el Londres Eye, tambien
conocina como rueda del milenio, la cual se encuentra junto al rio Tamesis.
5. Si o tienes suficiente dinero para visitor estos lugares, no te preocupes,
Londres está llena de atracciones que son gratis, incluyendo el Museo
Victoria y el Museo Albert, Hyde Park y los jardines Kensington.
6. Si vienes a Londres, no olvides comer unos Fish and Fries o tomar una tasa
de té en uno de sus magnificos restaurantes.
Reading
1. What is the Big Ben?

____________________________________________
2. Where does the king of United States live?
____________________________________________
3. How is called the Los Angeles eye?
____________________________________________
4. What can you visit if you do not have enough money?
____________________________________________
239
Relative pronouns
Relative pronoun Usage Example
Who Que (when we refer to She is the girl who won

a person) the first prize.
Which Que (when we refer to It is the car which I sold

anything that should them
not be human)
When Que (when we refer to I won’t forget the day

time) when I met you
That Que (for joining to She told that she was

independent going to be here
sentences)
Who and which means “(el) que, (la) que, ect.”
We can use that instead of who and which in informal style.
The girl who is wearing a white dress is my sister. (formal)
The girl that is wearing a white dress is my sister (informal)
240
Writing
Escribe un articulo de tu ciudad. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What are the most famouses places in your city?, do you visit them?, what places
can a forenger to visit?, what is your favourite part of your city? What place do you
prefer going to?
241
Forty-eight lesson
On vacations
1. Honey, are you sure we have everything what we need for the trip?
2. Yeah, we have the tickets, the reservation of the resort and the map.
3. Should we exchange the money before flying or after?
4. After, I believe we can find better prices there.
5. Honey, have you seen my trunks?
6. They are in your suitcase
7. And my towel?
8. It’s too in your suitcase.
9. Should we take an umbrella with us?
10. Yeah, in case it rains.
At airport
11. Good afternoon! Where are you flying today?

12. Mexico City
13. May I have your passport, please?
14. Here you are!
15. Are you checking any bags?
16. Just this one.
17. OK, please place your bag on the scale.
18. I have a stopover in Mexico City, do I need to pick up my luggage there?
19. No, it’ll go straight through to Mexico City. Here you are your boarding pass
– your flight leaves from gate 15A
and it’ll begin boarding at 1:20PM. Your seat number is 26E.
20. Thank you!
242
Cuadragesima octava leccion
De vacaciones
1. Querida, estas segura que ya temenos todo para el viaje?

2. Si, temenos los boletos, la reservacion del hotel y el mapa.
3. Deberias cambiar el dinero antes de irnos o despúes?
4. Despúes, creo que Podemos encontrar mejores precios alla.
5. Querida, has visto mi traje de baño?
6. Esta en tu maleta.
7. Y mi tualla?
8. Tambien está en la maleta.
9. Deberimos llevar el paaraguas?
10. Si, por si llueve.
En el aeropuerto
22. Buenas tardes, a donde van hoy?

23. A la Ciudad de México
24. Puedo ver su pasaporte, por favor
25. Aqui tiene!
26. Algo que tengan que declarer?
27. Solo esta maleta.
28. Esta´bien, por favor coloque la maleta en la escala.
29. Voy a hacer escala en Nueva New York, tengo que recoger mi equipaje
allá?
30. No, llegará directamente a Mexico. Aqui tiene sus pases de abordar, su
vuelo sale del angar 15A y comenzarán a abordar el vuelo a las 13:20. El
numero de su asiento es 26 E.
31. Muchas gracias!
32. De nada!
1. When are they going to exchange the money?

____________________________________________
2. Where ar they going?
____________________________________________
3. What does the policeman ask them?
____________________________________________
4. Where is the baggage arriving?
____________________________________________
243
Connectors of cause and effect
To Para
In order to Para (formal)
So as to
In order not to Para no
So as not
So that Para + oracion
For Para (para que se usa algo)
In case + past tense Para que
Because of A causa de
In order to A fin de
So Así que
Even when Aun cuando
With the purpose of Con el fin de
On the occasion of Con motivo de
In case En caso de
In case En caso de que
Thanks to Gracias a
So Por lo tanto
Although Si bien
As a result (of) Como resultado (de)
Because of Por (debido a)
Consequently En consecuencia
Not to does not exist.
She woke up early in order to not to be early.
Not she woke up early not to be early
244
Writing
Reescribe el dialogo cambiando algunas cosas.
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
How often do you fly?, do you prefer driving, flying or taking a coach in your
vacations? Have you ever gone abroad? Where? When? Have you ever been to
another continent? What? What country would you like to visit?
245
Forty ninth lesson
A happy childhood
1. I remember when I was a child, I used to live in a small town by the sea.
2. I used to like to walk along the beach and sail in my boat.
3. Once I was on my boat with my sister and I fell into the sea, my sister
laughed a lot.
4. I remember that in that time, there wasn’t a road, so we had to go cross an
old bridge that was outside of the town. My friends and me used to like to go
to the bridge because we could fish and jumped into the water from it.
5. As I lived in a cliff, I used to like to look through the window how the ships
got to the port.
6. I remember I used to have a cat, I like it a lot, I can still remember how it
liked to walk onto my mom’s desk. I found it very funny, but my mom always
told me to let it down.
7. There were good times.
246
Cuadragesima novena leccion
Una feliz infancia
1. Recuerdo que cuando era niño, vivia en un pequeño pueblo junto al mar.
2. Me gustaba caminar a lo largo de la playa y navegar en mi barco.
3. Una vez que estaba en mi hermana con mi hermana me cai al mar, mi
hermana se rio mucho.
4. Me acuerdo que en ese entonces, no habia Carretera, asi que teniamos que
cruzar un viejo puente que estaba afuera del pueblo. A mis amigos y a mi
nos gustaba ir allí a pescar y a saltar al agua.
5. Como vivia en un risco, me gustaba ver traves de la Ventana como los
barcos llegaban al Puerto.
6. Reecuerdo que tenia un gato, me gusta mucho, todavia puedo recordar
como le gustaba caminar en el escritorio de mi mamá. Se me hacia difertido
pero mi mamá simpre me decia que lo bajará.
7. Eran buenos tiempos.
Reading
1. What happened when he was with her sister?

____________________________________________
2. What was not there?
____________________________________________
3. What did his friends and he do?
____________________________________________
4. What did he find funny?
____________________________________________
247
Prepositions of movement
Into En
Onto En
Up Hacia arriva
Down Hacia abajo
Along A lo largo de
Through Atraves de
Toward Hacia
248
Writing
Escribe lo que hacias con tus amigos cuando ibas a la primaria. (100 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Where did you live when you were a kid?, what did you do workdays? What did
you do On the weekend?, did you have pets?
249
Eighth Unit
Vacations
250
 To talk about your vacations

 To use the phrasal verbs
Topics:
 Present continuous
 Stative verbs
 Past continuous
 Phrasal verbs
 Future continuous
 Relative pronouns II
 Other comparative structures
Listening tips
From this point, it is necessary that you listen B1 english recordings. You can buy
them in lenguagues libraries or on internet. Be sure they are for the level B1 and
that they have the symbol CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS.
251
Fiftieth lesson
Good friends
1. Hi, Mike!
2. Hi, Daniela, how are you?
3. Good, what about you?
4. All right.
5. I hadn’t seen you since we won the regional football cup.
6. Yeah, there were good times
7. Do you continue playing football?
8. No, I changed it for the uni. Now, I’m reading architecture. And what about
you?, do you continue playing football?
9. No, I’ve never liked it a lot, now I play basketball and baseball.
10. Are you coming in the champioship?
11. No, because I have to work.
12. Where do you work?
13. I work in a german company as manager of international business, but it
won’t be for a long time because I’m moving next week to the United States
to come true my dream to be a surf instructor.
14. I hope you can realize your dream.
15. Me too, it’s getting late, we’d better go.
16. You’re right, I hope to see you soon.
17. Me too.
18. Send me off a postcard and a cuppa.
19. A cuppa?
20. Yeah, that’s the form the british people say “a cup of tea” in.
252
Quincuagesima lección
Buenos amigos
1. Hola, Mike!
2. Hola, Daniela, como estas?
3. Muy bien, y tu?
4. Bien.
5. No te habia visto desde que ganamos la copa de football regional.
6. Sí, eran buenos tiempos.
7. Sigues jugando football?
8. No, lo cambie por la Universidad. Estoy estudiando arquitectura. Y tu?
sigues jugando?
9. No, nunca me gusto mucho, ahora juego basketball y baseball.
10. Vas a entrar al campeonato.
11. No, porque tengo mucho trabajo.
12. Donde trabajas?
13. Trabajo en una empresa alemana como gerente de negocios
internacionales, pero no será por mucho porque la siguiente semana me
voy a mudar a Estados Unidos para Volver realidad mi sueño de ser
maestro de surf.
14. Espero que puedas Volver realidad tu sueño.
15. Yo tambien, está obscureciendo, será major que nos vayamos.
16. Tienes razón, espero verte pronto.
17. Yo también
18. Enviame una postal y una cuppa.
19. A cuppa?
20. Sí, esa es la forma en la que los ingleses dicen una taza de té.
Reading
1. When was the last time that they see each other?
____________________________________________
2. What does the man do?
____________________________________________
3. Will he working there for much time?
____________________________________________
4. Why is he moving to California?
____________________________________________
253
Present Continuous
I Am
You Are
He
She Is Eating
It
We
You are
They
We make the negative and interrogative form of the present continuous in the
same way we make it with the verb to be.
You are not eating
Are you eating?
We use the present continuous to talk about:
1. Actions that are happening in a specific moment in the present.

I’m drinking water (at this moment)
2. Temporal situations.
We are eating less while I find another work.
3. For things that are changing or developing while we speak.

The global warming is becoming a topic each time more important.
The scientists are discovering new species every year.
4. With the adverb of frequency to express anger or irritation.

He is always making me mad.
5. With fixed arrangements in the near future.

I’m traveling to Barcelona next week.
254
Writing
Rewrite the text by using formal lenguague.
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Do you practice a sport? why do you practice it?
Is it a good idea to practice a sport? why?
Should the schools give more time to their students so that they practice a sport?
why?
255
Fifty first lesson
A long travel
1. Dear parents,
We’ve had a good time here in Los Angeles, at the beginning it was difficult
to get used to the people, the costumes and the weather but we no longer
miss badly Mexico. Actually, the kids are happy to be here, and they look to
get on well with the American kids.
2. We’re now thinking about going on vacations. We want to travel along
Europe.
3. We want to visit France, Germany and if we won’t have run out of the
money by that time, Italy and Portugal. We’ve been saving up money by
cutting down some expenses, so we think we’ll have enough money for
doing that.
4. María told me to book a hotel room but I told her it wouldn’t be a good idea
because the most of the time, we’ll have to stop over in our way to the main
cities. Anyway, I hope there isn’t much traffic because the car broke down
last week and we aren’t sure if it’ll be able to support the long trip.
5. I hope you can drop us in soon,
6. Your son Miguel
256
Quincuagesima primera lección
Un largo viaje
1. Queridos padres,
2. Hemos estado bien aqui en Los Ángeles, al principio fue dificil
acostumbrarnos a las personas, las costumbres y al clima pero ya no
extrañamos México. De hecho, los niños parecen estar felices de estar aqui
y parece que se llevan bien con os niños estadunidenses.
Ahora estamos pensando en irnos de vacaciones. Que remos hacer un
viaje por toda Europa.
3. Quremos visitor Francia, Alemania y si no nos hemos acabado todo el
dinero para entonces, Italia y Portugal.
Hemos ahorrado dinero reduciendo algunos gastos, asi que pensamos que
tendremos suficiente dinero para hacer el viaje.
4. María me dijo que reservará un hotel pero le dije que no era una buena idea
ya que la mayor parte del tiempo nos estaremos deteniendo en hoteles que
encontremos en nuestro camino a las grandes ciudades.
Como sea, espero que no haya mucho trafico porque el carro se
descompuso la semana pasada y no estamos seguros de que pueda
aguantar el largon viaje.
5. Espero que puedan visitarnos pronto,
6. Miguel
Reading
1. What countries will they visit if they have not spent all the money?
____________________________________________
2. How did they save money?
____________________________________________
3. Why did he tell his wife that it was not a good idea to book a hotel?
____________________________________________
4. Why are they not sure if the car will support the trip?
____________________________________________
257
Stative Verbs
Some verbs cannot be used in a progressive structure; these verbs ones are called
stative verbs.
Stative verbs are:
a. The verbs which express sense (see, hear, smell, taste, touch), except feel.
b. Verbs related with the mind (know, believe, understand, realise, remember,
forget)
c. Verbs which express feelings, emotions, likes and dislikes (like, love, hate,
enjoy, prefer, detest, desire)
d. Some other verbs (be, contain, include, belong, fit, need, matter, cost, own,
want, own, weight, wish, have and keep)
Verbs which have a progressive form which change in the meaning
Simple form Continuous form

Think Creer Thinking Pensar
Have Posesion Having Tener
See Ver Seeing Verse con
alguien
258
Writing
Write a letter to a friend where you tell to him what your plans for the next
vacations are. (150 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What country would you like to visit?, Why? What mean of transport do you prefer
to travel, the car or the airplane? Why? Is it secure to travel in your cointry? Why?
Where do you like to travel? Why?
259
Fifty third lesson
Buddies
1. Hi, you guys, how are you?

2. Great, what about you?
3. Well. What are you going to do when the semester breaks up?
4. I don’t know, I think I’ll stay in or maybe I’ll go on vacations with my parents.
5. I’m going to Seatle to visit Sally. Do you want to come?
6. I can’t. I’m going to my aunt’s wedding. Do you have a costume that you can
lend me because I need to dress up.
7. No, I’m sorry.
8. And you Tom, do you want to come?
9. Yeah. I didn’t feel like being home.
10. Why not?
11. My mom punished me for turning up the radio to the maximum volume while
she had an online lesson.
12. Well, who else do we invite?
13. How about John.
14. No, he has a new job and he kicks off this Monday. Well, I think we’ll be only
we two. What do we take to eat? I’ll take sausages, potatoes and some
sodas.
15. I’ll take the beer and the fries.
16. Ok, what else do we take?
17. A map.
18. A map?
19. Yeah, because last time we went on a trip we ended up in Mexico.
260
Quincuagesima tercera lección
Ir de vacaciones
1. Hola, como estan?

2. Bien, y tu?
3. Bien. Que van a hacer cuando termine el semester?
4. No se. yo creo que estar en casa o ir de vacaciones con mis papas.
5. Voy a visitor a Sally en Seatle. Quieren ir?
6. No puedo. Voy a ir a la boda de una tia. No tienen un traje que me presten
porque tengo que ir de gala.
7. Y tu Tom, quieres ir?
8. Sí, no tengo ganas de estar en mi casa.
9. Porque no?
10. Mi mamá me castigo por por subirle al radio a todo volume cuando estaba
en una clase virtual.
11. Bueno, a quien más invitamos.
12. A John?
13. No, consiguio un nuevo trabajo y empieza el lunes. Bueno, creo que
seremos solo nosotros tres. Que llevamos para comer? Yo llevaré
salchichas, papas y sodas.
14. Yo llevaré la cerveza y las papas.
15. Ok que más llevamos?
16. Un mapa
17. Un mapa?
18. Sí, porque la ultima vez que salimos de viaje terminamos en México.
261
Phrasal verbs
A phrasal verb is a verb who adds a preposition to change its meaning.
Come Venir
Come back Regresar
Come up Acercarse
Come around Volver a casa
The phrasal verbs with two preposicions or with the prepositions at and into cannot
be separated.
I’m looking at you.
Not I’m looking you at.
The rest of the phrasal verbs can be divided.
I’m coming up you = I’m coming up you
Note: Most of the phrasal verbs are informal.
Cristobal Columbus discovered America. (formal)
Cristobal Columbus found out America (informal)
Reading
5. Why did he go to France?

____________________________________________
6. Why wa he ashamed?
____________________________________________
7. Why was he embarrased?
____________________________________________
8. What did they do at the end?
____________________________________________
262
Writing
Rewrite the text by using formal lenguague. (150 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Do you believe in the love to first sight? Why?, Do you believe in the eternal love?
Why?, Have you ever had a uncommon relationship style? Why? Do you agree
someone can get married with two people?
263
Fifty second lesson
An unwelcome surprise
1. It had happened weird things to me, but the weirdest of them happened a
dark night of winter.
2. I was going back to the airport because I’d forgotten to pick up a packet that
my boss had sent me off from Glasgow when I saw a young woman walking
on the road.
3. As I felt fear about the poor woman was very cold, I decided to do a U-turn
and went to the poor young woman. I came her up slowly and I pulled up the
car next to her, when I did it, she looked up, her face was covered by a
hood.
4. I asked her if she needed some help, what she replied no.
5. I asked her if she want me to give her a ride what she answered with a
polite “No, thank you”
6. I found that weird but as I was late I decided not to insist and go to the
airport.
7. When I was coming back to my house, I could see that the poor woman
continued walking. This time it kicked off snowing harder. So, I risked to ask
her again if she wanted that I gave her a ride what she said this time yes.
8. She has in and we continued our way to the city. On the way, I asked her if
she wanted to call up someone but she said no.
9. As I felt a bit of fear, I turned on the radio but she told me immediately to
turn it off.
10. When we were about to get to the city, the young woman suddenly
dissapear. When I have to a gas station, I said what had happened to a man
that was there and he told me that it's been the ghost of a woman that had
died in the road 20 years ago.
264
Quincuagesima segunda lección
Una sorpresa inmesperada
1. Me han pasado cosas raras, pero la cosa más rara ocurrio una noche
obscura de invierno.
2. Estaba regresando del aeropuerto porque habia olvidado recoger un
paquete que mi jefe me habia enviado desde Glasgow cuando vi a una
joven caminando en el camino.
3. Temiendo que la pobre mujer tuviera frio, decidi hacer una Vuelta en U e ir
hacia la pobre chica. Me acerque lentamente y estacione el resuméarro
junto a ella, cuando lo hice, subio su cara, su cara estaba cubierta por una
capucha.
4. Le pregnte si necesitaba ayuda, a lo cual contest no.
5. Le pregunte si queria que le diera un aventón a lo cual contest con un
cortes”no gracias”
6. Se me hizo raro pero como ya estaba atrasado decidi no insistir e irme al
aeropuerto.
7. Cuando regresaba a mi casa, pude ver que la pobre chica seguia
caminando. Esta vez empezo a nevar más fuerte. Entonces, decidi
arriesgarme a preguntarle otra vez a la joven si queria que le diera un
aventón a lo cual respondio esta vez con un sí.
8. Ella entró en el carro y continuamos nuestro camino a la ciudad. En el
camino, le pregunté si queria llamar a alguien pero dijo que no.
9. Sintiendo un poco dermiedo, prendi la radio pero ella me dijo
inmediatamente que la apagara.
11. Cuando estabamos a punto de llegar a la ciudad la juven subitamente
desaparecio. Cuando llegué a una gasolineera, le conte a un señor que
estaba ahí lo que habia ocurrido. Él me dijo que ese era el fantasma de una
mujer que habia muerto en la carretera hace 20 años.
Reading
1. Why did he go to the airport?

____________________________________________
2. Why did he do a U-turn?
____________________________________________
3. What did he stop again?
____________________________________________
4. Who did he told what had happened?
____________________________________________
265
Past Continuous
I Was
You Were
He Eating
She Was
It
We
You were
They
We make the negative and interrogative form of the present continuous in the
same way we make it with the verb to be.
You were not eating
Were you eating?
Usage
We use the past continuous:
a. To talk about actions in the past in progress at the same moment

I was watching the T.V. while she was cooking.
b. to talk about things which were happening when we talk about a story.
It was raining, so I decided to take the bus.
In all the other cases, we use the past continuous in the same way than in
Spanish.
266
Writing
Write a scary story which has happened to you. (150 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Do you believe in ghosts? Why?
267
Fifty sixth lesson
Neighbors
1. What do you think about the new neighbors?

2. I think the Smiths are the simplest people I’ve ever known.
3. Yeah, and their son is the cleverest kid I’ve seen, he could resolve the
Rubik’s cube in just one minute!
4. Yeah, and their puppy is the friendliest puppy which I’ve ever played with.
5. Yeah, you’re right and dinner they’ve given us was the tastiest I’ve ever tried
out.
6. Where are they from?
7. Missus Smith said that she had grown up in Florida and I think Mister Smith
is from New York.
8. We haven’t gone to New York for ages, why don’t we ho on vacations this
weekend?
9. That’s a good idea! And we can invite the Smiths.
268
Quinquagesima sexta lección
Vecinos
1. Que piensas de los nuevos vecinos?

2. Pienso que los Smiths son las personas más simples que haya conocido.
3. Sí, y su hijo es el niño más listo que haya visto, él pudo resolver el cubo
Rubik en solo un minuto.
4. Sí, y su perro es el perro más amigable with el que haya jugado.
5. Sí, tienes razón y la cena que nos dieron ha sido la cena más rica que haya
probado.
6. Hablando de ellos, de donde son?
7. La señora Smith es de Florida y creo que el señor Smith del norte.
8. No hemos ido a New York desde hace mucho, porque no vamos este fin de
semana?
9. Es una Buena idea. Y Podemos inviter a los Smiths.
Reading
1. What does she think about the new neighbors?

____________________________________________
2. Why the neighbor’s kid is the clevest kid that he has seen?
____________________________________________
3. What does he think about the neighbor’s dog?
____________________________________________
4. Why do you want to go to the south?
____________________________________________
269
Other comparative structures
The adjectives clever, common, friendly, gentle, pleasant, polite, shallow, simple,
stupid and quiet have two comparative and superlative forms.
More simple = simpler
Most simple = simplest
We can use the expressions much with the comparative.
He’s richer than you
He’s much richer than you
Comparative and Comparative
The car is going faster and faster
270
Writing
Write an article the best place to where you’ve gone. (150 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Do you believe in ghosts? Why?
271
Fifty forth lesson
At airport II
1. Don’t worry, honey, by this time tomorrow we’ll be laying down on the
beach.
2. I know but the simple idea of being about 10000 yards over sea level scares
me.
3. I know honey, but you’ll see you’’ll feel better as soon as the plane has
taken off, just try to calm down.
4. I believe you’re right
On the flight
5. Are you continue feeling fear?

6. Not really, I believe the fear wore off after I took that Tequila.
7. I told you it was going to help you.
8. Honey, what time have we have to check in?
9. At 1PM
10. And the check out?
11. On Sunday at 1PM
12. Did your friend book into the resort I’d told you?
13. Yeah, try to calm down, we’re about to land.
On land
1. At last, we’re here,

2. Yeah, I’d better phone my friend Carlos to tell him we already got. What’s
wrong, love?
3. You know, I’d been looking forward to coming to Mexico since a long time
and now I can’t believe that dream that I had has come true.
4. You’re right, what should we do first?
5. I come up with we should go first to the pyramids and after to the city center.
6. Ok
7. So let’s to find my friend.
272
Quinquagesima cuarta lección
En el aeropuerto II
1. No te preocupes querida, a esta hora mañana, estaremos acostados en la

playa.
2. Lo se, pero me la idea de estar a 10000 metros sobre el nivel del mar me
asusta.
3. Lo se querida, pero ya verás que te sentiras major en cuanto el avión haya
despegado, solo trata de calmarte.
4. Tienes razon.
En el avion
5. Te segues sintiendo miedo?

6. No, creo que el miedo se me quito despúes de que me tome ese Tequila.
7. Te dije que te iba a ayudar.
8. Querida, a que hora temenos que registrar la entrada?
9. A la 1
10. Y a que hora temenos que registrar la salida?
11. El domingo a la 1.
12. Tu amigo reservo el hotel que te dije?
13. Sí, trata de calmarte, estamos a punto de aterrizar.
En tierra
1. Al fin estamos aqui.

2. Sí, será major que llame a mi amigo Carlos para decirle que ya llegamos.
Que tienes, amor?
3. Ya sabes, habia esperado venir a México desde hace mucho tiempo y
ahora no puedo creer que ese sueño que tenia se haya vuelto realidad.
4. Tienes razon. Que hacemos primero?
5. Pienso que deberiamos ir primero a las piraides y depues al centro.
6. Ok
7. Entonces vamos a buscar a mi amigo.
273
Future Continuous
I
You
He
She Will be Eating
It
We
You
They
We make the negative and interrogative form of the future continuous in the same
way we do it in the future simple.
You will not be eating
Will you be eating?
We use the future continuous to talk about an action that will be in progress in the
future.
At this time tomorrow, we’ll be lying down on the beach.
Reading
1. Why is she scared?

____________________________________________
2. What did he tell her when she told him that she was scared?
____________________________________________
3. What did she do to not to be scared?
____________________________________________
4. What is she happy?
____________________________________________
274
Writing
Write a similar story. Try to use as many indefinite pronouns as possible. (150
palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Do you like to travel by airplane? Why? What do you think is more secure,
travelling by car or by airplane? Why?
275
Fifty fifth lesson
In Mexico City
1. Morning, Carlos.
2. Morning, Simon, I haven’t seen you for ages.
3. Yeah, since I moved back to the United States.
4. Yeah, and who’s this good-looking girl that is next to you?
5. Oh I’m sorry. Carlos, this is my wife Ann.
6. Nice to meet you!
7. Likewise.
8. Have you taken your baggage yet?
9. Yeah.
10. So, let’s go.
11. And why were you late?
12. I’m sorry, the plane fell behind because there was a strong snowstorm.
13. Yeah, it always happens at this part of the year.
14. And what do you want to do?
15. We want to go to the city center to walk, do you believe there are many
people?
16. I drove downtown this morning and it was crowed.
17. I see, Carlos do you know a place to eat, we’re starving.
18. If you want, I can take you to the place where my wife and I eat.
19. That’s a good idea!
20. Do you want Gorditas?
21. Are you joking, that’s the reason why we’re here.
276
Quinquagesima quinta lección
En la Ciudad México
1. Hola, Carlos.
2. Hola, Simon, cuanto tiempo sin vernos.
3. Sí, desde que regresa a Inglaterra.
4. Sí, y quien esta hermosa joven que esta junto a ti?
5. Perdon! Carlos, ella es mi esposa Ann.
6. Gusto en conocerla!
7. Igualmente!
8. Ya agarraron su equipaje?
9. Sí
10. Entonces, vamonos.
11. Porque llegaron tarde?
12. Lo siento, nuestro avion se atrazo porque habia una fuerte tormenta de
nieve.
13. Sí, eso siempre pasa en esta parte del año.
14. Y que quieren hacer?
15. Queremos ir al centro a caminar, crees que haya mucha gente?
16. Pase en la mañana y estaba lleno.
17. Ya veo, carlos sabes a donde Podemos ir a comer, temenos mucha
hambre.
18. Sí quieres los puedo llevar a donde mi esposa y yo vamos.
19. Es una Buena idea.
20. Les gustan las Gorditas?
21. Bromeas, esa el la razon por la que estamo aqui.
Reading
1. What did he heard?

____________________________________________
2. How’s the city center?
____________________________________________
3. Where are they going?
____________________________________________
4. Why are they in México?
____________________________________________
277
Relative pronouns II
Where Donde That is the house

where the girl I like
lives
Whose Cuyo (to indicate something or This is the man

someone belongs to someone) whose son is a
doctor
What Lo que That is what I was

thinking
Why Por la que (when we say the That was the reason
cause) why I was late
We use the preposition at the end of the relative sentence.
That is the woman who I saw him with.
The relative pronouns cannot be omitted when they are the subject of the relative
clause.
She showed me photos of the gorilas (which/that) she had studied.
She showed me photos of the gorilas which/that lived with.
278
Writing
Rewrite the text by using formal lenguague.
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
In what mean of transport do you like to travel the most? Why? What country would
you like to visit? Why? What do you take with you when you go on vacations?
Why? Do your prefer eating tradicional dishes or normal meal when you are on
vacations? Why?
279
Tenth Unit
Education
280
 To talk about natural laws

 To make hypotheses
Topics:
 Conditional type 0
 Definite and non-definite clauses
 Infinitive
 Gerunds
 Past participle and present participle
281
Fifty seventh lesson
At high school
1. Good morning!
2. Good morning, Mister Smith
3. Have you done your homework?
4. Yes, we have.
5. So let’s to see how much you’ve learned.
6. If a man throws a rock from a 98-height building, how long does the rock last
in arriving at the floor?
7. I work out it can get to ….
8. Don’t speak in that way, you’re at school.
9. Ok, I reckon it arrives at the floor in 10 seconds.
10. You’re right, next. If you put a glass of water outside your house in winter, to
what temperature does the water become ice?
11. If it’s winter, it becomes ice at 0 degrees.
12. Correct, And the last, If I sleep during the class, how much will the teacher
score me in the subject?
282
Quinquagesima septima lección
En la preparatoria
1. Buenos dias!
2. Buenos dias, señor Bill.
3. Hicieron su tarea?
4. Sí
5. Entonces vamos a ver que tanto han aprendido.
6. Si un hombre lanza una Piedra desde un edificio de 98 metros, cuanto
tiempo tarda la Piedra en llegar al suelo?
7. Calculo que puede llegar …
8. No hables asi, estas en la escuela.
9. Ok, calculo que llega en 10 segundos.
10. Tines razon. Siguiente. Si pones un baso de agua afuera de tu casa en
invierno, a que temperature se Vuelve hielo.
11. Si es invierno, se vuelve hielo a los 0 grados.
12. Correcto. Y la ultima, si duermo durante la clase, cuanto me pondrá el
maestro en la materia?
Reading
1. Where are they?

____________________________________________
2. What does the teacher told to his student?
____________________________________________
3. How long does a rock last in arriving to the floor?
____________________________________________
4. What temperature does the water becomes ice?
____________________________________________
283
Conditional type Zero
If Present simple , Present simple

If You heat water , It boils
We use the conditional type zero to:
1. Talk about things that always happen.

If he drinks, he gets drunk.
2. Talk about natural laws.

If you take out a fish from water, it dies.
Note:
a. We can change the order of the sentence by putting the if-clause at the
final.
If you heat water, it boils = Water boils if you boil it
b. We can change in the conditional Zero if for when.

If you take out a fish from water, it dies = when you take out a fish from
water, it dies.
284
Writing
Write a letter for a university where you say why you want to enter and the schools
were you have studied. (150 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What was the most difficul subject for you in the high school? Why? Do you believe
that maths are difficult? Why? Do you believe that is better that students learn to
write in a keyboard to write with a pencil? Why?
American culture
La Received Pronunciation es el acento con la que se dan generalmente las

clases en el Reino Unido, de ahi su nombre literal “pronunciacion recibida”.
Actualmente, esta forma de hablar solo es usada por el 2 por ciento de la
poblacion en el Reino Unido.
285
Fifty eighth lesson
Environment II
1. Good evening everyone and welcome to XIV conference about the

environment. Tonight, we’ll talk about the nature, but first, we’re going to
give a warm welcome to Melanie Mateo, specialist in wild fauna.
2. Thank you, thank you, and thank you for having invited me to give this
conference.
3. As all of you know, in the last 15 years, the poaching has done that the most
of the animal species have reduced, mainly the species which was already
endanger as such the mexican wolf, the koala bear and the white
rhinoceros. If we continue in this way, in five years time, we’ll have lost the
30 percent of their population.
4. This is not the only problem which has made that the populations of the
animals have decreased.
5. The fires produced by the people joined to the illegal logging have
contributed have been other problems which has caused this problem.
6. Each year thousands of trees are cutting down to build houses and furniture
reducing significantly the space that has animals like monkeys, jaguars and
foxes to breed their offspring. If this continues, we’ll have lost more than 50
per cent of the rainforest and forest of our planet.
7. The problem is still stronger in the poles, where the melting of the ice caps
has made that the polar bears have had to approach to the cities on the
lookout for food because there isn’t food in their natural habitats.
8. In short, we must make politics to protect the animals and natural habitants
if we want to have them with us in the future.
286
Quinquagesimaoctava lección
Medio hambiente II
1. Buenos dias a todos, y bienvenidos a la XIV conferencia sobre el medio

ambiente. Esta noche, hablaremos de la naturaleza, pero primero, vamos a
darle una calida bienvenida a Melanie Mateo, especialista in fauna silvestre.
2. Gracias, gracias y gracias por haberme invitado a esta conferencia.
3. Como todos saben, en los ultimos 15 años, la caza ilegal ha hecho que la
mayoria de las especies hayan reducido su numero, principalmente
especies que ya estaban en peligro como el lobo mexicano, los koalas y los
rinocerontes blancos. Si continuamos de esta forma, en cinco años,
habremos perdido el 30 porciento de sus poblaciónes.
4. Esto no es el unico problema que ha hecho que las poblaciónes de los
animales hayan decrecido.
5. Los incendios producidos por las personas unido a la tala ilegal de arboles
han sido otros factores que han causado este problema. Cada año miles de
arboles son tlados para contruir casas y muebles reduciendo
significativamente el espacio que tienen animales como los monos, jaguars
y zorros para criar a sus crias. Si esto continua, habremos perdido más del
50 porciento de las selvas y bosques de nuestro planeta.
6. El problema es aun más fuerte en los polos, donde el derretimiento de las
capas de hielo ha hehco que los osos polares hayan tenido que acercarse a
las ciudades en busca de comida porque no hay en sus habitats naturales.
7. En conclusion, debemos hacer politicas para proteger a los animales y sus
habitat naturales si queremos tenerlos con nosotros en el futuro.
Reading
1. What species have reduced its number?

____________________________________________
2. What other problems have affected the animals?
____________________________________________
3. What animals have been affected for the cutting down of trees?
____________________________________________
4. Why have the polar bears approached dto the cities ?
____________________________________________
287
Conditional type one
, Future simple
If Present simple Going to
Modal verbs
Imperative
If You do not save , You’ll forget where
your newspapers they are
in a specific place You can forget
where they are
Don’t forget where
they are
We use the conditional type one to:
1. Express a real or very probable situation in the past or in the future

If you don’t study, you won’t find a good job.
Note:
a. We can change the order of the sentence by putting the if-clause at

the final.
You won’t find a good job if you don’t study.
b. We can change in the conditional Zero if not for unless.

Unless you study, you won’t find a good job.
288
Writing
Write an article for a magazine where you say your opinion about the poaching and
its effects in the near future. (150 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner: What can we do to reduce the greenhouse gases? Is it a good
idea to use hydraulic energy? Why? Do you believe that the recycling help our
planet? Why? What do you do to help to reduce the trash?
289
Fifty ninth lesson
Lottery
1. Welcome again to another edition of our program “Knowing America” theTV

show most famous about American culture. Today in the studio we have
Brenda.
2. Brenda, how do you feel today?
3. Very excited about being here, John.
4. Brenda, tell us, what would you do if you won the big prize?
5. If I won the big prize, the first I’d do would be to buy a car.
6. And what would you do with a car?
7. Well, If I had a car, I’d go to Australia.
8. But Australia is in the other part of the word!
9. Yes, but if I won the jackpot, I could buy a ship which took me and my car to
Australia.
10. Ok, Martha, to win your car, you need answer correctly these questions.
When was the declaration of independence of the United States signed?
11. 4 July, 1776.
12. Right!
13. Is it true that Texas is the richest State in the Unite States?
14. False!
15. Right!
16. And last question, how many states are there in the United States?
17. 50
18. Correct! Congratulations, Brenda, you win the first prize.
290
Quinquagesima novena lección
Loteria
1. Bienvenidos otra vez a otra edición de nuestro programa “conociendo

Ingalterra”, el programa de llamadas mas Famoso de cultura britanica. Hoy
en el estduio temenos a Martha.
2. Brenda, como te sientes hoy?
3. Muy emocionada de estar aqui, John.
4. Martha, di nos, que harias si ganaras el primer premio?
5. Si ganara el primer premio, lo primeroque haria seria comprar un carro.
6. Y que harias con un carro?
7. Bueno, si tuviera un carro, iría a Australia.
8. Pero Australia está en el otro lado del mundo!
9. Sí, pero si ganara el gran premio, podria comprar un barco que nos llevara
a mi y a mi carro a Australia.
10. Ok, Martha, para ganar tu carro, necesitas contester correctamente
estaspreguntas. Cuando fue firmada la declaracion de los Estados Unidos?
11. El 4 de julio de 1776
12. Correcto.
13. Es cierto que Texas es el estado más rico en los Estados Unidos ?
14. Falso!
15. Correcto!
16. Y la ultima pregunta, cuantosestados hay en Estados Unidos?
17. 50
18. Correcto! Felicitaciones, Martha, ganaste el primer premio.
Reading
1. What would she go if she won?

____________________________________________
2. What does she want a ship for?
____________________________________________
3. Does it rain more in the United States?
____________________________________________
4. Did she asnwear well all the questions?
____________________________________________
291
Conditional type Two
Would
If Past simple , Could
Might
If I had money , I’d buy a house
We can change the order of the sentence by putting the if-clause at the final.
If I had money, I’d buy a house = I’d buy a house if I had money
We can use were instead of was.
If I were/was you, I’d do another thing.
Usage
We use the conditional type two in the same way that in Spanish.
292
Writing
Write an articule for a newnewspaper where you say how you think Mexico would
be if Texas and California continued being of Mexico. (150 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner: If you were president, what would you change in your country?
What would you do if you were famous?, What would you do if you won 1 million
dollars? Would you change anything in your country if you could? What? If there
were more education in your country, would it change something?
293
Sixtith lesson
Pals
1. I’m hungry, Do you haveany pizza, by any chance?

2. Yeah, just look for it in the fridge.
3. There isn’t left. Lend me your bike to go for one.
4. Take it, it’s in the front yard.
5. Do you know what time Anna’s plane gets to the airport?
6. I didn’t know she was going to come.
7. Don’t you get on well with her?
8. Yeah, but I haven’t seen her since we were at uni.
9. Why don’t you call her up, use my cell phone if you want.
10. Later, she must be still on the plane.
11. It’s just kicked off raining, I won’t be able to go for the pizza.
12. Don’t worry, let’s see what’s on the TV. There’s a soap opera, mm, you
know what time the match starts?
13. I believe it kicks off till the forecast finishes.
14. Did you buy the e-book you told me you were going to buy for your sister?
15. Yeah
16. What was it about?
17. It was a book ‘bout IT.
18. I though it was about hi-tech new medical advances.
19. No.
20. It’s drezzling, I’ll risk to go to the pizza store.
21. Take care of not catching a flu.
294
Sexagesima leccion
Amigos
1. Tengo hambre, de casualidad no tendrás pizza?

2. Sí, ve en el refri.
3. Ya no hay. Prestame tu bici para ir por uno.
4. Agarrala, esta en el jardin de enfrente.
5. Sapes a que hora llegaa el avión de Anna al aeropuerto.
6. No sabia que iba a venir.
7. No te llebabas bien con ella?
8. Sí, pero no la he visto desde que estabamos en la universidad.
9. Porque no le llamas, usa mi cellular si quieres.
10. Al rato, dede estar todavia en el avión.
11. Acaba de empezar a llover, no podré ir por el pastel.
12. No te preocupes, vamos a ver la tele. Hay una telenovela, mm, sabes a que
horas empieza el Partido?
13. Creo que empieza hasta que termine el pronostico del tiempo.
14. Compraste el libro electronico que me dijist4e que le ibas a comprar a tu
hermana?
15. Sí
16. De que es?
17. Es un libro de informatica.
18. Pensé que era sobre los avances médicos de alta tecnología.
19. No.
20. Esta chispeando. Me arriesgaré a ir a la pizzeria.
21. Ten cuidado de no resfriate.
295
Shortenings
Formal Shortenings
About ‘bout*
Advertisement Ad
Application App
Briton Brit
Cellular telephone Cell phone
Chevrolet Chevy
Combination Combo
Come on C’ mon
Condominiums Condos
French fries Fries*
Gasoline Gas
Goodbye Bye
Influence Flu
Motor hotel Motel
Of the clock O’clock
Okay Ok
Photography Photo
Preparing Prepping
Popular Pop
Refrigerator Fridge
University Uni
Until Till*
Vegetable(s) Veggies
*With these words, you can also use the forms “about”, “until” and “french fries“
respectibily.
Bicycle Bike
Christmas Xmas (informal y escrito)
Electronic E-
Home Box Office HBO
Dad Dad
Mom Mom
Grandad Grandpa
Grandmom Grandma
Personal computer PC
Puppy Pu
Subburs Burbs
296
Television TV
Veterinary Vet
High technology Hi-tech

Information technology IT
Writing
Reescribe el dialogo usando diferentes formas cortas . (150 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
In partners, make 3.5-minutes length dialog where you use at least 15 acotations.
297
Sixty first lesson
At elementary school
1. Ok, children, today we’re going to see the non-personal forms of the verb.
2. Who can tell me what the non-personal forms of the verb are?
3. The infinitive, the gerund and the participle.
4. Correct!
5. And why are they non-personal?
6. Because they don’t tell us what the subject is.
7. Correct, Ann.
8. Who can tell me three examples of the infinitive?
9. To sing, running and sleep.
10. Very good, Oliver.
11. Who can tell me three examples of gerund?
12. Me, me, teacher. Eating, drinking and chewing.
13. Right, but why all of them are related with the food?
14. Because it’s already the lunch time.
15. You’re right, see you after lunch.
298
Sexagesima primera lección
En la primaria
1. Ok, niños, hoy vamos aver las formas no personales del verbo.
2. Quienuede decirme cuaes son las formas no personales del verbo?
3. El infinitive, el gerundio y el participio.
4. Correcto!
5. Y porque son no personales?
6. Porque no dicen cual es el sujeto.
7. Correcto. Ann.
8. Quien puede decirme tres ejemplos deinfinitivo.
9. Cantar, corer y dormir.
10. Muy bien, Oliver.
11. 4Quien puede decirme tres ejemplos de gerundio?
12. Yo, yo maestro. Comieno, bebiendo y masticando.
13. Correcto, pero porque todos estan relacionados con la comida.
14. ¨Porque ya es la hora del recreo.
15. Tienes razón, nos vemos regresando del recreo.
Reading
1. Where are they?

____________________________________________
2. Why are the infinitive, gerund and participle non-personal forms of the verb?
____________________________________________
3. Did all students answer correcly?
____________________________________________
4. Why doesn’t the class continue?
____________________________________________
299
Infinitive
The infinitive is the form of the verb which expresses an action without indicating
the person and the tense. In English exist three kinds of infinitive (the To Infinitive,
The bare Infinitive and the Ing- infinitive)
To Infinitive
Around 85 percent of the English verbs use the To Infinitive. We use the to
infinitive :
a. With the most of the verbs

I want to go to the park.
b. After the “would like” structure.

I would like to have a cup of coffee.
Bare Infinitive
We just use the bare infinitive with:
a. the modal verbs

I can do it
b. the verbs let and make.
Don’t let me go
Ing infinitive
We use the gerund:
1. When the verb is the subject of the sentence.

Painting is a good activity.
300
Writing
Write a letter for the academic coordinator of your degree where you say to him
what subjecs would be added to the new study plan. (150 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner: Why do you study your major? Do you believe is a good idea to
have a master degree? Why? Do you believe that is better study abroad than in
your country? Why?
301
Sixty second lesson
Points of view
1. This essay discusses the advantages and disadvantagesof living in the city
instead of the country. It considers the time it takes a person to arrive at
their office, the savings that can be made in transportation and the pollution
of the city.
2. Nowadays, there are much people who have to take the bus, the subway or
even the train to arrive at their offices. This trip can make that much people
suffer stress at levels unbelievable, above all, when they are driving their
cars at the rush hour.
So why don’t they leave their ways of life in the city and they decide to go to
the country instead?
Well, perhaps, some people argue that is because in the city you can have a
better quality of life but I don’t agree! You end up having a worse quality of
life because you breathe the polluted air that the fabrics and the cars of the
city produce. Also, you end up paying more because the cost of the
transportation in the city is more expensive because you have to take more
means of transport to go to one place to another one.
3. On the other hand, finding a job is absolutely much easier because the most
of the companies and fabrics are in the big cities. I guess for this reason it is
preferable to live in the city to live in the country, but only if you can avoid
spend more than 2 hours a day in the transport.
4. In conclusion, yes, it is better living in the city than in the country. However,
not enough is being done to improve people which live in the city’s quality of
live and this need to be addressed urgently.
302
Sexagesima segunda lección
Puntos de vista
1. Este ensayo discute las ventajas y desventajas de vivir en la ciudad en

lugar del campo. Considera el tiempo que tarda una persona en llegar a su
oficina, los ahorros que se pueden hacer en transporte y la contaminación
de la ciudad.
2. Hoy en día, hay mucha gente que tiene que tomar el autobús, el metro o
incluso el tren para llegar a sus oficinas. Este viaje puede hacer que
muchas personas sufran estrés a niveles increíbles, sobre todo, cuando
conducen sus coches en la hora punta.
Entonces, ¿por qué no dejan sus formas de vida en la ciudad y deciden ir al
campo en su lugar?
Bueno, tal vez, algunas personas argumentan que es porque en la ciudad
se puede tener una mejor calidad de vida, ¡pero no estoy de acuerdo!
Acabas teniendo una peor calidad de vida porque respiras el aire
contaminado que producen las fábricas y los coches de la ciudad. Además,
terminas pagando más porque el costo del transporte en la ciudad es más
caro porque tienes que tomar más medios de transporte para ir de un lugar
a otro.
3. Por otro lado, encontrar trabajo es absolutamente mucho más fácil porque
la mayoría de las empresas y fábricas están en las grandes ciudades.
Supongo que por esta razón es preferible vivir en la ciudad quee vivir en el
campo, pero solo si se puede evitar pasar más de 2 horas al día en el
transporte.
4. En conclusión, sí, es mejor vivir en la ciudad que en el campo. Sin
embargo, no se está haciendo lo suficiente para mejorar la calidad de vida
de las personas que viven en la ciudad y esta necesidad debe abordarse
con urgencia.
Reading
1. Why are the peoplke stressed?

____________________________________________
2. Why don’t the people want to go to the country?
____________________________________________
3. What are the advantages of living in the city?
____________________________________________
4. Why is better living in the city?
____________________________________________
303
2. After prepositions
I use the knife for cutting the meat
3. After the expressions can’t stand and can’t help

I can’t help laughing at it
4. With just the verbs admit, appreciate, avoid, bother, consider, continue,
delay, deny, dislike, enjoy, finish, go (when we refer to activities), hate,
imagine, involve, keep, like, love, mind, miss, postpone, practise, prevent,
quit, resent, risk, save, spend, suggest and stop.
I can’t imagine being with you
5. After the phrases “it’s no use, it’s worth, it’s no good, be busy, what’s the
use of, have difficulty (in)”.
Gerund
To infinitive Gerund
Drink Drinking
Arrive Arriving
Die Dying
The gerund is a verb form that is used:
1. to indicate that an action is in progress

I am drinking
Notice: gerunds can be used as adjectives.
Feeling bad, the man looked for some help.
304
Writing
Write an essay where you talk about the use of motorcycles in your city. (150
words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Does your city have problems of traffic? Why? Do you believe that in your city is
secure to drive? Why? Do you believe that there must be more sanctions to the
people who do not respet the traffic regulations? Why? Do you believe that is a
good idea that there is more bus lines in your city? Why?
305
Sixty third Lesson
At Jr. High School
1. Ok, let’s continue, who can tell me how many participles do we have in
English?
2. Two, teacher.
3. What are they?
4. Past participle and present participle.
5. Right!
6. Who can tell me two examples of past participle?
7. Me, me
8. Gabriel
9. Cleaned, died and cancelled.
10. Very good, and of present participle?
11. Loving, dying, frying.
12. Correct!
13. When do we use the past participle?
14. Me, me, teacher.
15. Steve
16. With the perfect tense.
17. Correct, Steve
18. I have a question.
19. Tell me, Bill.
20. What are the perfect tense?
21. Don’t worry Bill, we’re seeing them next week, now have a nice weekend.
306
Sexagesima tercera lección
En la secundaria
1. Ok, vamos a continuar, quien puede decirme cuantos participios tiene el

inglés?
2. Dos, maestro.
3. Cuales son?
4. Participio pasado y participio presente.
5. Correcto!
6. Quien puede decirme dos ejemplos de participio pasado?
7. Yo, yo
8. Tom.
9. Limpiado, muerto y cancelado.
10. Muy bien, y de participio presente?
11. Amado, muriendo, friend.
12. Correct!
13. Cuando usamos el participio pasado?
14. Yo, yo, maestro.
15. Steve.
16. Con los tiempos perfectos.
17. Correcto, Steve!
18. Tengo una pregunta.
19. Dime, Gabriel.
20. Caules son los tiempos perfectos?
21. No te preocupoes por eso, los veremos la siguiente semana, que tengan un
buen fin de semana.
Reading
1. Where are they?

____________________________________________
2. What did the teacher answer them?
____________________________________________
3. Did all the students answer right?
____________________________________________
4. Whay did not the teacher answer his question?
____________________________________________
307
Past Participle
Infinitive Past participle

General rule Work Worked
Ending in -e Like Liked
Ending in -l Cancel Cancelled
Consontant vowel Drop Dropped
consonant
Consonant + y Fry Fried
Irregular past participle
Been Sido/estado Told Dicho

Done Hecho Drunk Bebido
Taken Tomado Slept Dormido
Seen Visto Read Leido
Had Tenido Got Obtenido
Gone Ido Found Encontrado
Made Hecho Felt Sentido
Bought Comprado Put Puesto
Written Escrito Spoken Hablado
Thought Pensado Begun Inicidado
Come Venido Broken Roto
Said Dicho Brought Traido
Known Conocido Been able to Podido
Eaten Comido Run Corrido
Given Dado Woken up Levando
308
Writing
Write an article for a linguistics magazine where you say what are the most
common errors that the people of your city make when they speak. (150 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Is knowing the grammar of your mom tongue important when you want to learn a
forenger lenguague? Why? Is important to kwong the grammar terminology for a
person who studies by himself? Why? Is it important to preservate the native
lenguagues of your country? Why?
309
Eleventh
Unit
The world
310
 To talk about the places you have visited

 To talk about your work experience
 to talk about what you want to do before dying
 to use the correct form of the past tenses
Topics:
 Present perfect
 Already, yet, ever, never, since, for
 Past perfect
 Demonstrative 2
 Future perfect
 As/like /Had better/would rather
 So, both, neither … nor, either … or, all, none
311
Sixty forth lesson
A job interview
1. Bill has been looking for a job for some months but he hasn’t found one.
One day he receives a call.
2. Hello, could I speak to Bill Gupta?
3. This is Bill Gupta speaking. Who is this?
4. My name’s James Mathew, I’m human resources manager at Travel &
linguas. I’d like you to come to an interview with our company.
5. When would you like to come?
6. As soon as possible.
The next day Bill goes to the interview
7. So, tell me, have you ever worked in the tourism sector?
8. Of course, in fact, I’ve been responsible of several resorts in Playa del
Carmen.
9. Have you ever worked as touristic guide?
10. Yes, I worked almost 6 years in a tourism company which made tours in the
Rivera Maya, also, once I worked as underwater guide in Ensenada taking
the tourists to see the sharks.
11. And what happened?
12. They were going to pay me 500 dollars for a five people packet and at the
end, they only paid me 200.
13. Well, I believe we’ve heard everything what we need. And don’t call us, we’ll
call you.
312
Sexagesima cuarta lección
Una entrevista de trabajo
1. John ha estado buscando trabajo por meses pero no ha encontrado.

2. Un dia receive una llamada.
3. Bueno, me comunica con Bill Smith?
4. Soy Bill Smith, qui es?
5. Me llamo James Mathew, soy eel encargado de recursos humanos de
Travel & linguas.
6. Me gustaria que viniera a una entrevista a nuestra empresa.
7. Cuando le gustaria venir?
8. Tan pronto como sea possible.
Al siguiente dia Bill va a una entrevista
9. Entonces, dime, ha trabajdo en el sector turistico?

10. Por supuesto, de hecho, he sido responsible de varios resorts en Playa del
Carmen.
11. Ha trabajado como guia turistico?
12. Sí, trabaje 6 años en una empresa turistica que hacia tours en la Riviera
maya, también, una vez trabaje como guia subacuatico en Ensenada
llevando a los turistas a ver los tiburones.
13. Y que paso?
14. Me iban a pagar 500 libras por un paqete de 5 personas y al final solo me
pagaron 200.
15. Bueno, creo que hemos escuchado todo lo que necesitabamos. Y no nos
llame,nosotros le llamaremos.
313
Present Perfect
Personal pronoun Have/has Past participle

I Have
You Have
He
She Has Eaten
It
We
You have
They
We make the negative form of the present perfect with have not/ haven’t
I have not/haven’t seen the movie
We make the interrogative form by inverted the have/has.
Have you been to Cancun?
Usage
We use the present perfect in the same way tan in Spanish, but there are some
cases that change. These cases are:
1. Past actions when we specified the exactly time.

I have gone to see the Doctor (when we do not know)
2. Things or situations that we can still do.

I have not gone to school (Maybe I can tak still one class)
3. When we talk about actions which passed in the past but whose result is still
visible in the present.
I have broken my arm (I fell in the past and broke my arm, my arm
continuous broken)
314
Writing
Escribe una carta a una empresa donde te gustaria trabajar donde digas tu
experiencia laboral. (150 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
How’s your ideal job?
Where would you like to work?
Where have you worked?
Do you prefer a part-time or full time job?
Do you prefer working in the morning or at night?
315
Sixty fifth lesson
Holiday III
1. Lenny, you’ve already been to England, haven’t you?

2. No, I’ve never been to that such as boring place.
3. Lenny!
4. I’m sorry, but I didn’t like to go to England, everything is close, you have to
always carry an umbrella with you and talking about cricket is not for me.
5. So, where would you like to go?
6. I’d like to go to Yucatan.
7. Why?
8. Because I’ve always liked the tropical whether, last year, for example, I went
to Brazil and I liked it a lot.
9. This year Ann and me are going there, what recommendations would you
give to us?
10. You definitely must take a pair of sunglasses and sun cream.
11. Should we take a cool box?
12. Yeah, because it’s boiling.
13. If you want to walk in the rainforest, I recommend you should take an insect
repellent and a compass case you get lost.
14. Is it all?
15. Yeah, the Amazon has plenty of dangerous animals, so I recommend you
take with you binoculars to see them from far.
16. Thanks for your recommendations Lenny.
17. You’re welcome, oh, and say hello to the cannibals for me.
316
Sexagesima quinta lección
Vacaciones III
1. Lenny, tú ya has estado en Inglaterra, no?

2. No, nunca he estado en tan aburrido lugar.
3. Lenny!
4. Lo siento, pero no me gusto ir a Inglaterra, todo está cerrado, siempre
tienes que cargar un paraguas y hablar de criket no es para mí.
5. Entonces, a donde te gustaria ir?
6. Me gustaria ir a Yucatan.
7. Porque?
8. Porque siempre me ha gustado el clima tropical, el año pasado, por
ejemplo, fui a Brasil y me gusto mucho.
9. Este año Ann y yo vamos a ir alla, que recomendaciones nos darias?
10. Deben llevar unos lentes de sol y creama solar.
11. Debemos llevar una hielera?
12. Si´, porque hace mucho calor.
13. Si quieres caminar en la selva, les recomiendo que lleven repelente de
insectos y un compass en caso de que se pierdan.
14. Es todo?
15. Sí, el amazonas tiene muchos animales peligrosos, entonces les
recomiendo que lleven binoculars para verlos desde lejos.
16. Gracias por tus recomendaciones Lenny.
17. De nada, y saludenme a los canibales.
317
Already, never, ever and others words used with the present perfect.
Already (ya) In affirmative I’ve aready finished

sentences
Yet (ya, todavía, In negative and I haven’t taken a shower yet
aun) interrogative
sentences
Never (nunca) I’ve never been in Acapulco
Have/ has Just I’ve cleaned it
(acabar de)
So far Interrogative What have you done so far?
(hasta sentences
ahora/ahorita)
Since (desde) When we give the I’ve lived here sine 2000
exacly moment
that it started
For (por) When we say the I’ve worked for 17 years
exacly, days,
months, years, etc.
318
Writing
Escribe una carta a un amigo donde le digas cuales han sido las mejores
vacaciones que has tenido dandole detalles (alojamiento, actividades que
realizaste, comida, etc. (150 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
What has been the best place that you have visited? how long where you there?
What did you do there?
Where did you stay?
How was the wheater?
Would you recommend that place?
319
Sixty sixth lesson
Memories III
1. Grandpa, tell us again the story about how you met the grandma.
2. Ha, ha. It was a funny story that started 40 years ago.
3. I’d just been 24 and I wanted to know another place because I’d already
known the highways and byways of United States, so I made some
applications to study abroad. In that time, there were scholarships to study
in Brazil and as I’d studied brazilian at high school I sent my solicitation and
in two shakes of a lamb’s tail, I was walking through the streets of Rio.
4. One day, while I was at Ipanema neighborhood, I came across by any
chance my high school friend, Haide. I hadn’t seen her since I came back to
United States.
5. We were talking about what we’d done in those years. She told me that
she’d travelled along the world trying out all kind of meal and getting to know
new people. When I asked her why she’d gone to Rio she said to me that
she had done it because she was following her “love”. I smiled about
knowing that my old friend continued being as I remembered her.
6. As it was already late, I she had classes, I offered to go with her to her uni.
She accepted and we went to her uni.
7. Grandpa, go to the important thing.
8. Right, I met your grandma because of a jelly.
9. A jelly?
10. Yeah, a jelly that her grandma had given to me so that I kept it while she
was in her classroom because her professor didn’t let come in to the
classroom with food and that I’d already eaten before she came in her
classroom.
320
Sexagesima sexta lección
Memorias III
1. Abuelo, cuentanos otra vez la historia de como conociste a la abuela.

2. Ja, ja. Es una historia divertida que comenzó hace 40 años.
3. Acababa de cumplir 24 y queria conocer otro lugar porque ya habia
conocido todos los rincones de Inglaterra, entonces hice una solicitud para
estudiar en el extranjero. En ese tiempo, habian becas para estudiar en
Brasil y como habai estudiado brasileño en la escuela, envié mi solicitud y
en menos de lo que canta un gallo estaba caminando en las calles de Rio.
4. Uun dia, mientras estaba en la colonia Ipanema, me encontre de casualid a
mi amiga de la preparatoria, Haide. No la habia visto desde que regrese a
Inglaterra.
5. Estuvimos hablando de lo que habiamos hecho en esos años. Me dijó que
habia viajado a lo largo del mundo probando todo tipo de comida y
conociendo nuevas personas. Cuando le pregunte porque habia idio a Rio,
me dijo que lo habia hecho porque estaba siguiendo a su “love”. Sonrei al
saber que mi vieja amiga continuaba siendo como la recordaba.
6. Como era tarde y ella tenia clases, me ofreci a acampañarla a la
Universidad donde ella estudiaba.
7. Ella aceptó y fuimos a su salón.
8. Abuelo ve a lo importante.
9. Correcto, conoci a su abuela por una gelatina.
10. Una gelatina?
11. Sí, una gelatina que su mamá me habia dado para que la cuidadá porque
su professor no dejaba entrar con comida al salón y que yo ya me habia
comido antes de que entrara a su salón
321
Past perfect
Personal pronoun Have in the past simple Past participle

I
You
He
She had Eaten
It
We
You
They
We make the negative form of the past perfect with had not/ hadn’t
I had seen the movie
I had not/hadn’t seen the movie
We make the interrogative form by inverted had.
Had you been to Cancun?
Usage
A difference of the Spanish, we use the past perfect always that we talk about an
action that happened before another action in the past
I sold the car that I had bought in 1993.
Not I sold the car that I bought in 1993.
We can use the past perfect and the past simple with “before” and “after” without
change in the meaning.
I had eaten a cake before you arrived = I ate a cake before you arrived.
In all the other cases, we use the past perfect in the same way that in Spanish.
322
Writing
Dejando solo los numeros 1 y 2. Reescribe el texto anterior cambiando la historia.

(150 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
What had you done before being 20 years?
Had you participated in any competition?
Had you been abroad?
What places of your country had you visited?
Where had you learned English?
323
Eighty forth lesson
Younghters
1. It was a normal day, my friend Miguel, my friend Carlos, my friend Jenny

and I were laying down in Jenny’s father’s sofa.
2. That day, we had met in Jenny’s house to make an exposition for the latin
teacher. As none of us wanted to do something, we decided to go for a
beer.
3. We joined the money that we had and took Carlos’ mother’s car.
4. On the way, I asked Jenny:
5. -Did you bring the money?
6. -No, I forgot it.
7. -Where did you let it?
8. -On the table of the kitchen.
9. -So, what are we gonna do now?
10. -Does any of You have money?
11. -I have 100 dollars, but I have ‘em in my place.
12. -So, what we do?
13. –I don’t know, why don’ we go to the place of Gloria? They’re having a
party.
14. -Yeah, and we can take some beer.
15. –Ok, so, let’s go.
16. We took the train and we went to Gloria’s house. While I was on the train, I
felt nervous, I had not seen her since we broke up.
17. When wearrived at there, we saw Brayan at the door. He was seeing that
there was not any gate crasher.
18. We greeted him and he let us come in. When I was entering in he told me:
19. -What are you doing here? I told you I din’t want you here again.
20. –I’m just trying to have a good time.
21. -If my sist tells me you do something to her, I’ll kill you.
22. -Ok
23. Once we had entered, we sat down, they gave us a table beside the tanks
of the gas and they gave us some beers but I didn’t want to drink, in my
mind there was just space for Gloria who was dancing majesticly in the
middle of the corridor used like party hall.
24. Later, I came across Lupe, who offered me to go to one of the rooms which
were there to “warm up”, but I said no, that night was reservated for Gloria.
Also, I could not forget that because of Lupe and her kisses, Gloria and I
had broken up.
25. The voice of the DJ was listened, “And here you are her”
324
26. I retourned to my table.
Octogesima octava lección

Jovenes
1. Era un dia normal, mi amigo Miguel, mi amigo Carlos, mi amiga Jenny y yo
estabamos acostados en el sillón del papa de Jenny.
2. Ese dia, nos habiamos visto en la casa de Jenny para hace una exposición
para el maestro de latin. Como nadie queria hacer nada, decidimos ir por
una cerveza.
3. Juntamos el dinero que teniamos y tomamos el carro de la mamá de
Carlos.
4. En el camino, le pregunté a Jenny:
5. -Traes el dinero?
6. -No, se me olvido.
7. -Donde lo dejaste?
8. -En la mesa de la cocina.
9. Entonces, que vamos a hacer?
10. Alguien tiene dinero?
11. Yo tengo 100 libras, pero los tengo en mi canton.
12. -Entonces, que hacemos?
13. -No se, porque no vamos al canton de Gloria. Están haciendole una fiesta.
14. Sí, y podemos tomar unas cervezas.
15. -Ok, entonces, vamonos.
16. Tomamos tren que va a la casa de Gloria. Mientras estaba en el tren, me
senti nervioso, no la habia visto desde que terminamos.
17. Cuando llegamos, vimos a Brayan en la Puerta. Estaba viendo que no
hubieran colados.
18. Lo saludamos y nos dejó entrar. Cuando estaba entrando me dijó:
19. -Que estás hacienda aqui? Te dije que no te queria ver aqui otra vez.
20. –Solo estoy tratando de pasar un buen rato.
21. -Si mi hermana me dice que le haces algo, te mato.
22. -Ok
23. Una vez que entramos, nos sentamos, nos dieron una mesa junto a los
tanques de gas y nos dieron unas cervezas pero no quise beber, en mi
mente solo habia espacio para Gloria que estaba bailando
majestuosamente en medio del corridor usado como salon de fiestas.
24. Más tarde, me encontré a Lupe, quien me ofrecio ir a uno de los cuartos
que estaban ahí para “calentarnos”, pero le dijé que no, esa noche estaba
reservada para Gloria. También, no podia olvidar que por causa de Lupe y
sus besos, Gloria y yo habiamos terminado.
25. La voz del DJ se escucho, “y aqui está ella”
325
26. Regrese a la mesa.
Some words which are used in songs and Slang
Vocabulary
Some words used in songs Informal

Blue Sad
Cause’ Because
Gonna Going to
Gotta Have (got) to
Wanna Want to/want a
326
Writing
Manteniendo hasta el numero 9 de la lección anterior, escribe un final para la

historia. Usa por lo menos 10 palabras vulgares. (150 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
What slang words had you known yet?
Why do you think that is important learning slang?
Where do you think that you’ll fine the slang?
What slang words are there in your mom tonge and what do they mean?
Is there a world in english that has the same register and meaning?
327
Sixty nineth lesson
On the airplane
1. What’s wrong, darling?

2. Nothing, it’s just I feel scared about hurricanes.
3. Don’t worry, love, by the time we get there, the hurricane season will have
already finished.
4. You’re right, but what if there’s an earthquake.
5. Don’t worry love, there aren’t earthquakes in Hawaii.
6. But I’ve heard there has been a Tsunami recently.
7. Darling, it was in Asia, and it was a typhon. You shouldn't worry about it.
8. I believe you’re right, I shouldn’t worry about anything.
9. Yeah, the only thing you should worry about is the volcanic eruption that the
speaker told us that there would be when you were slept.
On the news
10. Good evening everyone, this is James Harrison, and these are today’s
news.
11. This morning a driver didn’t respect a red light causing a crash in Palmer
Avenue.
12. Taking about crashes, in Russia, 300 people were killed after their airplane
suffered engine failure.
13. In the Unite Kingdom, there was a shoot-out in a storeping center in
Glascow, the shooter was arrested and interrogated by the police.
14. This is all for today, good night.
328
Sexagesima novena lección
En el avión
1. Que pasa querida?

2. Nothing, solo que estoy asustada por los huracanes.
3. No te preocupes, amor, para cuando lleguemos alla, la temporada de
huracanes ya habrá terinado.
4. Tienes razón, pero y si hay un terremoto.
5. No te preocupes, amor, no hay terremotos en Hawaii.
6. Pero escuche que ha habido un Tsunami recientemente.
7. Querida, eso fue en Asia, y fue un tifon. No te preocupes por eso.
8. Creo que tienes razón. No deberia preocuparme por nada.
9. Sí, la unica cosa de la que te debia preocupar es la erupción volcanica que
el speaker nos dijo que habría miesntras estabas dormida.
En las noticias
10. Buenas noches a todos, mi nombre es James Harrison, y estas son las
noticias de hoy.
11. Esta mañana un conductor se paso un alto en la Avenida Palmer causando
un choque.
12. Hablando de choques, en Rusia, 300 personas murieron despúes de que el
avion donde viajaban tuviera una falla en el motor.
13. En el Reino Unido, hubo un tiroteo en un centro commercial en Florida, el
tiraddor fue arrestado e interrogado por la policia.
14. Eso es todo por hoy, buenas noches.
329
Future Perfect
I Called
You Thought
He Come
She Will have Aten
It Gone
We Slept
You Studied
They Bought
Usage
We use always the future perfect to talk about a future action that will happen
before other future action.
I’ll have finished the homework before Monday.
330
Writing
Escribe una carta a un amigo donde le digas que piensas que habrás hecho antes
de cumplir 30 años. (150 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
What have you done before being 30?
What will you have done before dying?
What countries will you have visited by 2040?
What will you have done by next week?
What things will you have done by tonight?
331
Sixty eighth lesson
Employment
1. There are several occupations in the United States.

2. You can be a doctor, a lawyer or an engineer.
3. But all this depend on where you want to work. For example, if you want to
work in the health sector, you can work as nurse, psychologist, dentist or as
ambulance driver!
4. If you want to work in an office but you don’t want to work in a traditional
way, the works of graphic designer or architect would be good for you.
5. Some works such as accountant and economist require university
instruction, but other ones such as technician or flight attendant don’t need.
6. If you don’t want to work in an office, you can be a mason, carpenter or
even a firefighter.
7. You can work part-time or full time, in the private sector or in the public
sector, earning from the minimum wage until almost the President’s salary,
but remember, no matter where you want to work, don’t forget these simple
tips when you go to an interview:
8. Be early to your interview, better safe than sorry.
9. Review the contact details of your resumé.
10. Send a letter to interviewer saying how much you’re interested in the job.
11. If after following these simple tips, you don’t find a job, don’t worry, you can
always join to the thousands of unemployed that there are in the United
States.
332
Sexagesima octaava lección
Empleo
1. Hay muchas ocupaciones en el Reino Unido.

2. Puedes ser doctor, abogado o ingeniero.
3. Pero todo depende de donde quieras trabajar. Por ejemplo, sit u quieres
trabajar en el sector salud, puedes trabajar como enfermera, psicologo,
dentista o como conductor de ambulancia!
4. Si tu quieres trabajar en una oficina pero no quieres trabajar dde una
manera tradicional, el trabjaao de diseñador grafico o arquitecto puede ser
Bueno para tí.
5. Alguos trabajos como el de Contador o economista requieren formación
universitaria, pero otros como el de tecnico o economista no.
6. Si no quieres trabajar en una oficina, puedes ser albañil, carpintero o
bomber.
7. Puedes trabajar medio tiempo o tiempo complete, en el sector privado o en
el sector barlico, ganando desde el salario minimo hasta casi el salario del
primer Ministro, pero recuerda, no importa donde quieras trabajar, no
olvides estos simples consejos cuando vayas a una entrevista:
8. Lleguen temprano a la entrevista, major prevenir que lamenter.
9. Revisa tus datos de contacto en tu curriculum.
10. Envia una carta al entrevistador diciendo cuando te interesa el trabajo.
11. Si despúes de seguir estos simples consejos, no encuentras trabajo, no te
preocupes, siempre puees unirte aa los miles de desempelados que hay en
el Reino Unido.
333
As and like
We use As:
a. When we talk about an occupation

He works as teacher in a school
b. When we talk about what we use something.

I use my sofa as a bed.
We use like to express that something looks something.
You look like a bear with that disguise.
Prefer, would rather, would prefer
We use “prefer + verb in ing + to + verb in ing ” to say (prefiero x que y)
I prefer walking to staying home (prefiero caminar que quedarme en la casa)
We also use “prefer + to infinitive + rather than + bare infinitive” with the same
meaning
I prefer to walk rather than stay home (prefiero caminar que quedarme en la casa)
We use prefer + noun + to + noun to say (prefiero x que y)
I prefer tea to coffee (prefiero te que cafe)
We use “would prefer + to infinitive + rather than + bare infinitive” or “would rather
+ bare infinitive + than + bare infinitive to say “preferiria x que y”
I’d prefer to eat meat rather eat chicken/ I’d rather eat meat than eat chicken.
334
Writing
Escribe un articulo donde hables de la situación laboral en tu país. (150 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
What do you do and why did you decide to be it?
What are the most studied mayors in your country?
What are the most dangerous jobs in your country?
What befefits the companies in your country give to the employees?
What another profession would you like to have? Why?
335
Sixty eighth lesson
Resumés
Arizona State University February 28, 2022

Foreng lenguague department
Phoenix
Dear Sir or Madam,

1. I am writing in response to your recent advertisement for spanish professor.
2. After graduating on foreign lenguagues from the Nacional Autonomus
University of México two years ago, I worked as spanish, english, french
and italian teacher at Superteacher where I could positionate as the best
lenguagues teacher in Los Angeles having until 10 new clients per week
and having in consecuence an incoming up 2600 dollars per month. Then, I
worked as freelance helping schools giving asesories and developping
study plans for them.
I also have developed study material to make easier student’s learning.
3. I am a methodic person, focused in results and compromised with the
education and the learning process. Despite being a person to whom likes
to work by himself, I get on well with people and I have exellent teamwork
skills.
Therefore, I consider myself a good element for you and your institution.
4. Thank you for your time,
Yours sincerely, .
Miguel Martinez
5. P.S.: I enclosed a copy of my resumé.
336
Sexagesima octava
Resume
Universidad del Estado de Arizona 28 de Febrero de 2022

Departamento de lenguas extranjeras
Phoenex
A quien corresponda,
1. Escribo eesta carta con motivo de su reciente anuncio de profesor de
español.
2. Después de graduarme en enseñanza de lenguas extranjeras de la
Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México hace dos años, trabajé como
profesor de español, inglés, francés e italiano en Supertecher donde
pude posicionarme como una de los mejores profesores de lenguas en
Los Ángeles teniendo hasta diez nuevos clientes por mes. Luego trabaje
como trabajador independiente ayudando a escuelas dando asesorías y
desarrollando planes de estudios para ellos.
3. Tambien material didáctico para hacer el aprendizaje de los alumnos
más facil.
4. Soy una persona metódica, encofada a resultados y comprometida con
la enseñanza y el proceso de aprendizaje. A pesar de ser una persona a
la cual le gusta trabajar independiente, me llevo bien con la gente y
tengo exelentes habilidades de trabajo en equipo.
5. Por tanto, me cosidero un buen elemnto palra su institución.
6. Gracias por su tiempo.
7. Sinceramente suyo,
8. Miguel Martinez
9. Post data: Le anexo una copia de mi curriculum
337
Neither, either, both
Neither ___ nor Ni __ ni Neither Jason nor Paula live here

Both ___ and Tanto ___ como Both Kim and Mike work at Jazzylinguas
Either ___or O ___ o Either the cat or the dog must have eaten it
Auxuiliar + not Ni ___ ni I din’t see either Rob or Paula at the party
___ either
Exclamations
We use What a/an with singular nouns.
What a story!
We use What with uncountable or singular nouns.
What an interesting history!
We use How with sentences.
How intelligent you are.
338
Writing
Escribe una carta como la que aparece en la lección anterior. (150 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Where did you study? Do you have a university degree, master degree or
doctorate?
Where have you worked and how many years of experience do you have?
What skills do you have?
What can you tell me about yourself?
What are your plans for the future?
339
Eleventh Unit
Lifestye
340
 To speak about different topics
Topics:
 Present perfect continuous

 Order of the adjectives
 Past Continuous
 Plural of the compound nouns/ collective nous
 Future perfect continuous
 All, whole, every
 Past simple, used to and would
Listening tips
From this point, it is necessary that you listen B2 english recordings. You can buy
them in lenguagues libraries or on internet. Be sure they are for the level B2 and
From this point is a good idea that you study the idioms list that is in the appendix
of this book.
For improve your reading, it is good idea you spend time only reading the lessons
of this book. If you want, you can buy a B2 literature book.
Warning
In some words we have put an apostrophe instead an “h” to indicate that the “h” is
not prononciated. This is common in the north of Britain.
341
Seventy first lesson
A new home
1. Why are you so mad, David?

2. I’ve been looking for a new room all the morning but I haven’t found one.
3. Why aren’t you after in “Houses on sale”?
4. No, I’m sick and tired. Mm, It’s very cold.
5. Yeah, It's been freezing all the week. Why don’t you turn on the heating?
6. It broke down last week and the technician hasn’t come to repair it.
7. What a shame! Why don’t we watch a movie?
8. You’re right, I’ve been working very hard these days.
9. Why don’t you take a sabbatical year?
10. Don’t be daft, you know the difficult that is to find a well-paid job in this city.
11. Too right I would, why don’t you look for a job in another city? Maybe
Chicago?
12. No, I’ve already known the highways and byways of United States. I believe
I’ll go abroad.
13. That’s a good idea, where would you like to go?
14. I don’t know, I’ve felt like going to Spain.
15. Why Spain?
16. I speak Catalan and they sell a lot of delicious food.
17. Your bread and butter.
18. It’s already decided, I’ll go to Cataluña as soon as the motorway defrosts.
342
Septuagesima primera lección
Un nuevo hogar
1. Porque estas tan enojado, David?

2. He estado buscando un nuevo cuarto toda la mañana pero no he
encontrado uno.
3. Porque no buscas en “Houses on sale”?
4. No, estoy harto. Mm, hace mucho frio.
5. Sí, ha estado hacienda mucho frio toda la semana. Porque no prendes la
calefaccion?
6. Se descompuso la semana pasada y el tecnico no ha venido.
7. Que pena! Porque no vemos una pelicula?
8. Tienes razón. He estado trabajando muy duro estos dias.
9. Porque no te tomas un año sabatico?
10. No digas incoherencies. Sabes lo dificil que es encontrar un trabajo bien
pagado en esta ciudad
11. Cierto, porque no buscas trabajo en otra ciudad? Tal vez, Texas.
12. No, ya conocsco todos los rincones de Inglaterra. Creo que iré a otro país.
13. Es una Buena idea, a donde te gustaria ir?
14. No sé, desde hace un buen, he tenido ganas de ir a España.
15. Porque España?
16. Hablo catalán y venden mucha comida deliciosa.
17. Tu mero mole.
18. Está decidido, iré a cataluña tan pronto como la carretera se descongele.
343
Present perfect continuous
Personal pronoun Verb have Been Gerund

I Have
You Have
He/she/it Has Been Playing
We Have
You Have
They Have
We use the present perfect in the same ways that in Spanish.
Present perfect or present perfect continuous
We use the present perfect to indicate an action which started in the past and
continue in the present without being interrupted.
It has rained all the week On Monday rained, not Tuesday, but
Wednesday and Thursday yes, but
Friday and Saturday not and today it
could be possible.
It has been raining all the week Every day it rained
American culture
En este dialogo podemos encontrar por primera vez en este libro un acento
regional, en este caso el acento de una persona de New York. Como se puede
observer, este acento omite la h inicial. Otras caracteristicas que tiene este acento
las iremos aprendiendo en las lecciones donde aparesca este acento. Por el
momento observa como right sustituye a very en la frase “It’s right cold”
344
Writing
Imagina que no has visto a un amigo en mucho tiempo. Escribele una carta donde
le digas que has estado haciendo en este tiempo, que cosas han pasado y que
cosas quieres hacer (200 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
How long have you been working?, How long have you been learning English?,
What are your hobbies? How long have you been practiced them?, How long have
you been with your couple?
345
Seventy second lesson
At clothing store
1. What do you think, Cathy?

2. I believe that long, new, Portuguese, silk scarf fits with your red, woollen,
hand-made sweater, but I think you should buy gloves.
3. Yeah, they’ll be good with my outfit.
4. What do you think of these ones?
5. They’re good hot, italian gloves, but they aren’t made of fabric.
6. Well, I already have the scarf and the sweater, what else do I buy?
7. How about a pair of boots?
8. There are good ones in the footwear section.
9. What do you think of these boots?
10. Mm, they’re too tight.
11. Ok, so try on these ones.
12. They look well and they are made of leather. I’ll buy them.
In another part of the store
13. Good morning, madame, how can I help you?

14. Could you show me these gold earrings?
15. Of course!
16. They’re very beautiful.
17. We also have excellent, Mexican, silver rings in sales.
18. No, could you show me that necklace?
19. It’s gorgeous.
20. It has a 30 per cent discount.
21. Ok, I’ll take it.
346
Septuagesima segunda lección
En la tienda de ropa
1. Que piesnas, Ann?

2. Creo que esa nueva larga bufanda de seda portuguesa encaja con tu suiter
de lana hecho a mano, pero pienso que deberias comprar guantes.
3. Sí, estarán bien con mi outfit.
4. Que piensas de estos?
5. Son guantes calientes italianos, pero no son de tela.
6. Bueno, ya temenos la bufanda y el suiter, que más compro?
7. Que te parece un par de botas?
8. Hay unas buenas en la sección de calzado.
9. Que piensas de estas botas?
10. Se ven bien y están hechas de cuero. Las compraré.
En otra parte de la tienda
11. Buenos dias, señora, como puedo ayudarte?

12. Puede mostrarme estos aretes de oro?
13. ¡Por supuesto!
14. Son muy hermosos.
15. También temenos exelentes anillos mexicanos de plata en rebaja.
16. No, puede mostrarme ese collar?
17. Es precioso.
18. Tiene un 30 por ciento de descuento.
19. Ok, me lo llevó
347
Order of the adjectives
Position (from left Kind of adjective Example

to right)
1 Opinion Lovely, beautiful
2 Size Big, small, tall
3 Physical quality Thin, rough
4 Shape Round, square, rectangular
5 Age Young, old
6 Color Blue, red, pink
7 Origin Japanese, turkish
8 Material Metal, gold, plastic
9 Type (con guion) General-porpouse, four-sided,
U-shaped
10 Purpose (para/de) Cleaning, clothing, cooking
She beautiful tall thin young white Scottish woman

was a
1 2 3 5 6 7
The adjectives always go on the left of the noun.
348
Writing
Escribe un articulo donde digas porque es importante la ropa tradicional de tu país

y porque es importante mantener esta ropa.
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
What do you like to wear? (used at leat 4 adjectives per answear)
What’s the traditional clothes in your country?
Discuss, do yu believe that the clothes will be in the same way in the future?
349
Seventy third lesson
Emergency room
1. What do we have?
2. 55-years-old man with a strong paid in the chest, it looks to be a heart
attack.
3. Does anyone come with him?
4. Yes, the ambulance brought him and his wife.
5. What else do we have?
6. A boy fractured his arm while he rode his bicycle. We’ve already injected
him morphine and we made him X-ray.
7. Is it all?
8. No, a 32-years-old man cut his hand and was bleeding for 5 minutes, is he
stable?
9. Yes, but he lost much blood.
10. Ok, keep an eye on him.
In another room
11. Hi, Ted.

12. Hi, Simon.
13. How are you?
14. I’m better, thanks.
15. What happened?
16. I’ve broken my leg.
17. How was it possible?
18. Last night, when I was coming back to my house, I crashed into a truck.
19. How couldn’t you see it?
20. Well, I’d been working all the night because I had to hand over a report and I
felt tired. And I’d been drinking a bottle of Tequila that I found in my desk
too.
350
Septuagesima tercera lección
Sala de emergencia
1. Que temenos?
2. Hombre de 55 años con un fuerte dolore n el pecho, parece que es un
infarto.
3. Alguien viene con él?
4. Sí, la ambulancia lo trajo a él y a su esposa.
5. Qué mas temenos?
6. Un niño se fracturo su brazo mientras andava en su biblicleta. Ya le
inyectamos morfina y le hicimos unos rayos X.
7. Es todo?
8. No, un hombre de 32 años se cortó l mano y estuvo sangrando 5 minutos.
Está estable?
9. Sí, pero perdio mucha sangre.
10. Ok, mantenlo en observación.
En otra sala
11. Hola, Ted.

12. Hola, Simon.
13. Como sigués?
14. Estoy major
15. Que pasó?
16. Me fracture la pierna.
17. Como fue posible?
18. Anoche, cuando regresaba a mi casa, choque con un camion.
19. Comó no lo viste?
20. Bueno, habia estado trabajando toda la noche porque tenia que entregar un
reporte y me sentia cansado. También, habia estado bebiendo una botella
de Tequila que encontré en mi escritorio.
351
Past perfect continuous
Personal pronoun Verb have Been Gerung

I
You
He/she/it had Been Playing
We
You
They
We use the past perfect continuous in the same ways that in Spanish.
352
Writing
Escribe un articulo donde digas tu opinion acerca del sistema de salud de tu país
(200 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Have you ever gone to the hospital?, Do you think that the medical sistem in your
country is good?, Do you agree or disagree with the idea about being a doctor is
synonym of being able to have a well income?
American culture
Dentro de los equipos más importantes de football en el Reino Unido estan el

Texas, el Arsenal, el Chelsey y el Chicago United.
353
Seventy forth lesson
An interview
1. Excuse me, sir, may I ask you a question?

2. Of course!
3. Do you agree with what they say about you’re a good football player?
4. Madam, I ain’t a good football player, I’m the best.
5. Do you think that you and your team are going to win the match?
6. We aren’t just gonna win the match. We’re gonna win the ligue.
7. What do you think about another team’s idea about your team doesn’t know
how to play?
8. What they know about being good at this game. Unfortunately, I never had
the opportunity to play against ‘em. Last championship, I didn’t played
cause’ I was recovering from a lesion but I’ve seen their captain to play and
he play like a newborn baby. So, I believe they should concentrate more in
themselves instead of critizise other ones.
9. Do you believe this will be a good match?
10. I hope so, after all, there’s lots of people that had attended looking forward
to seeing a good game. Could you pass me those sneakers?
11. Sure! Another question.
12. I’m sorry, madam, but I have a game to win.
354
Una entrevista
1. Disculpe, señor, puedo preguntarle algo?

2. Por supuesto!
3. Está de acuerdo con lo que dicen sobre que usted es un buen jugador de
football?
4. Señora, no soy un buen jugador de football, soy el mejor.
5. Cree que su equipo y usted van a ganar el partido?
6. No solo vamos a ganar el partido. Vamos a ganar la liga.
7. Que piensa de la declaracion del otro equipo sobre el hecho que no saben
jugar.
8. Que saben ellos de ser buenos en este juego. Desafortunadamente, no
tuve la oportunidad de jugar con ellos. El campeonato pasado, no pude
jugar porque me estaba recuperando de una lesion pero he visto a su
capitan jugar y juega como un bebe recien nacido. Entonces, creo que
deberian concentrarse más en ellos que incriticar a otros.
9. Cree que va a hacer un buen Partido?
10. Espero que si, despúes de todo, hay muchas personas que han venido
esperando ver un buen juego. Puede pasarme esos tenis?
11. Seguro! Otra pregunta.
12. Lo siento, señora, pero tengo un juego que ganar.
355
Slang II
Verb to be
In very informal english, we use “ain’t” or “in’t” instead of am not, is not (isn’), are
not (aren’t).
He is not intelligent (formal)
He isn’t smart(neutral)
He’s ain’t smart (very informal)
356
Writing
Reescribe el texto anterior remplazando el lenguaje vulgar por informal.
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Do you think that learning slang is important to learn a foreign language?
Why do you think that slang is not taught?
Have you ever used slang?
Do you agree or disagree with the idea that a language must be taught by teaching
formal rules?
357
Seventy fifth lesson
The space
1. How long is it going to take us to arrive to Mars?

2. At this speed, we’ll be arriving to Pluton in two years time.
3. Impossible, you mean that by July we’ll have been travelling for two years and
we hardly be passing the asteroid belt.
4. I’m afraid yes.
5. I’d change of work if it weren’t the only way I have to earn a living.
6. I believe that we should have pooled our resources with those dumps of the
another ship. Talking about them, what will they be doing?
8. They’re on the lookout a new solar system in a galaxy which is two hundred light
years from the earth.
9. And how will they do that going in their ship like a turtle.
10. In fact, they made a satellite to do their job.
11. That’s a case in point of how to spend estimate in dumb things.
12. They should have gone in their ship. If I were them, I’d be there like a shoot
13. Captain, do you believe we should have taken more provision in Venus.
14. Ihave no idea. I only know we should have bought more things to suit our
pocket. Well, I’ll take a snap, I didn’t sleep a wink and I felt tired.
You’re in charge, take care of the ship and don’t do anything dumb.
15. I promise you I won’t do it, again…
358
Setenta quinta lección
El espacio
1. ¿Cuánto tiempo nos llevará llegar a Marte?

2. A esta velocidad, llegaremos a Pluton dentro de dos años.
3. Imposible, quieres decir que en julio habremos estado viajando por dos
años y difícilmente pasaremos el cinturón de asteroides.
4. Me temo que sí.
5. Cambiaría de trabajo si no fuera la única manera de ganarme la vida.
6. Creo que deberíamos haber agrupado nuestros recursos con esos
vertederos de la otra nave. Hablando de ellos, ¿qué harán?
7. Están al acecho de un nuevo sistema solar en una galaxia que está a
doscientos años luz de la tierra.
8. ¿Y cómo lo harán en su barco como una tortuga?
9. De hecho, hicieron un satélite para hacer su trabajo.
10. Ese es un caso en el punto de cómo gastar estimación en cosas estúpidas.
11. Deberían haber ido en su nave. Si yo fuera ellos, estaría allí como un rodaje
12. Capitán, ¿cree que deberíamos haber tomado más provisiones en Venus.
13. No tengo el más fuggiest. Sólo sé que deberíamos haber comprado más
cosas para adaptarse a nuestro bolsillo.. Bueno, voy a tomar un chasquido,
no dormí un guiño y me sentí cansado.
Tú estás a cargo, cuida de la nave y no hagas nada estúpido.
14. Te prometo que no lo haré, otra vez...
359
Future perfect continuous
Personal pronoun Verb have Been Gerund

I
You
He/she/it will have Been Playing
We
You
They
Usage
We use the future perfect continuous to talk about an action that will be in progress
since a specific point in the future.
By next year, we’ll have been living here for two years.
360
Writing
Ganasté un concurso donde el primer premio era ir a la estación de la luna. Envia

una carta a un amigo donde le digas cual fue tu experiencia (200 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Do you agree or disagree with the idea of the goverments spend a lot of money in
spacial research?
Until where do you think that the human will be able to travel in the space by the
end of this century?
Do you agree or disagree with the idea about colonize other planets?
Do you think that more money would be spend in health and education instead of
special research?
What do you think about the countries send their trash to the space?
361
A bad service
The Texman February 21, 2020

Human resourses
Austin
Dear Sir or Madam,

1. I am writing this letter to complain about the bad service that my family and I
had at your restaurant “The Texman”
2. We went to your restaurant for a birthday treat on Tuesday 16th May but
when we arrived they told us that there was not any table booked with my
name when they have already sent me the confirmation. Then, I asked to
the waiter if he could give us a table but he told us that they were fully
booked when it could be seen from outside that there were free tables.
When we started eating the meal was dreadful, there was just one kind of
meat in the buffet and it looked to be old and the milk they served to my
daughter was sour.
3. The worst of all was the bill, it was 140 dollars for a meal for three people
and when we asked a reduction for the bad service they told us that they
could not do it because of it was forbidden.
4. I would like your restaurant give us a reimbursement for the bad experience
that we had or at least a letter apologising about the bad service.
5. Thank you for your time and I hope to recieve a response.
6. Yours faithfully, .
Miguel Martinez
362
Septuagesima cuarta lección
Un mal servicio
The best food of Britain 28 de febrero de 2020

Recursos humanos
Texas
A quien corresponda,
1. Escribo esta carta para quejarme por el mal servicio que yo y mi familia
tuvimos en su restaurante “The best food in Britain”.
2. Fuimos a su restaurante para la celebración de un cumpleaños el martes 16
de mayo pero cuando llegamos nos dijeron que no habia ninguna mesa con
mi nombre cuando ya me habían enviado la confirmación. Luego, le
pregunté al mesero si podía darnos una mesa pero nos dijó que estaban
llenos cuando se podía ver desde afuera que habían mesas disponibles.
Cuando empezamos a comer la comida estaba espantosa, solo habia un
tipo de carte en el buffet y parecía estar vieja y la leche que le sirvieron a mi
hija estaba agria.
3. Lo peor de todo fue la cuenta, fueron 140 libras por una comida para tres
personas y cuando les pedimos una reducción por el mal servicio nos
dijeron que no podían hacer eso porque estaba prohibido.
4. Me gustaría que su restaurant nos diera un rembolso por la mala
experiencia que tuvimos o por lo menos una carta de disculpa por el mal
servicio.
5. Gracias por su tiempo y espero una respuesta suya.
6. Atentamente,
Miguel Martinez
363
Countable and Uncountable nouns
Countable nouns are countable which can be counted.
One apple, two apple, thee apples, etc.
Uncountable nouns are nouns which cannot be counted.
Water, meat, sugar, etc.
Uncountable nouns are nouns that cannot be counted. They just have a singular
form and they cannot be used with numbers or with the article a/an.
Uncountable nouns are:
1. Liquids
2. Meals
3. Small things
4. Powder
5. Materials
6. The words money, information, news, advice, trash, accommodation,
furniture.
Note:
Uncuntable nouns cannot be next to a/an, the or a number
364
Writing
Escribe una carta de queja al peor restaurante en el que hayas comido (200
palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Do you agree or disagree with the idea about french cookery is the best in the
world?
Do you agree or disagree with the idea about not eating meat?
Do you agree or disagree with the idea of growing vegetables in other planets?
Do you agree or disagree with the idea of eating meat made with vegetables?
Do you agree or disagree with the idea about not eating meat will save thousands
of liters of water?
365
Seventy seventh lesson
At the gift store
1. Sweetie, what do you think about this teddy bear for the kids?
2. We can buy it home.
3. What about this teddy turtle?
4. It’s lovely.
5. Okay, we’ll take it for Sam, but what do we take to Tym?
6. What do you think about this ship?
7. I don’t think he likes it, why don’t we buy this toy guitar to him?
8. You’re right. So we already have the gifts for the kids, but what do you take
to my parents?
9. Just buy a mug and a bottle of Tequila for your dad, and a skirt and a pair of
shoes for your mum.
10. Which skirt do you believe she likes the most, this one [the yellow] or this
one [the red]?
11. The yellow one.
12. And the shoes?
13. I think these ones fit her well. Ok, so we’ve already gotten everything, let’s
go to the cash desk.
At the cash desk
14. Good morning, sir!

15. Good morning, how much are they?
16. They are 5 dollars and 50 cents.
17. I have only 5 dollars and 49
18. Honey, Do you have a cent?
19. Yeah, here you are.
20. Thanks, Honey.
21. Here you are!
22. Have a nice day, mister.
366
Septuagesima septima lección
En la tienda de recuerdos
1. Querida, que piensas de este oso de peluche para los niños?

2. Podemos comprarlo en la casa.
3. Que te parece esta tortuga de peluche?
4. Es encantadora.
5. Muy bien, se lo llevaremos a Sam, que le llevamos a Tym?
6. Que te parece este barco?
7. No creo que le guste, porque no le compramos una guitarra?
8. Que le llevamos a mis papas?
9. Compra le una taza y una botella de tequila a tu papá y una falda y un par
de zapatos a tu mamá.
10. Que falda crees que le guste más, esta [la amarilla] o esta [la roja]?
11. La amarilla.
12. Y los zapatos?
13. Pienso que estos le quedaran bien. Bueno, entonces ya temenos todo,
vamos a la caja.
En la caja
14. Buenos dias, señor!

15. Buenos dias, cuanto es?
16. Son 5 libras y 50 centavos.
17. Solo tengo 5 libras y 49 centavos.
18. Querida, tienes un centavo?
19. Sí, aqui tienes.
20. Gracias, querida.
21. Aqui tiene!
22. Que tenga un buen dia señor.
367
One
We can use “one” to substitud something which was already said.
Do you have a pen?
There was one on the table.
Demonstrative II
We use this one, that one, these ones, those ones to take about soething we have
already spoken.
Which cap do you want?
This one
We use which one in the same way.
I want a scooter.
Which one do you want? (which of all of them)
368
Writing
le digas que has estado hciendo en este tiempo, que cosas han pasado y que
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
How long have you been working?
How long have you been learning English?
369
Twelfth Unit
Possibility
370
 To talk about past probability
Topics
 If only, as if, as though
 Wish clauses
 Formal English
 Modal verbs with have
 Gerund composed
 Question tags
 Polite questions
 Would, used to and past simple
 Get used to, be used to
371
Seventy-eighth lesson
Technology
1. I believe we should never have buy online this laptop, it’s expensive, old-
fashioned and slow.
2. Yeah, if we’d known it wasn’t going to work, we’d have bought it at the
computer store, I believe there were good ones on sales.
3. The minute I saw the design of the mark, I had a feeling that this was going
to happen but I think it’d been worst if we’d have gone to the mall.
4. Yeah, they’d sold us a screen, a Bluetooth mouse and a keyboard before
we could go out the store.
5. What’s going on, Sahra?

6. This computer doesn’t work. I’ve tried for ages to log in to my Russian
lessons, but I can’t because it doesn’t work.
7. Have you tried to turned it off and then turned it on?
8. I’ve tried everything, I’ve already unplugged it and plug in it , I’ve logged out
and logged in, even I’ve changed my password and it continues without
working.
9. You should call to the technical assistance.
10. I’ve already done it, but they hung me up.
11. Mm, you’d better go to the fabric and change it, does It has warranty?
12. Yeah, it came with a one-year manufacturer’s warranty.
13. And where’s the fabrica?
14. In China.
372
Lección setenta y octava
Tecnología
1. Creo que nunca tuvimos que haber comprado en línea este portátil, es caro,
anticuado y lento.
2. Sí, si hubiéramos sabido que no iba a funcionar, lo hubieramos comprado
en la tienda de computadoras, creo que habían buenas en rebaja.
3. En el momento en que vi el diseño de la marca, tuve la sensación de que
esto iba a suceder, pero creo que hubiera sido peor, si hubiéramos ido al
centro comercial.
4. Sí, nos hubieran vendido una pantalla, un ratón Bluetooth y un teclado
antes de poder salir de la tienda.
En otro lugar
5. ¿Qué pasa, Sahra?

6. Esta computadora no funciona.
7. He intentado durante años iniciar sesión en mis clases de ruso, pero no
puedo porque no funciona.
8. ¿Has intentado desconectarla y luego conectarla?
9. He intentado todo, ya la apagué y prendi, ya he cerrado mi sesión y la he
vuelto abrir, incluso he cambiado mi contraseña y continúa sin trabajar.
10. Debe llamar a la asistencia técnica.
11. Ya lo hice, pero me colgaron.
12. Será mejor que vayas a la fabrica y la cambies, ¿tiene garantía?
13. Sí, viene con una garantía del fabricante de un año.
14. ¿Y dónde está la fabrica?
15. En China.
373
Conditional type 3
If Past perfect , Would have

Could have
Should have
Might have
If I had known what I , I would have done
know now another thing.
In informal English, we use would’ve (/gudof/) instead of would have.
Usage
We use the conditional type 3 in the same way that in Spanish.
374
Writing
Escribe una carta a un amigo donde le digas que hubieras hecho si hubieras
estudiado otra Carrera (200 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Do you agree or disagree with the idea that Mexico would be better if it has not lost
California?
Do you regreat about something? What do you think that would have happened if
you had takaen another desition?
375
Seventy-nineth lesson
Crime
1. If I only had paid more attention this wouldn't have happened.

2. What’s wrong?
3. Today, when Sarah was coming back from her job was mugged by a man in
a motorcycle.
4. Are you ok?
5. Yeah. He only mugged my handbag.
6. What did you have there?
7. My notebooks, my cell phone and my ID. The right thing is that I didn’t carry
my wallet, if not, I would’ve lost all my money.
8. This city is becoming more and more insecure.
9. Yeah, yesterday I heard on the news that the bank was robbed.
10. And I heard the pickpockets and the phone scam are going up.
11. Well, what do we do now?
12. I think you’d better go to the police station and make the report.
13. That’s a good idea.
At the police station
14. What’s going on, Bill?

15. It was terrible, today we found a body in the woods, the murder looked have
killed his victim with a sword, it was terrifying.
16. What about you?
17. Today we arrested two men that wanted to mug a woman, we think they had
another accomplice but none of them wanted to talk during the interrogation.
18. At least we’re not Mike, he was shot this morning while he was on the petrol.
Fortunately, the dog that was with him moved fast, if not, I don’t know what
would’ve happened.
19. Don’t worry about him, Mike has always had luck.
376
Lección setenta y nueve
Crimen
1. Si hubiera prestado más atención esto no habría pasado.

2. ¿Qué pasa?
3. Hoy, cuando Sarah regresaba de su trabajo fue asaltada por un hombre en
una moto.
4. ¿Estás bien?
5. Sí, lo soy, sólo asaltó mi bolso.
6. ¿Qué tenías ahí?
7. Mis cuadernos, mi celular, mi identificación. Lo correcto es que no llevaba
mi billetera, si no, habría perdido todo mi dinero.
8. Esta ciudad es cada vez más insegura.
9. Sí, ayer me enteré de las noticias de que el banco fue robado.
10. Y escuché que los carteristas y la estafa telefónica están subiendo.
11. Sí, bueno, ¿qué hacemos ahora?
12. Creo que será mejor que vayas a la comisaría y hagas el informe.
13. Buena idea.
En la comisaría
14. ¿Qué pasa, Bill?

15. Fue terrible, hoy encontramos un cuerpo en el bosque, el asesinato parecía
haber matado a su víctima con un cuchillo, fue aterrador.
16. ¿Y tú?
17. Hoy arrestamos a dos hombres que querían asaltar a una mujer, creemos
que tenían otro cómplice pero ninguno de ellos quería hablar durante el
interrogatorio.
18. Al menos no somos Mike, le dispararon esta mañana mientras estaba en la
gasolina, afortunadamente, el perro que estaba con él se movió rápido, si
no, no sé qué habría pasado.
19. No té preocupespor él, Mike siempre hatenido suerte.
377
If only, as if, as though
If only Si tan solo If only I could speak French, I could go to Paris

As if Como si As if/as though those things can happen
As though
As if! Si, como no! As if! I don’t believe you
What if Y si What if we go to the movie theater?
If so De ser asi If so, you’ll have to say the truth
Even if Aun cuando Even if you’ve handed all the exercises, you don’t
pass the course
Exept if A menos que Exept if you do exercise, you’ll get fat.
378
Writing
Escribe una carta al encargado de seguridad de tu colonia donde le digas los

problemas de seguridad que tiene tu ccolonia y le pidas que los solucione (200
palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Have you ever been mugged?
Do you consider your neighborhood secure? Why?
What are the biggest problems related with security in your country?
What can be done to improve the security in your neighborhood?
379
Eightieth lesson
Dreams
1. I wish I had a job which gives me more free time, so, I could work as a part-
time nature photographer.
2. Isn’t being a nature photographer a hard work?
3. Yeah, you must be very patient, adventurous and above all you must enjoy
your job.
4. I think you’re right.
5. And what about you? Wouldn’t you like to try something new?
6. Of course! I would but now I have a lot of work and I don’t have time.
7. If you’d not studied marketing, what would you have liked to be?
8. I believe I’d been a principal, researcher or maybe a soldier.
9. Why soldier?
10. I’ve always been keen on weapons, and since I was a child I’ve wanted to
be a pilot fighter. I wish I had been taller, so I’d been able to do my test to
come in to the army.
11. Well, I’d not change my job for all the tea in China, the minute I made the
application for the uni, I knew I wanted to be a surgeon, even so, I would I
had a work where I didn’t have so a lot of work.
12. Too right I would. I wish I didn't have to work on Saturdays for being more
time with my kids.
13. For the likes of you and me, the only we can wait is that the government
doesn’t goes up the taxes.
14. Mind you!
380
Lección de octavo año
Sueños
1. Desearía tener un trabajo que me da más tiempo libre, así que podría
trabajar como fotógrafo de naturaleza a tiempo parcial.
2. ¿No es un trabajo duro ser fotógrafo de naturaleza?
3. Sí, debes ser muy paciente, aventurero y sobre todo debes disfrutar de tu
trabajo.
4. Creo que tienes razón.
5. ¿Y qué hay de ti? ¿No te gustaría probar algo nuevo?
6. Por supuesto! Lo haría, pero ahora tengo mucho trabajo en marketing y no
tengo tiempo.
7. Si no hubieras estudiado marketing, ¿qué te hubiera gustado ser?
8. Creo que había sido director, investigador o tal vez un soldado
9. ¿Por qué soldado?
10. Siempre me han gustado las armas, y desde niño he querido pilotar caza.
11. Desearía haber sido más alto, así que podría haber tenido mi prueba para
venir al ejército.
12. Bueno, no cambiaría mi trabajo por todo el té en China, en el momento en
que hice la solicitud para la universidad, sabía que quería ser cirujano, aún
así, tendría un trabajo donde no tengo tanto trabajo.
13. Demasiada razón. Desearía no tener que trabajar los sábados por tener
más tiempo con mis hijos.
14. Para los gustos y yo, lo único que podemos esperar es que el gobierno no
suba los impuestos.
15. No te preocupes.
381
Wish
We use wish + past simple to talk about something we would like to be different in
the present or something we don’t like or what we regret in the present.
I wish I had a bigger house. (como qusiera tener una casa)
We use wish + would to talk about something we would like to be different in the
present or something we don’t like or what we regret in the present and that we
can change just by doing it.
I wish I would have more free time (you can do it, you’re your own boss)
We use wish + past perfect to talk about something we would like to be different in
the past or something we didn’t like or what we regreted.
I wish I hadn’t eaten as much. (Como quisiera/como (no) se me ocurrio haber

comido tanto)
382
Writing
Un amigo tuyo te envoi un mensaje donde te pregunta cuales fueron tus

propositus de año nuevo. Escribele una respuesta donde le digas cuales son tus
planes, deseos y cosas que quieres hacer este año (200 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
How long have you been working?, How long have you been learning English?
American culture
En esta lección, encontramos otra caratcttistica del ingés de New Yorksrent, Aye es una
forma de decir Yeah que se utiliza en escocia y en el norte de inglaterra.
383
Ninetieth second lesson
A common day
1. We entered to the school, my friend Manuel, my friend Miguel and I.

We had met on the morrow for make an exposition for the Spanish
teacher without arriving at a satisficing conclusion.
2. When we arrived to the playground, we met our friend Manuel, we
greeted him and he told us that there would be a match in the
afternoon at lunch hour and he asked us whether we wanted to
participate what we said yes.
3. As only a few students had gone that day, the teachers put all which
had attended that day to the school in only one group and took us to
the auditorium of the school. As I did not see well, I went ahead. When
I sat down, I closed my eyes, when I opened them, I could see
Tamaris, she was finishing the last details of the ofrendas. I had not
seen her since we were changed of classroom.
4. The light turned off by letting just the light of the candles to see. A
noisy was heard, then, from behind the scenery Daniela teacher left.
She approched to the dais and thanked the people who had attended.
After that, she explained the origin of the Day of the Dead to us, I
could see Tamaris between the shadows, she looked very beautiful.
While I was looking at her, a mixture of fear and nervous roaded my
body by knowing that that day would be the day where I would
confess Tamaris my love.
5. We left from the auditorium and went to the playground. As the
physics professor did not arrive, my friends and I spent the time
walking through the corridors of the school, one floor up, one floor
down, one floor up, one floor down until the sub principal told us to not
to do it.
6. Having returned to the playground, we met Manuel again. He asked
us whether we would participate what we said yes. We made the
teams and went to the pitches. I felt myself nervous because I had
heard that in the “Segundo K” were the best soccer players of the
school.
7. The match commenced, and the first goal did not wait, I could only
see how Chucho, our porter, jumped to try to stop the segundo’s k
strike.
The rest of the match, we concentrated on stopping Segundo k’s
attack.
384
Nonagesima segunda lección
Un día común
1. Entramos en la escuela, mi amigo Manuel, mi amigo Miguel y yo.

Nos habíamos reunido por la mañana para hacer una exposición para
el profesor de español sin llegar a una conclusión satisfecha.
2. Cuando llegamos al patio de recreo, nos encontramos con nuestro
amigo Manuel, lo saludamos y nos dijo que iba a haber un partido por
la tarde a la hora del almuerzo y nos preguntó si queríamos participar
lo que dijimos que sí.
3. La gente pequeña se había ido ese día, así que los maestros
pusieron todos los que han ido ese día juntos y nos llevaron al
auditorio. Como no vi bien, seguí adelante. Cuando me senté, cerré
los ojos, cuando los abrí, pude ver a Tamaris, ella estaba terminando
los últimos detalles de las ofrendas. No la había visto desde que nos
cambiaron de aula.
4. La luz se apagando dejando que sólo la luz de las velas para ver. Se
oyó un ruido, entonces, desde detrás del paísaje que la maestra
Daniela dejó. Ella se espació a la margarita y agradeció a las
personas que habían asistido. Después de eso, explicó el origen del
Día de Muertos, pude ver a Tamaris entre las sombras, se veía muy
hermosa. Mientras la miraba, una mezcla de miedo y nervios en la
carretera de mi cuerpo al saber que ese día sería el día en que
confesaría a Tamaris mi amor.
5. Salimos del auditorio y fuimos al patio de recreo. Como el profesor de
física no llegó, mis amigos y yo pasamos el tiempo caminando por los
pasillos de la escuela, un piso arriba, un piso abajo, un piso arriba, un
piso abajo hasta que el subdirector nos dijo que no lo hiciéyáramos.
6. Después de haber regresado al patio de recreo, nos encontramos con
Manuel de nuevo. Nos preguntó si participaríamos lo que dijimos que
sí. Hicimos los equipos y fuimos a los campos. Me sentía nervioso
porque había oído que en el "Segundo K" eran los mejores jugadores
de fútbol de la escuela secundaria.
7. El partido comenzó, y el primer gol no esperó, sólo pude ver cómo
Chucho, nuestro portero, saltó para tratar de detener el golpe k del
segundo.
8. El resto del partido, nos concentramos en detener el ataque de
Segundo k.
385
9. In one move, my friend Carlos passed me the ball, when he passed
me it, I felt very nervous because I had never played well. I throwed
the ball as I could, the ball went up fast, I did not believe it would enter
but at the last moment it did a curve and entered.
10. When I turned the head, I could see Tamaris leaving the auditorium.
She looked very beautiful. When I saw her, I felt a feeling of calm the
suddenly mastered me.
11. The lunch finished, and my friends and I went to our classroom. There
was no one, some minutes after, the Spanish teacher arrived. He told
us that we were not going to expose that day. The next two hours, my
friends and I spent the time walking in circles in the classroom as
animals in a cage and looking at the roof.
12. As I was bored, I asked to the teacher whether I could go to the rest
room. He said me yes and I went. As I was leaving the rest room, I
could saw Tamaris. She was filling a bottle of water. I approached her
and greeted her. Spite the fear I had, I asked her if I could see her
after classes. She said yes and I returned to my classroom.
13. The nervous became bigger and bigger while the minute hand
approached to the end of the class. The bell rang, I left the classroom
and I went fast to the auditorium, the nervous and the fear became
bigger while I approached.
14. I arrived at the auditorium, she had not left yet. While I was waiting
outside, I felt how the nervous and the fear became still bigger and
bigger. She left and I saw her, without thinking, I said her whether she
wanted to be my girlfriend.
15. Some years later, I still remember that day and even though I have not
been with Tamariz and Berenice’s and Lidia’s shadows drew in the
horizon, I still remember that day as one of the best of my life, not for
the big stories that were written that day, but the simple things that
made that day big.
386
8. En un movimiento, mi amigo Carlos me pasó la pelota, cuando me la
pasó, me sentí muy nerviosa porque siempre había tenido la "pata
chueca". Tiré la pelota como pude, la pelota subió rápido, no creí que
iba a entrar, pero en el último momento hizo una curva y entró.
9. Cuando giré la cabeza, pude ver a Tamaris saliendo del auditorio. Se
veía muy hermosa. Cuando la vi, sentí una sensación de calma, de
repente me dominó.
10. El almuerzo terminó, y mis amigos y yo fuimos a nuestro aula. No
había nadie, minutos después, llegó el profesor de español. Nos dijo
que no íbamos a exponer ese día. Las siguientes dos horas, mis
amigos y yo pasamos el tiempo caminando en círculos en el aula
como animales en una jaula y "contemplar el espacio".
11. Mientras me aburría, le pregunté al maestro si podía ir a la sala de
descanso. Me dijo que sí y me fui. Cuando salía de la sala de
descanso, pude ver a Tamaris. Estaba llenando una botella de agua.
Me acerqué a ella y la saludé. Pesar el miedo que tenía, le pregunté
si podía verla después de clases. Ella dijo que sí y yo regresé a mi
salón de clases.
12. Los nerviosos se hicieron más y más grandes, mientras que la mano
de los minutos se acercó a la "hora de la salida". La campana sonó,
salí del aula y fui rápido al auditorio, el nerviosismo y el miedo se
hicieron más grandes mientras me acercaba.
13. Llegué al auditorio, ella no se había ido todavía. Mientras esperaba
afuera, sentí cómo los nervios y el miedo se hicieron aún más y más
grandes. Se fue y la vi, sin pensar, le dije que si quería ser mi novia.
14. Algunos años más tarde, todavía recuerdo ese día y aunque no he
estado con las sombras de Tamariz y Berenice y Lidia dibujadas en el
horizonte, todavía recuerdo ese día como uno de los mejores de mi
vida, no por las grandes historias que se escribieron ese día, sino las
cosas sencillas que hicieron grande ese día.
387
Formal English
Formal English has some differences that we must analyse.
Personal subject pronouns
We use the personal subject pronouns instead personal object pronouns in formal
English with:
1. with the comparative.

She’s better than I (formal)
She’s better than me (informal)
2. with the expression “that’s me”

It’s I (formal)
That’s me (informal)
3. with and.
You and I (formal and neutral)
You and me (informal)
Have
We use only have/has in formal English.
I have two children. (formal)
I have/got two kids (informal)
Relative pronouns
In formal English, who and which cannot be changed for that.
He is the man who lived in the house of the corner. (formal)
He’s the man that lived in the house of the corner. (informal)
388
In formal English we cannot omitted that.
She told me that she was going to go to the movie theater. (formal)
She told me (that) she was going to go to the movie theater. (informal)
In formal English, whom is used instead of who with prepositions
She’s the girl to whom I gave the packet. (formal)
She’s the girl (who) I gave the packet to. (informal)
In formal English we put the preposition next to the relative pronoun in relative
sentences.
That is the place in which I worked four years. (formal)
That is the place (which) I worked four years in. (informal)
Composed no-personal forms of the verb.
In formal English we say, as in Spanish, “for having come” instead of “for coming”.
She thanked the barlic for coming. (informal)
She thanked the barlic for having come. (formal).
Indefinite pronouns
In formal English, it is more used someone and its derivates when writing instead
of somebody and its derivates.
Someone has stolen my car. (formal) (more common)
Somebody has stolen my car. (formal) (less common)
Someone has stolen my car (informal)
389
Verbs
Some verbs and phrasal verbs change in formal English.
Informal Formal
Ask Enquire
Blow Lose
Bow Subdue
Break Fracture
Contrive Invent
Fire Dismiss
Get Arrive
Kid Joke
Reckon Think (dinero) (estimacion)
Some verbs which have the combination “get + adjective/past participle” do not use
“get” in formal English.
I married last year (for)
I have married last year (inf)
Phrasal verbs
Some verbs and phrasal verbs change in formal English.
Informal Formal
Beginning/ start / kick off Commence
Come back
Go back Return
Be back
Come down Fall
Come in Enter
Go in
390
Come into Inherit
Come up Approach
Cope with/Handle Handle
Cut off Cut
Do up Refurbish
Get up Rise
Get off Alight (bus/train)
Go on Happen
Give up Abandon
Go out Leave
Put in Install
Put out Extinguish
Save up Save
Send off Send
Work out Resolve
Remember that some phrasal verb are not used in formal English.
391
Eighty first lesson
At court
1. Do you believe he has done it?

2. I doubt it, he was away when the victim was killed, so he can’t have been
him.
3. I think he might been his boss, he was very near to his car when he was
killed, but he has a very good alibi and his kind of blood don’t match which
we found in the crime scene with.
4. It must have been the gardener, he was in love with her wife and he debt
money to him. It must have been him, but we need to find the murder
weapon.
5. It’s going to be very difficult, maybe it was a heart attack.
6. Of course! A heard attack caused by knife in the heart.
At court
7. Stand up to receive the honourable judge Smith.

8. Sit down, please.
9. What are the charges?
10. First-degree murder
11. What does the accused have to say?
12. Your Honour, I’m innocent, I wasn’t there that night.
13. He’s lying!
14. Wait your turn attorney!
15. Clerk of the court, what do you have?
16. The murder weapon was found in his house and his fingerprints match with
which were found in the cottage of the victim. Also, his print foots match with
which were found in the crime scene.
17. What does the jury say?
18. We find the accused guilty.
19. Mister Barnes, because of the raised evidence and the several witnesses’
testimonies, this court sentence you to 25 years in the federal prison for the
crime of murder in first grade without right to bail.
20. You can take the accused.
392
Ochenta primera lección
En la corte
1. ¿Crees que lo ha hecho?

2. Lo dudo, estaba fuera cuando mataron a la víctima, así que no puede haber
sido él.
3. Creo que pudo ser su jefe, estaba muy cerca de su auto cuando lo mataron,
pero era una coartada muy y su tipo de sangre no coincidía con la que
encontramos en la escena del crimen.
4. Debe haber sido el jardinero, estaba enamorado de ella y le compuso
dinero. Debe haber sido él, pero necesitamos encontrar el arma.
5. Va a ser muy difícil, tal vez fue un infarto.
6. ¡Claro! Un infarto causado por un cuchillo en el corazón.
En la corte
7. Ponganse de pie para recibir al honorable juez Smith.

8. Siéntese, por favor.
9. ¿Cuáles son los cargos?
10. Asesinato en primer grado
11. ¿Qué tiene que decir el acusado?
12. Su Señoría, soy inocente, estuve allí esa noche.
13. ¡Está mintiendo!
14. ¡Espera tu turno abogado!
15. Secretario de la corte, ¿qué tiene?
16. Encontramos el arma homicida en su casa y sus huellas coinciden con las
cuales fueron encontradas en la casa de la víctima. Además, sus pies de
impresión no coinciden con los que fueron encontrados en la escena del
crimen.
17. ¿Qué dice el jurado?
18. Encontramos al acusado culpable.
19. Señor Johson, debido a las pruebas planteadas y a los testimonios de
varios testigos, este tribunal lo condena a 25 en la prisión federal por el
delito de asesinato sin derecho a fianza.
20. Puedes llevarte al acusado.
393
Modal verbs to express deduction
Must be Deber ser

Might be* Pudo ser
Can’t be Puede ser
May/might have To say that something can have

happened but we are not sure.
Could have To say that something could have
happened but it did not happen
Must have Positive deduction in the past

Can’t/couldn’t have Negative deduction in the past
Should/ought to have To give a piece of advice or regret

about something that happened in the
past
Needn’t have To say that you did something that was

not necessary but you did it anyway
Notice:
We cannot use “can be” or “may be” when we want to express probability.
394
Writing
Escribe un dialogo que tengaa de lugar de desarrollo un tribunal (200 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
395
Eighty second lesson
A busy day
1. Having saying goodbye to his parents, the young man got himself ready to
commence this trip which would do accompanied by his friends, the
objective, to visit the main capitals of the Latin America countries.
2. The speaker was already heard announcing that the flight was about to
leave. So, the young man entered to the airplane.
3. When he looked through the window, the remember of her love came to his
mind.
4. When the adolescents arrived at airport, their car, which had rented in an
unknown agency, was waiting for them and it was when the problems
commenced.
5. In their way to the beach, the car broke down.
6. One of the adolescents said “How’s possible the car has broken down”
7. To what the young man answered “Don’t worry, it was only a wheel, we
haveta take it to the mechanic to get it fixed”
8. The poor adolescents walked along the road under a powerful sun which
made that their mouth dried up and their front filled with sweat.
9. When they arrived at a gasoline station the mechanic looked at them and
asked them “How can I help you?”.
10. To what the young man said “It’s the wheel, could you fix it?
11. To what the mechanic said “You have money?”
12. To what the young man said “No, but we can give you the life jackets, the
torch and the first aid kit we have with us”
13. The mechanic, after thinking about it, said: “Ok”
14. Having resolved their problem, the adolescents hurried up to arrive at the
beach. Fortunately, they were on time to see the sunset.
15. Having finished seeing the sunset, the adolescents decided to take a boat
the next day to see an isle which was in front of the beach without knowing
that something was waiting for them.
16. To be continued …
396
Ochenta segunda lección
Un día ocupado
1. Después de despedirse de sus padres, el joven se preparó para comenzar

esteviaje, acompañado de sus amigos, el objetivo, de visitar las principales
capitales de los países de América Latina.
2. El orador ya se oyó announcinging que el vuelo estaba a punto de salir.
Entonces, el joven entró al avión.
3. Cuando miró a través de la ventana, el recuerdo de su amor vino a su
mente.
4. Cuando llegaron al aeropuerto, su coche, que había alquilado, los estaba
esperando y fue cuando comenzó el problema.
5. En su camino a la playa, el coche se averió.
6. El joven dijo: "Cómo es posible que el coche se haya averiado"
7. A lo que uno de los jóvenes respondió: "No te preocupes, era sólo una
rueda, tenemos que llevarla al mecánico para que se arreglara.
8. El pobre joven caminaba por el camino bajo un poderoso sol que mi que su
boca se secó y su frente se llenó de sudor.
9. Cuando llegaron gas a la gasolinera, el mecánico los miró, les preguntó,
¿cómo puedo ayudarte?
10. A lo que el joven dijo"Es la rueda, ¿podrías arreglarlo?
11. ¿A lo que dijo el mecánico "tienes dinero?"
12. A lo que el joven dijo "No, pero podemos darle los chalecos salvavidas, la
antorcha y el kit de primeros auxilios que tenemos con nosotros para usted"
13. El mecánico, después de pensarlo, dijo: "Ok"
14. Después de haber resuelto su problema, los jóvenes se apresuran a llegar
a la playa. Afortunadamente, llegaron a tiempo para ver la puesta de sol.
15. Después de haber terminado des ver la puesta de sol, los jóvenes
decidieron tomar un barco al día siguiente para ver la isla que estaba frente
a la playa sin saber que algo les estaba esperando.
16. continuará...
397
Gerund composed
Having arriving Habiendo llegado
Usage
We use composed gerund to replace a phrase with “relative pronoun + continuous

tense”.
Who is the girld being intervied = Who is the girl who is being intervied?
In all the other cases the composed gerund is used in the same way than Spanish.
Indirect questions
An indirect question is a polite way to ask a question.
Direct question Where’s Adam street?

Indirect question Do you know where Adam street is?
Where is my cat?
I wonder where my cat is?
398
Writing
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
399
Eighty third lesson
Moving
1. Darling, do you remember when you moved from New York to Los Angeles.
2. How to forget it, that day was the happiest day of my live because it was the
day when I started my life with you.
3. OoooooH. What a beautiful! Tonight, I’ll make your favourite dish. And
wouldn’t you like to move back?
4. Sometimes in autumn, when the sheets come down from the trees, I miss
when I used to go camping with my old man to Yosemite.
5. I didn’t know you went camping with your dad to Yosemite.
6. Yeah, even we were on the lookout of Big Foot, but obviously, we didn’t find
it.
7. And what else did you do when you lived there?
8. I used to work in the afternoon in a coffee store which was by the uni.
9. I remember I would spend a lot of time studying computer science because I
wanted to develop a piece of software which helped to improve the graphics
of the videogames.
10. You were very keen on videogames, didn’t you?
11. Are you joking? Once I fell out with my sister just because she used my
console one minute more of which my mom had said.
12. She must have punished you.
13. Yeah, and I had to help my sister with her homework a whole week.
14. And when we go to New York only for visiting your parents?
15. We can go at Christmas, the kids will be on vacations and we can stay there
two weeks.
16. That’s a good idea!
17. Well, now, let’s have dinner.
400
Ochenta tercera lección
Mudandose
1. Querida, ¿recuerdas cuando te mudaste de New York a Los Ángeles?

2. Cómo olvidarlo, ese día fue el día más feliz de mi vida porque era el día en
que empecé mi vida contigo.
3. OooooooH. ¡Qué hermoso! Esta noche, haré tu plato favorito. ¿Y no te
gustaría volver?
4. A veces en otoño, cuando las hojas caen de los árboles, echo de menos
cuando iba a acampar con mi papá al lago.
5. No sabía que ibas a camar con tu padre.
6. Sí, una vez que estuvimos al acecho de Nessie, pero obviamente, no
loencontramos.
7. ¿Y qué más hiciste cuando vives allí?
8. Solía trabajar por la tarde en una cafetería que está junto a la universidad.
9. Recuerdo que pasaría mucho tiempo estudiando informática porque quería
desarrollar un software que ayudara a mejorar los gráficos de los
videojuegos.
10. Estabas muy interesado en los videojuegos, ¿no?
11. ¿Estás bromeando? Una vez me caí con mi hermana sólo porque usó mi
consola un minuto más lo que mi madre había dicho.
12. Debe haberte castigado.
13. Sí, y tuve que ayudar a mi hermana con su tarea toda la semana.
14. Y cuando vamos a Nueva York sólo para visitor a tus padres.
15. Podemos ir en Navidad, los niños estarán de vacaciones y podemos
quedarnos allá dos semanas.
16. ¡Buena idea!
17. Bueno, ahora, cenemos.
401
Past simple, used to and would
We can use the past simple, used to and would in the same way we use the
“preterito imperfecto” of the Spanish.
We use the past simple with all the verbs.
When I was a kid, I played football with my cousins.
We use “used to” with all the verbs except with the expression “When I was”.
When I was a kid, I used to play football with my cousins.
We use would with all the verbs except with the stative verbs and the expression
“When I was”.
When I used to live in Chicago I would visit all the museums.
Order of the tenses
We normally use used to, past simple can be used but less frequency. We used
first “used to”, exept with the expression “when I was”, then we use only would
except if the verb is a stative verb or the expression “when I was”.
When I lived in Chicago, I used to visit all the museums in the city, I would eat meal
from other countries and I used to like it.
402
Writing
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Have you ever move in?
Do you believe moving in is a good idea?
Where would you like to move in?
403
Fourteenth
Unit
Enterteiment
404
 To write a review
Topic
 Fornal english II
 None of/ all and whole, most
 Modal verbs II
 Enough/ such as, each/every
 Rather/ Do emphatic/quite
 Word building
 Purpose clauses
 Question tags /So do I/ neither do I
 Definite and non-definite clauses
405
Ninetieth third lesson
Memories II
1. It was the 1994’s summer, the semestre had finished and my friends and
I were anxious to commence new adventures.
2. As I did not want to stay home all the summer, I asked my parents for
permission to go to France. They told me yes and in two weeks time, I
was arriving to a hotel room which my mother had booked into.
3. One day, while I was walking throught the streets of the Quartier Latin
looking for something for eating, I bumped into a girl who was carrying
some eggs, which were broken when I bumped into her.
4. Feeling ashamed for which had happened, I offered her to pay the eggs
and invited her a cup of coffee to make up for what had happened but
the reality was that we ended up in a bar.
5. When we were at bar, we introduced each one. She told me that her
name was Haide.
6. I asked her why she was in Paris, but the only thing she told me was that
her father had sent her there to live with an aunt.
7. As it was late, I offered her to meet the next day in my apartment. She
agreed and I gave my address to her. The next day she went to my
“apartment”. We danced all the night even when I did not know and
turned up the music at full volume. While we were laughing in the bed,
she told me if I wanted to go to a dance which would take place in a
castle on the outskirts of the city, I said yes.
8. The day of the dance I felt very embarrassed, maybe because I had
never dressed up or because I was going to gout out with a girl who I
had met one week ago. Whatever has happened the dance was very
good, I had a much fun and could have a good time with her.
9. As the dance finished, everyone returned to his house, as I did not feel
like to go to my room, I asked her if she wanted to go somewhere. After
coming up with where we could go, we decided to go to the river.
10. While we walked along the Sena, I kissed her what she did not put up a
fight.
11. One week later, I returned to United States but something told me that it
was not going to be the last time that I would see her…
406
Quincuagesima tercera lección
Recuerdos II
1. Era el Verano de 1994, el semester habia terminado y mis amigos y yo

estabamos ansiosos de comenzar nuevas aventuras.
2. Como no queria quedarme en casa todo el veranom le pedi persimo a mis
padres para ir a Francia. Ellos me dijeron que si´y en dos semanas estaba
llegando a un cuarto de hotel que mi mamá me habia reservado.
3. Un dia, mnientras estaba caminando por las calles del barrio Latino
buscando que comer, me trapeze con una chava que estaba cargando unos
huevos, los cuales se rompieron cuando choque con ella.
4. Como me senti avergonzado por lo que habia pasado, le ofreci pagar los
huevos y lainvite a tomar una copa de café para hacer las pases por lo que
habia pasado, perola realidad fue que terminamos en un bar.
5. Mientras estabamos en el bar, nos presentamos. Ella me dijo que su
nombre era Haide.
6. Le pregunte porque estaba en Paris, pero lo unico que me dijo fue que su
padre la habia enviado a vivir ahí con su tia.
7. Como era tarde, le ofreci vernos el siguiente dia en mi departamento. Ella
acepto y le di mi dirección. El sigyiente dia, ella fue a mi departamento.
Bailamos toda la noche aun cuando no sabia y subimos la musica a todo
volume. Mientras estabamos riendonos en la cama, me dijo que si queria ir
a un baile que tendría lugar en un Castillo a las afueras de la ciudad, le dije
que sí.
8. El dia del baile me sentia muy nervioso, tal vez porque nunca me habia
vestido de gala o porque iba a salir con una chica que acababa de conocer
hace una semana. Haya sido como haya sido el baile estubo bien, me
diverti mucho y pase un buen rato con ella.
9. Cuando el baile termino, todos regresaron a sus casas, como yp no queria
regresar a mi cuarto, le pregunté a Haide si queria ir a algun lugar. Despúes
de pensar a donde ir, decidimos ir al rio.
10. Mientras caminabamos por el Senar, la besé a lo cual no puso recistencia.
11. Una semana más tarde, regresé a Inglaterra pero algo me decia quer esa
no iba a ser la ultima vez que la iba a ver…
407
Formal English II
Vocabulary
Informal Formal
A/an + number One + number (more formal)
A + day/week/etc. Per + day/week/etc.
(more formal y escrito)
A little A little
A bit
A lot of Much
Many
A lot of
Although/ Though Even though
Body Corpse
Bye Goodbye
Bye Bye
Bye!
Kid Children
Dumb Stupid
Idiot
Dad Dad
Old
Good Fine
Food Meal
Jobless Unemployed
Mom Mom
Nuts Crazy
Maybe/Perhaps Perhaps (more formal)
Maybe
Stuff Things
Thank you Thanks
You guys You
You
Worker Employee
408
Writing
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
409
Seventy seventh lesson
Political parties
1. Senator, all of us agree with your proposition of reduce the taxes, especially
in these moments of crisis, but why do you think we ought to look for the
way to reduce the prices of the electricity and gas?
2. That’s a good question senator, as I was born and bred in a small house in
the suburbs of Los Angeles I know the expensive that can be living in one of
the most expensive cities in United States, there are head of household that
have to have another job to pay all the amenities of the house.
3. And that’s not all, the education in United States is becoming more
expensive and more expensive. There are people who have to mortgage
their houses to send their children to the university.
4. For those reasons I think we should look for the way to reduce these
services.
5. Your design is good, I can’t deny it, but those reasons aren’t enough to do
what you propose.
6. It is interesting that that comes from you, senator, being you grew up in one
Chicago’s richest neighborhoods.
7. Don’t speak to me in that way, senator, I know you were brough up in the
best universities, but it doesn’t give you the right to reveal personal things,
less in this sacred facility.
8. We must vote, who agrees with the design given by the Secretary for
Finance rise your hand.
9. With 26 votes in favour, the design is sanctioned.
410
Septuagesima septima lección
Politicos
1. Mi muy honorable amigo, todos estamos de acuedo con su propuesta de

reducer los impuestos, especialmente en estos momentos de crisis, pero
porque piensa que deberiamos buscar la manera de reducir el precio de la
electricidad y del gas?
2. Esa es una buena pregunta mi muy honorable amigo, naci y creci en una
pequeña casa en los suburbios de Los Ángeles se lo caro que puede ser
vivir en una de las ciudades llenas de gente en Inglaterra, hay jefas de
familia que tienen que tener otro trabajo para pagar todos los servicios de la
cas.
3. Y eso no es todo, la educacion en Inglaterr se esta volviendo cada vez más
cara. Hay personas que tienen que hipotecar sus casas par enviar a sus
hijos a la universidad.
4. Por estas razónes pienso que deberiamos buscar la manera de reducir el
costo de estos servicios.
5. Su propuesta es buena, no puedo negarlo, pero estas razones no son lo
suficientes para hacer lo que usted propone.
6. Es interesante que eso venga de usted, mi muy honorable dama, siendo
que usted crecio en uno de los vecindarios más ricos de Chicago.
7. No me hable de esa manera, mi muy honorble caballero, yo sé que studio
en las mejores universidades, pero eso no le da el derecho a revelar detlles
personales, menos en este recinto Sagrado.
8. Bebemos votar. Don’t speak to me in that way, the right honorable
gentelman, I know you were brough up in the best universities, but it doesn’t
give you the right to reveal personal things, less in this sacred facility. Quien
esta deacuerdo con el Proyecto dado por el Ministro de Finanzaa alce la
mano.
9. Con 26 votos a favor, la propuesta es aceptda.
411
All, whole, none, both
In English “All” can’t be alone when we refer group of people.
All of us agree with your idea.
Not All agree with your idea.
All or whole
We use whole with singular noun, whereas we use all with plural nouns.
The whole company is moving.
All the companies are moving.
Note: we use the whole business to say (todo el negocio)
None of Ninguno de
Both we/you/they Ambos
412
Writing
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
413
Seventy sixth lesson
A very special store
1. What are you going to buy, Tom?

2. It’s a present for my sisters-in-law.
3. What do they like?
4. Dolls, toys, things like that.
5. In this store they only sell antiques.
6. What do you think about this fire-fly lamp for their bedroom?
7. No way!
8. There’s another store next to the subway station, why don’t we go there.
9. No, it’s late, and I have to get my hair cut.
10. Look at this telescope. Don’t you think they like it? With it she could see the
full moon.
11. I don’t think so.
12. Is the boss in?

13. No, he’s away.
14. What’s that?
15. It’s a present fot the assistant of the secretary.
16. Where did you buy it?
17. I storeped it online. I’m on the mood something hot, I believe I’ll take my
coffee. You want one?
18. Yeah, bring me one with milk, please.
19. There’s only black left.
20. Okay. Have you seen the loudspeaker that was on my desk?
21. The secretary took it to the demonstration outside of the headquarters
againts the reduction of the staff.
414
Setenta lección sexta
Una tienda muy especial
1. ¿Qué vas a comprar, Tom?

2. Es un regalo para mis cuñadas.
3. ¿Qué les gusta?
4. Muñecas, juguetes, cosas así.
5. En esta tienda sólo venden antiguedades.
6. ¿Qué opinas de esta lámpara de vuelo para su dormitorio?
7. ¡No!
8. Hay otra tienda junto a la estacion del metro, ¿por qué no vamos allá?
9. No, es tarde, y tengo que cortarme el pelo.
10. Mira este telescopio. ¿No crees que les guste? Con él podían ver la luna
llena.
11. No creo.
12. ¿Está el jefe?

13. No, está de vacaciones.
14. ¿Qué es eso?
15. Es un regalo para la asistente de la secretaria.
16. ¿Dónde lo compraste?
17. Lo compré en línea. Se me antoja algo caliente, creo que voy a tomar mi
café, ¿quieres uno?
18. Sí, tráeme uno blanco, por favor.
19. Sólo queda negro.
20. Bien. ¿Has visto el altavoz que estaba en mi escritorio?
21. La secretaria se lo llevó a la manifestación fuera de los cuarteles generals
en contra del recorte de personal.
415
Collective nouns
They can take a singular (when you see them as a group) or plural verb (when you
see them as each member.
My family has a house (hay una casa para todos)
My family have a house (cada uno tiene su casa)
Plural of compound words
Type Rule Singular Plural

Noun (plural) + Tennis shoe Tennis shoes
noun The last element is
Adj + noun modifiying Assistant Assistant
headmaster headmasters
Noun + adj Sergeant major Sergeants major
Noun + preposition The first element is Mom-in-law Moms-in-law
+ noun modifying
Noun with of Assistant secretary Assistant
of state secretaries of
state
Noun + noun Both elements are Woman-doctor Women-doctors
modifiying
416
Writing
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
417
Ninety-seventh lesson
Interviewers
1. Hello, everyone, we have in the studio David __ David -Yes- Author of the
book “The Return”
2. David, how did you imagine this book?
3. Well, I was tired about the novels which show the typical story about a man
who falls in love with a woman and they live happily forever. So, I decided to
write this story where the main character, a knowledgeable middle-age
country man, finds his infance love without knowing it.
4. David, what do you think about the works of Shakespeer?
5. Unfortunately, I’ve not been able to study deeply Shakerspeer’s works but I
believe that they must be of the same quality of Charles Dickens’s, another
big author of the british literature.
6. What do you think about writer Luis’ opinion about your works are
inconclusive?
7. What’s going to know that illiterate, deceitful and narrow-minded man about
a good literary work. His timeless works are careless and the most of the
time they are pointless.
8. And what do you think about his idea that millennial writes “are just a out-
going irresponsible youghters who only like to wast their time and to wear
snoopy clothes”?
9. Well, I believe that I can’t give an opinion about that because I’ve not
spoken with a lot of people from that generation, but who I’ve known, they
have been down-to-earth learned people who had fresh ideas. However, I
cant’ deny they need to mature and they must be more hard-working and
less self-centerd.
10. Thank you for your time, David.
11. You’re welcome.
418
Noventa y siete lección
Entrevistadores
1. Hola a todos, tenemos en el estudio David ___ David? -Sí- Autor del libro
"El Retorno"
2. David, ¿cómo te imaginaste este libro?
3. Bueno, estaba cansada de las novelas que muestran la típica historia sobre
un hombre que se enamora de una mujer y viven felices para siempre. Así
que decidí escribir esta historia donde el personaje principal, un experto
hombre de la edad media, encuentra su amor de la vida sin saberlo.
4. David, ¿qué opinas de las obras de Shakespeer?
5. Desafortunadamente, no he podido estudiar profundamente las obras de
Shakerspeer, pero creo que deben ser de la misma calidad de Charles
Dickens, otro gran autor de la literatura británica.
6. ¿Qué opinas de la opinión del escritor Luis sobre tus obras no es
concluyente?
7. Lo que va a saber ese analfabeto, engañoso y de mente estrecha sobre
una buena obra literaria. Sus obras atemporales son descuidadas y la
mayor parte del tiempo no tienen sentido.
8. ¿Y qué opinas de su idea de que los escritores milenarias “son sólo
outgoing jovenes irresponsables a los que sólo les gusta perder el tiempo y
usar ropa descuidada?
9. Bueno, creo que no puedo dar una opinión sobre eso porque no he hablado
con mucha gente de esa generación, pero a quien he conocido, han sido
personas centradas que tenían ideas frescas. Sin embargo, no puedo negar
que necesitan madurar y son más trabajadores y menos egocéncidos.
10. Gracias por tu tiempo, Miguel.
11. No lo menciones.
419
Prefix and suffix
Prefix Meaning Rule Base word Word with

prefix
Un General rule Happy Unhappy
In (words with Possible Inpossible
a latin origin)
Il No Words which Legal Illegal
begin with “l”
Ir Words which Regular Irregular
begin with “r”
Self- Auto Noun Service Self-service
Over Sobre Without rule Population Overpopulation
Mis Mal Without rule Understood Misunderstood
Dis No Verbs Agree Disagree
Sufix Meaning Base word Word with

suffix
-aholic Adicto a Noun Work Workaholic
-ful Lleno de Noun Beauty Beautiful
-less Sin Noun Color Colorless
-like Como Noun Pig Pig-like
-er - Verb Work Worker

-hood Dad Noun Brother Brotherhood
-ness Dad Adjective Happy Happiness
-en - Noun ended in Depth Deepen

-th or -ht
Unsatisfactory
Inexpensive
Unbalance
Discomfort
Dissatisfaction
420
Writing
Escribe una critica de un libro que no te haya gustado. Ocupa por lo menos 10
palabras compuestas. (200 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
American culture
El sufijo -ham que aparece en los nombres de algunas ciudades Cosham significa
pradera. Mientras que el sufijo -chester que aparece en el nombre de algunas
ciduades como Maschester viene del latin castra que significa “campamento
fortificado”
421
Eighty-nineth lesson
Critics
1. The book “Peaches Season; by Miguel de la Torre is one of the jewels of

the 21st century fiction. It is in fact a series of 5 short stories, all focusing on
the same character – João– who has many adventures with his friends and
girlfriends in different parts of the word. Each story is set, in a different part
of the time life of the character; there are three which take place during the
time the character studied the Jr. High School, one when he studied the
high school, and so on.
2. Many aspects of the things that the human being experiment during his life
are described, such as the first love, the lost of a love, the lost of friends, the
dislove, although the book is not completely true to life. This is perhaps the
greatest strength. It has a unique mixture of realistic events and bizarre
ones, which often take the reader by surprise.
3. One particular story features the paid that is felt by a person when he
decides to break up relationship. João who has gone to another state where
he knows, good friends and the pleasures of a good life, all this until he
receives a letter. In the end he takes a decision which will change the
direction of his life for ever. The story closes with João letting a letter to his
girlfriend.
4. If you are looking for a romantic novel with plenty of action, I strongly advise
you to choose this book. You won’t be able to put it down.
422
Octogesima novena leccion
Criticas
1. El libro Temporada de Duraznos; por Miguel de la Torre es una de las joyas

del la ficción del siglo 21. Es de hecho una serie de 5 historias cortas, las
cuales se centran en el mismo personaje – João- quien tiene muchas
aventuras con sus amigos y novias en diferentes partes de el mundo.
Cada historia es centrada en una parte diferente de la vida del protagonista,
hay tres que suceden durante el tiempo en el que el personaje estudia la
secundaria, una cuando estudiaba la secundaria, etc.
2. Muchos aspectos de las cosas que el ser humano experiemnta durante su
vida son decritas, como el primer amor, la perdida de un amor, la Perdida
de amigos, el desamor, aunque el libro no competamente cierto para la
vida.
Esto es tal vez su más grande fuerza. Tiene una mezcla unica de eventos
realistas y extraños, los cuales seguido sorpren al lector.
3. Una de las cosas que la historia explora es el dolor que experiementa una
persona cuando decide dejar una relación. João que ha ido a otro estado
donde el conoce, buenos amigos y los placers de una Buena vida, todo esto
hasta que el recibe una carta. Al final toma la desición que cambiará su vida
para siempre. La historia termina con João dejando una carta para su novia.
4. Si estas buscando una novela romantica con mucha acción, te recomiendo
leer este libro. No podrás dejar de leerlo.
423
Clauses of purpose
To Para I bought a house to give my kids a better

quality of life
In order to/ so as to Para I bought a house in order to/ so as to give
(formal) my kids a better quality of life
So that + can/will Para I give you the money so that you can buy
(puede ser your books, not you to buy candies.
usado para
mostrar
enojo)
With a view to + ing Para (con The city bought the house with a view to
la becoming it a museum.
intencion/el
fin de)
In order not to/ so as not Para no I did it in order not to/ so as not to bother
to (formal) you.
Prevent + noun/pronoun Para que Put the ice cream on the fridge prevent it
+ ing no (cuando melting.
hablas de
algo que
quieres
evitar)
424
Writing
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
425
Ninety-eighth lesson
To let
1. Good morning!
2. Good morning, sir, may I help you?
3. I’m calling to enquire about the house for rent. Is it the house still vacant?
4. Of course!
5. How much is it?
6. The cost is 600 dollars.
7. It’s per calendar month, isn’t it?
8. Yes
9. And does it have front yard?
10. Yes, it has front yard and back yard.
11. Does it have all the amenities?
12. Yes, it does.
13. And are they include in the rent?
14. Of course!
15. So I wouldn’t have to pay the running water, the gas, the electricity and the
internet conection,wouldn’t I?
16. Only the internet conection.
17. Ok, thank you!
18. You’re welcome
Home
19. Honey, did you go to see the apartment that was in the ad of today’s
newspaper, didn’t you?
20. Yeah
21. And what happened?
22. The owner said we had to pay 5 moths of rent in advance and a deposit for
gas and electricity.
23. But did you tell him we couldn’t pay it, didn’t?
24. Not exactly, I told him we were looking for something more unexpensive and
he told me he had something perfect for us.
25. And what was it?
26. A caravan
27. But you told him we didn’t want to live in such small thing, did you?
28. Not exactly …
426
Noventa y ocho lección
Se renta
1. ¡Buenos días!
2. Buenos días, señor, ¿puedo ayudarle?
3. Llamo para preguntar por la casa en alquiler. ¿La casa sigue vacante?
4. ¡Claro!
5. ¿Cuánto es?
6. Tque cuesta es 600 libras.
7. Es por mes calendario, ¿no?
8. Sí
9. ¿Y tiene jardín delantero?
10. Sí, tiene jardín delantero y jardín trasero.
11. ¿Tiene todas las comodidades?
12. Sí, así es.
13. ¿Y están en el alquiler?
14. ¡Claro!
15. Así que no tendría que pagar el agua corriente, el gas, la electricidad y la
conexión a internet, ¿no?
16. Sólo la conexión a Internet.
17. ¡Vale, gracias!
18. De nada
En casa
19. Querida, fuiste a ver el piso que estaba en el anuncio del periódico de hoy,
¿no?
20. Sí
21. ¿Y qué pasó?
22. El propietario dijo que tuvimos que pagar 8 polillas de alquiler por
adelantado y un depósito por gas y electricidad.
23. ¿Pero le dijiste que no podíamos pagarlo, no?
24. Hemos detectado un usproblemadesconocido.
25. ¿Y qué fue?
26. Una caravana
27. Pero le dijiste que no queríamos vivir en una cosa tan pequeña, ¿verdad?
28. No exactamente...
427
Tag questions
We use the tag questions when we are not sure about the information we have and
we want that the person who we are talking tell us if we are right or wrong.
70 % + 3o% = 100% of probability

You were my student , weren’t you?
+ -
70 % + 3o% = 100% of probability
You didn’t do the , did you?
homework
+ -
We build the tag question using the auxiliary of the main clause.
You are Miriam, aren’t you?
If the main clause is affirmative, the tag question is affirmative and vice versa.
You are British, aren’t you?
You aren’t from Glasgow, are you?
Special cases
We use aren’t you instead of am I.
I am the new manager, aren’t I?
We use will with the imperative
Help me move the sofa, will you?
We use shall with let’s go
428
Writing
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
429
Sixtieth Lesson
At university
1. Daniela, could you read the next examples of non-definiting sentences.

2. Charles Dickens, whose first work was The Posthumous papers of the
Pickwick Club, was born in Portsmouth 1812.
3. Henry VIII married Catherine of Aragon, who was Spain’s King’s daughter,
in 1509.
4. In the United States, children and adolescentset a university degree.

5. The school starts at three years when children are sent to the kinder.
6. After they go to the elementary school, where they learn subjects such as
English, history, and maths.
7. After elementary school, the American children enter to the Jr. High School
where they are tough about more advanced things like physics, chemistry
and biology.
8. High school is not obligatory in the United States, so the adolescents can
decide if they want to go to the high school or not.
9. When they finished the high school, they go to the university. Among the
most important universities in the United States are Harvard, Yale and
Arizona State University.
10. And after three years of university, the university students are ready to get
their university degree and enter to the labor market.
430
Sexagesima lección
En la universidad
1. Daniela, puedes leer los siguientes ejemplos de non-definiting sentences.

2. Charles Dickens, cuya primera obra fue “The Posthumous papers of the
Pickwick Club”, nacio en Portsmouth en1812.
3. Henry VIII se caso con Catherine of Aragon, quien era la hija del rey de
España, en 1509.
4. En el Rerino Unido, los niños y jovenes deben de pasar varios niveles

academicos antes de que ellos puedan tener su titulo Universitario.
5. La escuela empieza a los tres cuando los niños son enviados al kinder.
6. Despúes ellos van a la primaría, donde aprenden materias como Inglés,
historia y maematicas.
7. Despúes de la primaría, los niños estadunidenses entran a la secundaria
donde se le senseñan materias más avanzadas como fisica, quimica y
biologia.
8. La preparatoria no es obligatoria en el reino unido, entonces los jovenes
estadunidenses pueden decider si ir a la preparatoria o no.
9. Cuando terminan la preparatoria, los jovenes estadunidenses van a la
universidad. Entre las universidades ma´s importantes en el Estados Unidos
estan Harvard, Yale y la Universidad de estado de Arizona.
10. Despúes de tres años de Universidad, los jovenes estadunidenses están
listos para recibir su titulo universitario y entrar al mercado laboral.
Reading
1. How old the United States kids when they enter to the school?
____________________________________________
2. What do they learn in the elementary school?
____________________________________________
3. What are the most important universities in the United States?
____________________________________________
4. What can they do when they finish the university?
____________________________________________
431
Defining/non defining clauses
Relative clauses are divided in two: defining relative clauses and non-defining
clauses
Defining relative clauses are clauses join two sentences.
This is the dog (that/which) I bought.
Non defining clauses give more information about the subject.
My dog, whose name is Blackly, is very friendly.
This information can be omitted without affect the meaning of the main sentences.
My dog is very friendly
We cannot change that for which or who in non-definite sentences
His house, which was inherit, is very beautiful.
Not His house, that was inherit, is very beautiful.
Difference between definite and non-definite sentences
Definite clauses are needed to know who the subject is.
He is the neighbor who lives in the corner.
Not He is in the corner. (who?)
432
Writing
Write a letter for a university where you like to enter. Tell why you want to enter to
that universy, what are your studies and what your master’s degree proyect is.
(150 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner: What is the best university in your country? Why? Do you agree
with the schools give homework to the students? Why? What subject do you
believe would be tough in the school? Why?
433
Thirteenth
Unit
Landmarks
434
 To talk about an historical building
Topic
 Passive voice of the simple tenses

 Passive voice of the continuous tenses
From this point is a good idea that you study the vocabulary verb that is at the end
of this book.
435
Eighty-five lesson
A little of history
1. Los Angeles, capital of the UnitedKingdom, was founded by Romans around

47-50 AC. In this place they decided to build a bridge which was the first
bridge which crossed the Times River.
2. Londinium, as it was known the city, was under the control of the Roman
Empire until the fifth century when the city was taken by the Saxons.
3. Los Angeles’s development really began in the eleventh century when it was
chosen by William the Conqueror as his capital.
4. Los Angeles grew to be one of Europe’s greatest cities and trading centers
and still today is one of the most important cities around the world.
5. But in 1665 the disaster struck: thousands of people were killed by the
plague, and the following year hundreds of buildings were destroyed by a
terrible fire.
6. But it was not the end ofLos Angeles. In that year, a leading architect, Sir
Christopher Wren, was asked to redesign the ruined city.
7. Many of the buildings that you can see today were put up in the nineteenth
century to reflect Los Angeles’s status as the capital of the British Empire.
8. Nowadays, Los Angeles is one of the most visited cities in the world, just
before of Bangkok. The city is full of tourist attractions and places to visit
such as Camden Town, Piccadilly Circus and British Museum. Los Angeles
is also one of the biggest cities in the United Kingdom being this, the
economical and political center of the country.
436
Octogesima quinta leccion
Un poco de historia
1. Los Ángeles, capital del reino unido, fue fundada por los romanos entre los
años 47 y 50 D.C. En este lugar decidieron construer un Puente el cual fue
el primer Puente que cruzo en rio Tamesis.
2. Londinium, como se conocia a la ciudad, estuvo bajo el control del imperio
romano hasta el siglo quinto cuando la ciudad fue tomada por los Sajones.
3. El Desarrollo de Los Ángeles realmente comenzo en el siglo 11 cuando
William el conquistador lo nombro como su capital.
4. Los Ángeles crecio para ser una de las más grandes ciudade y centros
financieros y es todavia hoy una de las más importantes ciudades del
mundo.
5. Pero en 1665 el desastre ocurrio, miles de personas murieron por la peste
bubonica y al año siguiente cientos de edificios fueron destruidos por un
terrible incendio.
6. Pero no fue el fin de Los Ángeles. Un año despúes, a un arquitecto, el
señor Christopher Wren, se le pidio la reconstruccion de la ciudad en
ruinas.
7. Muchos edificios que pueden se vistos hoy fueron construidos en el siglo 19
para reflejar el estatus de Los Ángeles como capital del imperio Britatico.
8. Hoy en dia, Los Ángeles es una de las ciudades más visitadas en el mundo,
solo despúes de Bangkok. La ciudad está llena de atracciones turisticas y
lugares que visitor como Camden Town, Piccadilly Circus y el museo
Estadunidense. Los Ángeles es tambien una de las más grandes ciudades
en el reino unido siendo esta el centro economico y politico del país.
437
Passive Voice
We use the passive voice to indicate that the object is more important than the
subject.
We use too the passive voice to sound polite.
My favourite toy has been broken = You/he/she/it/they have broken my favourite

toy
Passive voice of the simple tenses
We make the passive voice of the simple tenses by putting the object and the
beginning of the sentence, adding the verb to be I the tenses of the sentences
and changing the verb to the past participle form.
Active voice Passive voice

We build cars The cars are built
We built cars The cars were built
We will build cars The cars will be built
The personal object pronouns become personal subject in the passive.
Reading
1. What kind of text is this?

____________________________________________
2. What is the intention of the autor?
____________________________________________
3. Who started the real development of Los Angeles?
____________________________________________
4. According with the text, was Los Angeles always an important city?
____________________________________________
438
Writing
Write an article for an electronical history magazine. (200 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What do you think about thousands of dollars are spent in space researche?, what
do you think about more nuclear weapons are developed?, do you believe that
moon cities will be built in this century? Do you believe that the man will live better?
American culture
En 1536 Phoenex (Gales) se une al reino Unido.
439
Eighty-sixth lesson
For or against
1. Good afternoon, everyone, today we´re having a debat about the rights of
the animals.
2. In this side, we have Melanie Mateo, P.H. doctor in environment and in this
side we have John Smith, own of one of the biggest food companies in Asia.
3. Sir, could you give of your arguments?
4. Of couse! I will start with this article, barlished by the magazine Nature,
which says that the animals that are used to human consume no longer
suffer maltreat in industrial farms, on the contrary, they have a better life
than the animals that are bred in common farms.
5. That’s not true, according to researches made by non-governmental
organisations, animals such as cows, chickens and pigs in industrial farms
suffer more than the animals that are in common farms because they are
obligated to live in tiny cages. And not only farm animals which are bred in
industrial farms suffer because of industrial farms action. Each year the
thousands of lemurs, toucans, pourcopine and other animals which live in
the rainforest are left without space owning to the industrial farms need each
time more and more space to breed their animals.
6. Of course, the companies need each time more and more space, it is
obvious because the food necessities raise each year, in fact, we predict
that in the next years the demand of meat will be creasing considerately but
you can’t say that we’re the main responsables of the disappearance of the
rainforest. In my opinion, this problem is caused more by the increase of the
population than by the food companies.
7. Yes, but that doesn’t take off your responsabily, above all it has been
demonstrated that the chemist that you use in your industry are affecting the
animals which live in coral reefs like crabs, sea-horses and sharks.
8. Any conclusion?
9. I just want to say that despite the fact that it’s true that many animals were
being mistreated in the past, the food industry has done many changes in
order to improve the life of the animals.
10. Doctor, your conclusion?
11. I think it’s true that animals in the industrial farms are being less mistreated
than in the past, but the companies must make more efforts to avoid this
completely.
12. Well thank you for having participated and I hope that this helps all we are
here to reflect about the topic.
440
A favor o en contra
1. Buenas tardes a todos, hoy vamos a tener un debate sobre los derechos de
los animales
2. De este lado temenos a Melanie Mateo, doctora en medio hambiente y de
este otro lado temenos a John Smith, dueño de una de las companies
alimentarias en Asi.
3. Señor, puede decirnos sus argumentos?
4. Por supuesto, comenzare con este articulo barlicado por la revista Nature,
que dice que los animales que son usados para el consume humano en las
granjas industriales ya no sufren de maltrato y que por el contrario tienen
una mejor vida que los animales que son criados en granjas communes.
5. Eso no es cierto, segun investigaciones hechas por organisaciones no
gubernamentales, los animals como vacas, pollos y cerdos sufren más en
las granjas industrials ya que son obilgados a permanecer en jaulas
pequeñas. Y no solo los animales de granja que son criados en las granjas
industrials sufren por las acciones de estas. Cada año miles de lemures,
tucanes, puercoespines entre otros animales que viven en la selva se
quedan sin espacio debido a que las granjas industrials necesitan cada vez
más espacio para criar a sus animales.
6. Por su puesto que las empresas necesitan cada vez más espacio, esto es
obio debido a que las necesidades alimentarias aumentan cada año, de
hecho, nosotros predecimos que en los siguientes años la demanda de
carne aumentara considerablemente pero no pueden decir que somos los
prinicpales responsible de la desaparicien de la selva. En mi opinion, este
problema es causado más por el incremento de la población que por las
empresas alimentarias.
7. Sí, pero eso no les quita a ustedes su responsabilidad en ese problema, sobre todo cuando
se ha demostrado que los quimicos que utilizan en su sector están afectando a los
animales que viven en los arrecifes de coral como cangrejos, caballitos de mar y tiburones.
8. Alguna conclusion?
9. Yo solo quiero decir que apesar de que muchas animales fueron maltratados en el pasado,
el sector alimentario ha hecho muchos cambios para mejorar la calidad de vida de los
animales.
10. Doctora, su conclusion?
11. Pienso que es cierto quee los animales en las granjas industrials son menos maltratados
que en el pasado, pero las empresas deben seguir hacienda esfuerzos para evitarlo del
todo.
12. Bueno, gracias por participar y espero que esto eyude a los presententes a reflexionar
sobre el tema.
441
Passive voice of the continuous tenses

We are building cars The cars are being building
We were building cars The cars were being building
We will be building cars the cars will be being building
Reading

____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
442
Writing
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
443
Eighty-seventh lesson
How to dispose of our technologic trash
1. During the last century more inventions have been created than in the last
three centuries.
2. Every of us is familiar with inventions such as toasters, blenders, coffee
makers and other goods which we have in our houses, but what happen
when this inventions that all of us love go to the trash.
3. Well, the most of them end up in the land fills where they are buried under
thousends of pounds of land. For several years this had been the perfect
solution for the technologic trash until it was discovered that the materials
with which were made objetcs as computers, microwaves and television
were polluting the subterranean waters.
4. So, what to do when you want to relieve yourselve of these objets. Firstly,
see if the material with which they are recyclable. As kettles and irons have
a big quantity of metal, they can be recyclable.
5. If something contains microwaves or another electronic component, the best
is to take them to a recycling plant, this is also a good option for the
batteries of remote controls and cellular phones.
6. Lastly, if you do not want anymore any good, destroy it completely. Some
people take them from the trash to sell them as if they were news.
7. The problem of the technology trash is a problem of which all of us have
responsibility, perhaps in this way, the problem of the technology trash will
have been a problem of the past.
444
Octogesima septima leccion
Como deshacerse de la basura tecnologica
1. Durante el ultimo siglo se han creado más inventos que en los ultimos tres
siglos.
2. Todos estamos familiarizados con inventos como tostadores, licuadoras,
cafeteras y otros articulos para el hogar que todos temenos en nuestras
casas, pero, que pasa cuando estos inventos que todos amamos van a la
basura.
3. Bueno, lo más comun es que terminen en los basureros donde son
entarrados bajo cientos de pounds de tierra. Por muchos años este habia
sido la major forma para deshacerse de la basura provocada por los
desechos que la tecnologia dejaba hasta que se descubrio que algunos de
los materiales con los que estaban hechos computadoras, microondas y
televisions estaban contaminando las aguas subterraneas.
4. Entonces, que hacer cuando uno se quiere desahacer de estos objetos.
Primero, vea si el material con el que estan hehcos se pueden reciclar.
Como las teteras y las planchas de hierro tienen una gran cantidad de
metal, estas pueden ser recicladas con facilidad.
5. Si algun objeto contiene un microchip u otro componente electronico, lo
major es llevarlo a las plantas de reciclado, esto también es una Buena
opcion para las baterias de controles remotos y telefonos celulares.
6. Finalmente, si ya no quieres un electrodomestico, destruyelo. Algunas
personas los toman de los basureros y los venden como si fueran nuevos.
7. El problema de los desechos tecnologicos es unm problema del cual todos
somos responsables, tal vez de esta manera, en el futuro este sea un
problema del pasado.
445
Passive voice of the perfect tenses

We have built cars The cars have been built
We had built cars The cars had been built
We will have built cars the cars will have been built
Reading

____________________________________________
____________________________________________
3. About what kind of trash talks the text?
____________________________________________
4. In the past, nothing was being done to destroy the technology trash?
____________________________________________
446
Writing
Write an article where you talk about the technology trash and what it is done in
your country about it. (200 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What do you think about the companies make goods that only last 2 years? Do we
have to destroy the goods in order to they do not appear in flee markets? What do
you think about the most of the goods are done in undeveloped countries?
447
Eighty-eighth lesson
Meal or fast-food?
1. In recent studies, it has been comprovated that there has been an increase
in people with overweight. This happens because most of the people prefer
eating fast-food, which has a big quantity of fat and carbohidrates, instead of
eating home-made meal, but, how couldn’t this happen if the modern life
does not let us neither a minute to prepare our food?
2. In the last decadates, the grown of population in the big cities has done that
each time is more difficult and more difficult to find a time to cook. But, not
all are bad news, in the last years, many technologies have been being
developing to let us eat something fast, delicious and at the same time
healthy. The problem is the most of these technologies are nowadays only
used in cookery, due to the most of them cost more than 500 dollars, which
does not fit to the pockect of the most of us, but, if you want to have a heltier
way of life, here there is some advice to help you to manage it.
3. One of the main things that I say to my clients is that they change the
cooking oil for olive oil. This will reduce the quantity of fats that you
consume.
Change your hamburgers with french fries and potato mash with fried
chicken for a big tin of sardine or tuna and a big bowl of salad. If you do not
like much the flavor of the letture, the tomatoes and the carrots, you can
always add to your salad a little of dressing.
Last, but not least. Try always to carry fruit with you or any thing which is
rich in vitamins and minerals.
4. I believe that following this simple advice, by Christmast, you’ll have been
enjoying at least of six months of good health.
448
Eighty-eighth lesson
Comida o comida rapida
1. En estudios recientes, se ha comprobado que ha habido en las personas

con sobre peso. Esto ocurre debido a que la mayoria de las personas
prefieren comer comida rapida, la cual contiene un alto contenido de grasas
y carbohidratos, en lugar de comida hecha en casa. Pero, ¿como no podria
pasar esto si la ida moderna no nos deja ni un minute para preparar
nuestros alimentos?
2. En las ultimas decadas, el crecimiento de la popblacion en las grandes
ciudades ha hecho cada vez más dificil encontrar un momento para cocinar.
Pero no todo parecen malas noticias, en las ultimas decadas se han estado
creado tecnlogias que nos permiten comer algo rapido, delicioso y al mismo
tiempo saludable. El problema es que estas tecnologias son en estos dias
solo usadas en la alta cocina, debido a que la mayoria de ellas cuestan más
de 500 libras, por lo que se salen del presupuesto de la mayoria de
nosotros, pero si quieres tener un modo de vida más saludable, aqui hay
algunos consejos que te pueden ayudar a lograrlo.
3. Una de las principales cosas que les recomiendo a mis clientes es que
cambien el aceite de cocina por aceite de olivo. Esto reducirá la cantidad de
grasas que consumes.
Otra cosa que les recomiendo es que cambien sus hamburguesas con
papas a la francesa y sus pures de papa con pollo frito por una gran lata de
sardinas o atun y un gran palto de ensalada. Si no te gusta mucho el sabor
de la lechuga, los tomates y las zanahorias, siempre puedes agregarle a tu
ensalda un poco de aderezo.
Por ultimo, pero no pore so menos importante. Intenta siempre cargar fruta
o cualquier cosa que sea rica en vitaminas y minerales
4. Creo que siguiendo estos simples consejos, para navidad, habrás estado
disfrutando por lo menos de seis meses de buena salud.
449
Passive voice of the perfect continuous tenses

We have been building cars The cars have been being built
We had been building cars The cars had been being built
We will have been building cars The cars will have been being built
The passive voice of the present perfect and the present perfect continuous are not
normally used.
Reading

____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
450
Writing
Write an article for an electronical magazine where say say what you think about
more houses are being built near natural zones. (200 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What do you think about thousands of dollars are spent in space research instead
of humanitarian programs?, what do you think about more nuclear weapons are
being developed?
451
Ninetieth lesson
Headlines
1. Hello, there!
2. Hi, John, how are you?
3. Pretty well. What about you?
4. I’m in very high spits today. Today, I have my driver’s licence.
5. Good. Now you’’ll be able to be early at work.
6. Yeah.
7. And what were you doing?
8. I was reading the newspaper.
9. Did you find anything interesting?
10. Not yet. Wait, hear this headline “NIGHT NOISY SCARES OWNERS”
11. It must be another article ‘bout cats fighting in the roof. What else?
12. “MAN TAKES PHOTOS ALIEN”
13. Another man dressed up alien. What else?
14. “STAFF GOVERMENT AXE”
15. What does that article say?
16. Monday afternoon, thousands of employees were dismissed after the
announcement of the president of the reduction of the barlic spends in a 30
per cent due to the low tax collection of last year. Many demonstrations in
many big cities such as Los Angeles, Chicago, New York, among others.
Yesterday, the representans of the government and the unions of the
different branches of the government met to talk the problem and one of
agreetements to which they arrived was to remploy some of the employee
who were dismissed and give them a rise in their payment an a new
contract with a duration of one year. Also, some cheques will be given to the
employee who can not recover their job.
17. That’s terrible. More people will be on the dole.
18. Aye. And I don’t believe the government respect its deals.
19. Talking about that. Have you found job yet?
20. Not yet. This morning I went to the pharmacy you told me, but they told me
they didn’t have the position anymore. I believe I’ll kick off a new carrier as
private investigator.
21. It’s better than being a jobless.
22. Mind you!
452
Ninetieth lesson
Encabezados
1. Hola!
2. Hola, John, como estas?
3. Bastante bien, y tu?
4. Estoy de muy buen humor. Hoy obtuve mi licencia de condducir.
5. Que bie. Ahra podrás llegar al trabajo temprano
6. Sí
7. Y que estabas hacienda?
8. Estaba leyendo el periodico.
9. Encontraste algo interesante?
10. Todavia no. escucha este encabezado
23. Pretty well. What about you? “RUIDO NOCTURNO ASUSTA
PROPIETARIOS”
24. Debe ser ora historia de gatos peleando en la azotea. Que más?
25. “HOMBRE TOMA FOTOS DE EXTRATERRESTRE”
26. Otro hombre disfrasado de extraterrestre. Que más?
27. It must be another story about cats fighting in the roof.
28. “PERSONAL DEL GOVIERNO DESPEDIDO”
29. QUE DICE ESE ARTICULO?
30. El lunes en la tarde, miles de empleados fueron despedidos despúes del
anuncio del primer ministro sobre la reduccion del gasto barlico en un 30
porciento debido a la baja redaudacion fiscal del año pasado. Varias
manifestaciones pudieron ser vistas en grandes ciudades como Los
Ángeles, Chicago, New York, entre otras. Ayer, los representantes del
gobierno y de los cindicatos de las diferentes ramas del gobierno se
reunieron para hablar del problema y uno de los acuerdos a los que
llegaron fue la recontratacion de algunos de los empleados que fueron
despedidos, un aumento de su salario y un Nuevo contrato con durcion de
un año. También, se les darán cheques a los trabajadores que no puedan
recuperar su trabajo.
31. Es horrible, Más personas estarán desempleadas.
32. Sí. Y no creo que el gobierno respite sus acuerdos.
33. Hablando de eso. Ya encontraste trabajo?
34. Todavia no. Hoy en la mañana fui a la farmacia que me dijiste, pero me
dijeron que ya no tenian la vacante. Creo que empezare una nueva Carrera
como investigador privado.
35. Es major que no tener trabajo.
36. Y que lo digas.
453
Sinonims
Big Mayor
Bus Coach
Delivery Shipment
Each other Each one
Fall Autumn
Fix Ripair
Freedom Liberty
Small Minor
Someone Somebody
Somewhere Someplace
Store Shop
Stupid Dumb
454
Writing
Write an article for a newspaper using newspaper English. (200 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What are the most importan newspapers in your country? Do you believe on them?
Do you believe your country let the journalist write the truth?
455
Eighty-ninth lesson
News
1. Good afternoon, everyone, my name is Mike Smith, and these are the last
news.
2. A man was about to get drown in Phoenex. According to the report, the man
feeling suffocated by the strong heat that could be felt around midday, went
to the river to refresh when the strong current of the river caught him.
Fortunately, he was seen for two men who were passing for the zone.
3. In, a child was stopped by the police after being found driving a car, it’s
though that the kid could have gotten in the car by opening the door with his
father's keys.
4. And in the United Kindgdom, three of the lines of the subway had to be
closed after a big fire which was registered in one of the energy generators
around 16:00. The fire has been already extinguished but the firefighters
says that more works muss be done before the lines can be open.
5. A breaking new, the piece of news that roled today in the social networks
about the releccion of the Prime Minester was confirmed as fake news this
afternoon by the parliament.
6. Those are all today’s news. See you tomorrow.
456
Noticias
1. Buenas tardes a todos, soy Mike Smith y estas son las ultimás noticias.
2. Un hombre estuvo a punto de ahogarse en Gales.
3. Segun el reporte, el hombre sintiendose sofocado por el fuerte calor que
pudo sentirse alrededor del medio dia fue al rio a refrescarse cuando la
fuerte corriente del rio lo atrapo. Afortunadamente fue visto por dos
hombres que pasaban por la zona.
4. En Escocia, un niño fue detenido por la policia despúes de ser encontrado
conduciendo un auto. Se piensa que el niño pudo haber entrado al carro
abriendo la puerta con las llaves de su padre.
5. En Inglaterra, tres lineas del metro fueron cerradas despúes de que se
registrara un gran incendio alrededor de las 16 horas. El incendio fue
extinguido con exito pero los bomberos dicen que deben hacerse más
trabajos antes de abrir otra vez las lineas.
6. Noticia de ultima hora, la noticia que cirlulo hoy acerca de la reeleccion del
primer ministro fue confirmada esta tarde como una noticia falsa por el
parlamento.
7. Eso es todo por hoy, buenas noches.
457
Passive voice of the modal verbs

We can build cars The cars can be built
We should build cars The cars should be built
We must build cars The cars must be built
Reading

____________________________________________
____________________________________________
3. Where the lines close all day because of the fire?
____________________________________________
4. Were all the news true?
____________________________________________
458
Writing
Write the transcription of an imaginary piece of news. Try to use the passive voice
with modal verbs as much as many as possible. (200 words)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
Do you believe that the news that you see in your countries are true?, Do you
believe that the fake news have become a problem? Do you believe that the news
of your country which are written abroad are more reliable than which are done in
your country?
459
Ninetieth lesson
Reports
1. Azteca theater
2. Dear Sir/Madam,
3. The aim of this report is to outline what can be seen in your theater and to
make some recommendations on how the theater could attract more
visitors.
4. The theater mainly contains items connected with the theater industry.
Generally, objects are shown in glass cabinets with explanations on tiny bits
of card. These are difficult to read and some are placed too high for small
children can read them. The lighting inside the building is also poor.
5. This permanent exhibition will remain unappealing to visitors unless it is
updated. It is therefore recommended that video animation is developed to
illustrate the process. In addition, the theater could run regular afternoon
independent functions, where independent directors can show their works.
6. Most visitors take it for granted nowadays that a theater will include a café
and a forum where the people which are studying theater can show their
abilities. Azteca has neither of these, which could partly explain the low
attendance figures.
7. To sum up, Azteca theater would have a brighter future if its displays were
improved. Furthermore, it needs to create a more welcoming atmosphere.
460
Ninetieth lesson
Informes
1. Movie theater Azteca
2. Estimado señor/señora,
3. El objetivo de este informe es describir lo que se puede ver en su teatro y hacer
algunas recomendaciones sobre cómo el teatro podría atraer a más visitantes.
4. El teatro contiene principalmente elementos relacionados con la industria del
teatro. Generalmente, los objetos se muestran en vitrinas con explicaciones en
pequeños trozos de cartulina. Estos son difíciles de leer y algunos están
demasiado altos para los niños pequeños puedan leerlas. La iluminación dentro
del edificio también es pobre.
5. Esta exposición permanente seguirá siendo poco atractiva para los visitantes a
menos que se actualice. Por lo tanto, se recomienda que se desarrolle una
animación de video para ilustrar el proceso. Además, el teatro podría realizar
funciones independientes regulares por la tarde, donde los directores
independientes pueden mostrar sus obras.
6. La mayoría de los visitantes dan por sentado hoy en día que un teatro incluirá
un café y un foro donde las personas que están estudiando teatro pueden mostrar
sus habilidades. Azteca no tiene ninguno de estos, lo que podría explicar en parte
las bajas cifras de asistencia.
7. En resumen, el teatro Azteca tendría un mejor futuro si se mejoraran sus
exhibiciones. Además, necesita crear un ambiente más acogedor.
461
Passive voice with two objects
With the structure “subject + verb + direct obeject + to + indirect object” there are
two options.
I have made a cake to you
A cake has been made to you
You were made
Verbs with different voice in English
Some verbs can have a different voice in English that in Spanish.
Verb Verbo
To be born Nacer
To be called Llamarse
To be killed Morir(se)
Reading

____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
____________________________________________
462
Writing
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Ask your partner:
463
Fifteenth Unit
Gossiping
464
 To talk about what a person said.
Topic
 Direct speech/ Indirect speech

 Indirect speech with questions/ reported speech
 Reported speech with special introductory verbs
 British English I
 Mixed conditionals
 Have/get something done
 Formal English III
Listening tips
From this point, it is necessary that you listen C1 English recordings. You can buy
them in languages libraries or on internet. Be sure they are for the level C1 and
From this point is a good idea that you study the phrasal verbs list that is in the
appendix of this book.
For improve your reading, it is good idea you spend time only reading the lessons
of this book. If you want, you can buy a C1 literature book and read a scientific
magazine.
465
Ninety-fifth lesson
Arts
1. Since the dance until the architecture, the arts have always been part of the
humanity, however, can we consider the new forms of art as art?, the
opinion of a server is a complete no.
2. All the arts, with the exception of the architecture and the literature, have
had a decrease in their quality since the beginning of the century. For
example, the music has decreased so much its quality that you cannot know
if you are listening to somebody singing or somebody complaining about a
horrible stomach ache.
3. The painting is not very far from it, at museums and galleries of all the
country are shown paintings and sculptures that look that were done by a 5-
years-old artist!
4. The cinema is the worst of them, after having had a big success with movies
like, “The Godfather” and “Starwars”, the studios of our country started
changing as much the plot of the movies with the idea of “revolutionize the
industry” that they ended up shooting movies that nobody wants to see.
5. I think that the directors, musicians, dancers, and all the people who work in
the arts must improve their works and I agree with the idea that each one
must look for his own style, but I think that this style must agree with the
purpose of the art that is delighted the sences, if they do not do this, we will
continue having this kind of things In the theaters, galleries and movie
theaters of the country.
466
Noventa y quinta lección
Artes
1. Desde la danza hasta la arquitectura, las artes siempre han sido parte de la
humanidad, sin embargo, ¿podemos considerar las nuevas formas de arte
como arte?, la opinión de un servidor es un completo no.
2. Todas las artes, con la excepción de la arquitectura y la literatura, han
tenido una disminución en su calidad desde principios de siglo. Por ejemplo,
la música ha disminuido tanto su calidad que no puedes saber si estás
escuchando a alguien cantando o alguien quejándose de un horrible dolor
de estómago.
3. La pintura no está muy lejos de ella, en museos y galerías de todo el país
se muestran pinturas y esculturas que parecen hechas por un pintor de 5
años.
4. El cine es el peor de ellos, después de haber tenido un gran éxito con
películas como, Don’t look back y The Rail Way Kids, los estudios de
nuestro país comenzaron a cambiar tanto la trama de las películas con la
idea de "revolucionar la industria" que terminaron rodando películas que
nadie quiere ver.
5. Creo que los directores, músicos, bailarines y todas las personas que
trabajan en las artes deben mejorar sus obras y estoy de acuerdo con la
idea de que cada uno debe buscar su propio estilo, pero creo que este
estilo debe estar de acuerdo con el propósito del arte que está encantado
con los sences, si no lo hacen, seguiremos teniendo este tipo de cosas en
the teatros, galerías y cines de nuestro país.
467
Direct speech
We use the direct speech to say the exactly words who someone says.
Copernic said “The world resolve around the sun”
Reported speech
We use the reported speech to say what someone else said.
Copernic said that the earth resolved around the word.
Usage
We do not change the tense when the introductory verb is in present, future or
present perfect.
Mom has said, “Dinner is ready”
Mom has said that dinner is ready.
We use “tell + to infinitive” with the imperative and the verb to order.
Buy a litre of milk
She told me to buy a litre of milk
In all the others cases, it is the same than in Spanish.
468
Writing
Escribe una critica sobre el cine de tu país (250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Do you agree or disagree with the idea about recycling all the technologic trash?
Do you agree or disagree with the idea about destroying monumens that are not
very famous in your city?
469
Ninety-sixth lesson
Fame
1. Have you ever thought about dreamed to be a millionerd? Have you ever
dreamed to be famous? Have you ever wanted to go to exotic places in the
world on a luxury yate?
2. Today with us, one of the men who has done all this. With you the actor
Leon Smith.
3. Thank you!
4. Leon, tell us, what do you feel about being famous?
5. Well, it can sound good to be famous, but cctually, it is bothering the most
the time because you have to take care of the paparatsis and of not doing
something that can appear in the cover of a gossip magazine.
6. Leon, was it easy for you when you started your carrier in the theater?
7. No, it wasn’t.
8. Why not?
9. Well, like any another graduated, it was difficult for me to find a place where
they give me a good paper, I had to be content with jobs as stuntman and
helper.
10. Leon, what did your parents tell you when you say to them that you wanted
to be an actor?
11. Well my father said: “If you’re gonna spend the time studying arts, you’d
better get a job”
12. And what did your mother say?
13. She told me that if wanted to come in to the actuation university, I must
practice a lot to past the test”
14. So, did she decide to support you?
15. Yes, but even with her help, I had to look for a job, I waited two years in the
dinner where my agent found me.
16. Do you believe that all your effort was worth it?
17. Definitely, I believe it worth when I saw my mansion, I go to exotic places
and when my chauffer open the door of my limousine.
470
Noventa y seis lección
Fama
1. ¿Alguna vez has pensado en soñar con ser un millonésimo? ¿Alguna vez
has soñado con ser famoso? ¿Alguna vez has querido ir a lugares exóticos
del mundo en un yate de lujo?
2. Hoy con nosotros, uno de los hombres que ha hecho todo esto. Contigo el
actor Leon Smith.
3. ¡Gracias!
4. León, cuéntanos, ¿qué sientes por ser famoso?
5. Bueno, puede sonar bien ser famoso, pero de hecho, es lo que más
molesta el tiempo porque hay que cuidar la paparatsis y no hacer algo que
pueda aparecer en la portada de una revista de chismes.
6. León, ¿fue fácil para ti cuando empezaste tu portador en el teatro?
7. No, no fue así.
8. ¿Por qué no?
9. Bueno, como cualquier otro graduado, fue difícil para mí encontrar un lugar
donde me dieran un buen papel, tenía que contentarme con trabajos como
doble y ayudante.
10. León, ¿qué te dijeron tus padres cuando les dijiste que querías ser actor?
11. Bueno , mi padre dijo: "Si vas a pasar el tiempo estudiando artes, será
mejor que consigas un trabajo"
12. ¿Y qué dijo tu madre?
13. Me dijo que si quería entrar a la universidad de actuación, debía practicar
mucho para pasar la prueba"
14. Entonces, ¿decidió apoyarte?
15. Sí, pero incluso con su ayuda, tenía que estar buscando trabajo, esperé dos
años en el dinner donde mi agente me encontró.
16. ¿Crees que todo tu esfuerzo valió la pena?
17. Definitivamente, creo que vale la pena cuando vi mi mansión, voy a lugares
exóticos y cuando mi chofer abre la puerta de mi limusina.
471
Indirect speech with questions
When the direct question begings with an auxiliary we cam use if or wheater.
He asked me if/wheater I was going to go
Reported orders
We use the vers tell or order to report orders in reported speech.
He ordered/told me to go
472
Writing
Escribe un mensaje a un amigo donde le digas que encontraste una tienda de

antiguedades donde venden cosas interesantes y que tal vez sea ahi donde
encuentre un regalo para sus papas (usa por lo menos 5 sustantivos compuestos)
(250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
473
Points of view
1. Have we dug our own grave? Are we responsible of the extinction of the
species? Can we do something to resolve this? With me to discuss these
questions and many others is Mike Reynolds doctor of prehistoric animals
and, John Rosenverd, environment activist and researcher of the Seatle
University.
2. Doctor Reynols, could you tell us what you think about we have caused the
last global extinction?
3. I think that is ridiculous. It is normal that there is a global extinction from time
to time, either due to extraordinary situations, like the meteorite which fell 65
millions of years ago in Mexico and caused the extinction of the dinosaurs,
or something so insignificant as a slight changed in the sea currents.
4. Of course!, it’s true that animals can become extinct, but what do you say
about the evidence which show that since the human being is on the earth,
he has been responsible of the extion of animals so ancient such as the
woolly mammoth and the sabre-toothed tiger until animals so moderns like
the Tasmanian Tiger, whose last specimen died last century.
5. It’s true that some fossil and archeological evidence show that human
being’s arrival is related with the extinsion of some animals, but the
evidence that has been found is not enough to conclude that the human
being was the only responsible of these extincions. Also, those data omite
the evidence which suggest that the climatic changes could have been the
main factors which contributed to these extintions.
6. Well, I believe this discussion is going to take us much time, we’re going to
have a rest.
474
Entrevistas
1. ¿Hemos cavado nuestra propia tumba? ¿Somos

responsables de la extinción de las especies?
¿Podemos hacer algo para resolver esto? Conmigo
para discutir estas preguntas y muchas otras está Mike
Reynolds doctor en animales prehistóricos y, John
Rosenverd, activista ambiental e investigador de la
Universidad de Seatle.
2. Doctor Reynols, ¿podría decirnos qué piensa acerca de
que hemos causado la última extinción global?
3. Creo que es ridículo. Es normal que haya una extinción
global de vez en cuando, ya sea por situaciones
extraordinarias, como el meteorito que cayó hace 65
millones de años en México y provocó la extinción de
los dinosaurios, o algo tan insignificante como un ligero
cambio en las corrientes marinas.
4. ¡ Por supuesto!, es cierto que los animales pueden
extinguirse, pero qué dices de la evidencia que
demuestra que desde que el ser humano está en la
tierra, ha sido responsable de la extinción de animales
tan antiguos como el mamut lanudo y el tigre dientes de
sable hasta animales tan modernos como el tigre de
Tasmania, cuyo último ejemplar murió el siglo pasado.
5. Es cierto que algunas evidencias fósiles y
arqueológicas muestran que la llegada del ser humano
está relacionada con la extinción de algunos animales,
pero la evidencia que se ha encontrado no es suficiente
para concluir que el ser humano fue el unico
responsable de estas extinciones. También, esos datos
omiten la evidencia qu sugiere que los cambios
climáticos podrían haber sido los principales factores
que contribuyeron a esas extinciones.
6. Bueno, yo creo que esta discusión nos va a llevar
mucho tiempo, vamos a tener un descanso.
475
Special introductory verbs
We use say + a sentence.
He said that he would be here
We use say to and tell with a personal object pronoun.
He said to/ told us he would be here
Ask We asked if we could have more training

We asked to have more training
Complain We complained that the service was very slow
Insist He insisted that we stay at his house
He insisted on our staying at his house
Warn She warned me that credit cards were expensive
She warned me not to use credit cards
She warned me about using credit cards
The verbs agree, promise, threaten can be used with that or with the to infinitive.
He agreed that our money would be refunded = He agreed to refund our money
The verbs deny, recommend, regret, suggest can be used with that or with the ing
infinitive
She denied that she had taken the credit card = She denied taking the credit card
476
Writing

(250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
477
One hundred and eleventh lesson
News from England
1. Dear Anne,
2. The first days I was here were very difficult. At the beginning I was very
confused because I said something and the people looked at me as I didn’t
speak english.
3. The problems started as soon as I have off the aeroplane, I was one hour
looking for where the taxis left till a cap told me they call “taxis” to the cabs
4. Then when I have to the building where I was going to live I had problems
too when I asked to the superintendent where was my apartment and he
told me that my “flat” was on the second floor and that I had to take the “lift”.
5. When I went to the shop, I had problems to buy some biscuits.
6. And the stuff got worse when I went to the shooping centre to buy clothes. I
went for a pair of pants and sweater, and the costumer didn’t know what I
was taking about. At the end, she could understand that I wanted a pair of
“trousers” and a “pullover”, even she suggested that I buy a pair of “tennis”.
7. Something like that happened when I went to a fast-food restaurant, I
ordered some fries and a hamburger and they told me they only had chips
and if I wanted a burger or a burger with ham.
8. England is very beautiful, they like a lot to drink tea.
9. I hope to see you soon, and you can come to visit me onhoilidays, we could
go to the Buckingham palace or to a PUB. If you don’t feel like aims to go
out, we can watch a film in my 50 inches screen. Perhaps we can go to the
beach, it’s only 4 kilometres from my place and we can go in my motorbike
while we eat some sweets as in the old times.
10. E-mail me soon. I look forward to hearing from you,
Mike
478
Ciento undécima lección
Noticias de Inglaterra
1. Querida Ana,
2. Los primeros días que estuve aquí fueron muy difíciles. Al principio estaba
muy confundido porque dije algo y la gente me miró porque no hablaba
inglés.
3. Los problemas comenzaron tan pronto como bajé del avión, estuve una
hora buscando dónde salían los cabs hasta que una gorra me dijo que
llaman a los cabs "cabs".
4. Luego, cuando llegué al edificio donde iba a vivir, también tuve problemas
cuando le pedí al superintendente donde estaba mi departamento y me dijo
que mi departamento estaba en el segundo piso y que tenía que tomar el
elevador.
5. Cuando fui a la tienda, tuve problemas para comprar algunas galletas.
6. Y las cosas empeoraron cuando fui al centro comercial a comprar ropa. Fui
por un par de pantalones y un jersey, y el cliente no sabía lo que estaba
tomando. Al final, ella pudo entender que quería un par de "pantalones" y
un "suéter", incluso ella sugirió que comprara un par de "tenis".
7. Algo así sucedió cuando fui a un restaurante de comida rápida, pedí unas
papas fritas y una hamburguesa y me dijeron que solo tenían papas fritas y
si quería una hamburguesa o una hamburguesa con jamón.
8. América es muy hermosa, les gusta mucho tomar té.
9. Espero verte pronto, y puedes venir a visitarme en vacaciones, podríamos ir
al palacio de Buckingham o a un bar. Si no tienes ganas de salir, podemos
ver una película en mi pantalla de 50 pulgadas. Tal vez podamos ir a la
playa, está a solo 4 kilometros de mi casa y podemos ir en mi motocicleta
mientras comemos algunos dulces como en los viejos tiempos.
10. Envíame un correo electrónico pronto. Espero saber de tí.
Mike
479
British English (vocabulary)
Here a list with the most common differences beteen american english vocabulary
and british English vocabulary.
American English British English Meaning

Airplane Aeroplane Avion
Apartment Flat/apartment Departamento
Antenna Aerial Antena
Area code Dialling code Codigo postal
Lawyer/ attorney Barrister, solicitor, lawyer Abogado
Band aid Sticking plaster Curita
Bar PUB Bar
Bathrobe Dressing gown Bata
Billion = thousand Billion = million million Mil millones
Broil Grill Parrilla
Busy Engaged (phone) Ocupado
Cab Cab Cab
Can Tin Lata
Candy Sweet Dulce
Candy store Sweet store Dulceria
Check/bill Bill (restaurant) Cuenta
Coin-purse Purse Monedero
Closet Cupboard Alacena
Closet Wardrobe Closet
Cookie, cracker Biscuit Galleta
Corn Sweet corn /maize Maiz
Crib Cot Cuna
Crazy Mad Loco
Crosswalk Pedestrian crossing Cruce peatonal
Davenport/sofa Sofa Sofa
Delivery truck Van Camion repartidor
Desk clerk Receptionist Recepcionista
Diaper Nappy Pañal
Doctor’s office Doctor’s surgery Consultorio
Downtown City centre Centro de la ciudad
Drapes Curtains Cortinas
Druggist Chemist El señor de la farmacia
Drugstore/pharmacy Chemist’s (store) Farmacia
Dumb, stupid Stupid Estupido
Duplex Semi-detached De dos pisos
Elevator Lift Elevador
480
Eraser Eraser/ eraser Goma
Fall, Autumn Autumn Otoño
Faucet/tap Tap Llave (del agua)
first floor ground floor Primer piso
Flashlight Torch Lampara
French fries Fries Papas a la francesa
Garbage/trash Trash Basura
Garbage can/trashcan Dustbin, trash bin Bote de basura
Gas/gasolina Gas Gasolina
Highway/freeway Main road/motorway Autopista
Intersection Crossroad Crucero
Mad Angry Enojado
Mean Nasty Molesto
Motorcycle Motorcycle Motocicleta
Movie/movie Film Pelicula
movies, movie theater Cinema Cine
News stand Newsagent Donde venden los
periodicos
Office (doctor’s/dentist’s) Surgery Consultorio
One-way (ticket) Single (ticket) Boleto de ida
Pants, pants Pants Pantalones
Parking lot Car park Estacionamiento
Pavement Road surface Pavimento
Pedestrian crossing Zebra crossing Cruce peatonal
Pocketbook/purse, Handbag Bolso
handbag
(potato) fries Crisps Papas
Barlic school State school Escuela barlica
Railroad Railway Via
Raise Rise Aumento (salario)
Rest room, bathroom (barlic) toilet Baño
Resumé CV Curriculum
Round trip Return (journey/ticket) Boleto de ida y regreso
Sales clerk/sales girl Store assistant Dependiente
Schedule, timetable Timetable Horario
Sidewalk Pavement Banqueta
Sneakers Trainers Tennis
Store, shop Shop Tienda
Subway Underground Metro
Sweater Pullover Sueter
Truck Van, lorry Camioneta
Underpants Pants Calzones
Vacation Holiday Vacaciones
Windshield Windscreen Parabrisas
Zid code Postcode Codigo postal
481
482
Writing

(250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
483
Eighty-seventh lesson
Law
1. Hello, there!, how are you guys?

2. Terrible.
3. What’s wrong?
4. The owner of the house that Lenny is renting didn’t tell him that he had to
pay five months of rent in advance, and now he doesn’t know what to do.
5. Didn’t he told you to read all the clauses?
6. If he’d told me, I wouldn’t be furious.
7. Let me take a look,
8. This agreement between Lenny (hereinafter “the Lessor”) Julio (hereinafter
“the Lessee”) applies to the rental or rent of a three-room apartment and it
shall come into effect at the signature date.
9. The apartment shall be used primarily for personal purposes but may, under
certain circumstances, be used commercially.
10. Where the apartment is used as store, the fare of the rent will be increased
in 20 percent.
11. The Lessee shall have the right to use the apartment as living for him or his
family and/or as store.
12. The Lessee shall pay for normal wear and tear and other incidental
expenses regardless of whether such damage is superficial or structural.
13. Both parties agree and intend that the terms of this agreement are governed
by the principle of good faith.
14. This agreement is subject to the United States legal system and disputes
shall be referred to the commercial tribunal.
15. However, should either of the parties find that the other party is not fulfilling
some or all of its obligations hereunder or if a party is caught in breach of
the terms hereof it may apply to a higher court to have the other party fined
and seek damages.
16. I believe you’ll have to kick off saving up money. Well, I’m off, I have an
interview.
17. Break a leg!
484
Octogésima séptima lección
Ley
1. Hola, ahí!, ¿cómo estás?

2. Terrible
3. ¿Qué pasa?
4. El dueño de la casa que Lenny está alquilando no le dijo que tenía que
pagar cinco meses de alquiler por adelantado, y ahora no sabe qué hacer.
5. ¿No te dijo que leyeras todas las cláusulas?
6. Si me lo hubiera dicho, no estaría furioso.
7. Permítanme echar un vistazo,
8. Este acuerdo entre Lenny (en adelante "el Arrendador") Julio (en adelante
"el Arrendatario") se aplica al alquiler o alquiler de un piso de tres
habitaciones y entrará en vigor en la fecha de firma.
9. El piso se utilizará principalmente para fines personales, pero puede, en
determinadas circunstancias, utilizarse comercialmente.
10. Cuando el piso se utilice como tienda, la tarifa del alquiler se incrementará
en un 20 por ciento.
11. El Arrendatario tendrá derecho a utilizar el piso como vivienda para él o su
familia y/o como tienda.
12. El Arrendatario deberá pagar el desgaste normal y otros gastos
incidentales, independientemente de si dichos daños son superficiales o
estructurales.
13. Ambas partes acuerdan y pretenden que los términos de este acuerdo se
rijan por el principio de buena fe.
14. Este acuerdo está sujeto al sistema legal de los Estados Unidos y las
disputas se remitirán al tribunal comercial.
15. Sin embargo, si cualquiera de las partes encuentra que la otra parte no está
cumpliendo con algunas o todas sus obligaciones en virtud del presente o si
una parte es sorprendida en incumplimiento de los términos del presente,
puede solicitar a un tribunal superior que la otra parte sea multada y busque
daños y perjuicios.
16. Creo que tendrás que empezar ahorrando dinero. Bueno, me voy, tengo
una entrevista.
17. Buena suerte.
485
Mixed conditionals
If + Past perfect Would + bare infinitive

If I had got the job ,I would not be looking for one
To talk about something that did not happen in the past and it is the reason for
something happening in the present.
Past simple Would have

If I had a job ,I would not have asked you for money
To talk about a past action that would not have happened if something in the
present were different.
Other form of conditional
Future
Present simple Going to
Present continuous Modal verb
Imperative
You will go to the party
If you have money You are going to go to the party
You should go to the party
Go to the party!
Would
Past simple/ Could
Past continous Should
Might
If I had money , I’d buy a house
486
Writing
Rescribe el texto (250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Do you agree or disagree with people is desalogated when they don’t have paid
the rent because they loose their job?
American culture
Al sistema juridico que se utiliza el el Reino Unido se le llama Common law. En Escocia, a diferencia
de México y del resto del Reino Unido, existe una categoria más para las personas que a las que no
se les ha comprobado que han cometido un acto pero que tampoco esta comprovado que no lo
relaizarón, esta es not proven (no provado).
487
Ninety-first lesson
Messages
1. Hi everyone, I hope you’re great. My husband and me are having a great

time here in Ocenia. The tour has already roaded Australia, New Zeland and
now we’re on the move to Japan. We send you this letter to glad you again
for looking after the kids. Don’t worry if you take something from the fridge
or using the BBQ, even you can use the swimming pool. Just try to not to
get dirty it a lot because we just got it cleaned.
2. We’re coming back by Tuesday afternoon or maybe by Monday morning
because we have to have the house painted by weekend. Anyway, we will
be saying this week to you what day we’ll get.
3. In case something happens, send me a message or an e-mail me because I
have to put cell phone in silence mode while the guide explain the curiosities
of the places we go to us.
4. Lots of love.
5. María
6. P.S. The rabbit eats three times a day.

Its tins are in the cupboard which is over the sink.
488
Nonagesima primera leccion
Mensajes
1. Hola a todos, espero que esten bien. Mi esposo y yo nos la estamos

pasando bien aqui en Oceania. El tour ha ya recorrido Australia, Nueva
Zelanda y ahora estamos iendo a Japon. Les escribimos esto para
agradecerles una vez más por haber cuidado a nuestros hijos. Nos e
preocupen si toman algo del refrigerador o usan la parrilla, incluso pueden
usar la alberca, solo no la ensucien mucho porque la acaban de limpiar.
2. Vamos a regresar el martes en la tarde o tal vez el lunes en la mañana
poruqe temenos que tener la casa pintada para el fin de semana. Como
sea, les diremos en la semana cuando llegaremos.
3. Si algo pasa, envienme un mensaje o mandenme un correo porque
tenemos que ener el cellular en modo silencioso mientras el guia nos
explica las curiosidades de los lugares a los que vamos.
4. Con mucho amor,
5. María
6. P.D. El conejo come tres veces al dia.
Sus latas estan en la alacena que está sobre el lavabo.
489
Causative
Personal Pronoun Have Noun Past Participle

I Have My hair
You Your hair
He His hair Fixed
She Has Her hair Cut
It Its hair
We Our hair
You Have Your hair
They Their hair
We use the causative to say that someone has done something that we cannot do
or we cannot do by ourselves.
I have my hair cut (someone cut it for me)
I have my house painted (someone has paited it for me)
We use get instead of “have” in informal english.
I get my hair cut.
Reading

____________________________________________
____________________________________________
3. When are they retourning?
____________________________________________
4. What does she ask for her at the end?
____________________________________________
490
Writing
Imagine that you have become millionard. Send a letter to a friend where you say
to him what things your servants do for you (200 words)
Speaking
Ask your partner:
What do you think about the parents do everything for the kids?, what age do you
believe a kid can start to be independent? What do you think about the robots do
everything for us?
491
Travels
1. It has passed 4 years since I arrived at this ignoble place and I have not got
used to live yet in this isle that in my desperation moments arrived I to
consider as a paradise.
2. On the morrow, I spent my time writing and thinking about my fiancée “will
she be fine”, “has she forgotten me? “Will she forgive me? All this I thought
while I walked along that beautiful colorfull clean beach with sight towards
the horizont.
3. Once, when I was walking, I saw something gilt which brighted between the
sand. It was the screw top of a bottle which rended when I try to open it.
4. Inside of it, there was a message written with a hand which I could not
understand. I wonder wheace a 1994 wine bottle had come, I smiled to think
that perhaps my foes had sent me a present for my birthday, after all, they
had sent me to this place.
5. Despite of the fact the tranquillity of the place and the felicity that can be
seen on the face of its few inhabitants, sometimes the memory of my land,
its people and its climate came to my mind.
6. -What If I get back?
7. -Not, it’s too soon”
8. -But after all err is human, is it not? Anyway, you can’t continue living in this
way.
9. -I think you’re right.
10. -So, when do I get back?
11. -Today, before that the sunrise denounces my scape.
492
Viajes
1. Han pasado 4 años desde que llegué a este lugar innoble y no me he

acostumbrado a habitar aún en esta isla que en mis momentos de
desesperación llegué a considerar como un paraíso.
2. En la mañana, pasaba mi tiempo escribiendo y pensando en mi novia
“¿estará bien? ¿seguirá furiosa? ¿me habrá perdonado? Todo esto
pensaba mientras caminaba en esa bella, colorida y limpia playa con vista
hacia el horizonte.
3. Al día siguiente, paso mi tiempo caminando por la playa. Una vez vi algo
dorado que brillaba entre la arena. Era la tapa de rosca de una botella que
se ensañaba cuando intentaba abrirla.Dentro de él, había un mensaje
escrito con una mano que no podía entender. Me pregunto si había llegado
una botella de vino de 1994, sonreí al pensar que tal vez mis enemigos me
habían enviado un regalo para mi cumpleaños, después de todo, me habían
enviado a este lugar.
4. A pesar de la tranquilidad del lugar y la felicidad que se puede ver en el
rostro de sus pocos habitantes, a veces venia a mi mente el recuerdo de mi
tierra, su gente y su clima.
5. ¿Qué pasa si vuelvo?
6. No, es demasiado pronto"
7. Pero después de todo err es humano, ¿no es así? De todos modos, no
puedes seguir viviendo así.
8. Creo que tienes razón.
9. Entonces, ¿cuándo vuelvo?
10. Hoy, antes de eso, el amanecer denuncia mi escape.
493
Formal English III
Prepositions
We use "beside” instead of “next to”.
She lived beside a church. (formal)
She lived next to a church.
In formal English we say “at” instead of “at the”.
I’m at restaurant. (formal)
I’m at the restaurant (informal)
Wh-questions
We use “whom” instead of “who” to say (a quien) in formal english (not common).
Whom did you give the money? (formal)
Who did you give the money (informal)
Personal object pronouns (indirect object)
Formal English always use “to” with the indirect object.
I wrote to you (formal)
I wrote you (informal)
Modal verbs
In formal English we use have to instead of “have got to”
494
I have to go (formal)
I have got to go (informal)
In formal written English we use “ought to” instead of “should.
I ought to go (Formal written) (rare)
I should go (neutral)
Subjunctive
Subjunctive has a different form in formal English.
Formal Informal
You go to the doctor You go to the doctor
You should the doctor
She go to the doctor She goes to the doctor
I suggest She should go to the doctor
You not go to the doctor You don’t go to the doctor
You shouldn’t go to the doctor
She not go to the doctor She doesn’t go to the doctor
She shouldn’t go to the doctor
We use be in subjunctive instead of am, are, is.
I do not believe that he be in Paris. (formal)
I don’t believe (that) he is in Paris. (informal)
Connectors of contrast and effect
Even tough Aunque

Rather Mas bien
By the same token Igualmente
495
Neither
In formal English we always use a verb in the third person with neither.
Neither of us likes it (formal)
Neither of us like it (informal)
None
In formal English we always use a verb in the third person with none.
None of us is going (formal)
None of us are going (informal)
Let’s
In formal written English we write “let us (not)” instead of “let’s (not)”.
Let us for a hamburger (formal written)
Let’s us for a hamburger (informal/formal spoken)
Would rather
In formal English we use the subjunctive with would rather when we decide for
another person.
I’d rather she wear another thing. (formal)
I’d rather she wears another thing (informal)
496
Causative
We use “have” instead of “get” in formal english.
I have my hair cut (formal)
I get my hair cut (informal)
Tag-questions
We never use right instead a tag-question in formal English.
You went to school, didn’t you? (formal)
You went to school, didn’t you/right? (informal)
Questions
In formal English we cannot omit the auxiliary in questions
Do you know? (formal)
You know (informal) (rare)
497
498
Writing

(250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
499
Sixteenth Unit
Words
500
 To write in formal English.
Topics
 Prepositional regency
 Verbal predication
 Adjective regency
 Expressions that are not as in Spanish
 British English II
 Do emphatic/rather/quite
 Modal verbs II
 Special future structures
 Was/were able to
501
Ninety-ninth lesson
Starting out
1. How to forget those times when I used to travel along the country on the
lookout of new clients. I would say that being on business in different
counties was my second passion in the life, the first one was without doubt
the cuisine, but at the beginning it was not in that way. At the beginning I did
it just to save some money up, but it was there when I found out that
bringing home the bacon was not as easy cake as I thought but it is no time
to cry over spilt milk.
2. With the time I saved up enough money to kick off my own business, but of
what? A friend of mine recommended that I set up a food-related business. I
thought that the idea was good, so I decided to open a bakery on the skirts
of my charming town. By then, I was already 25.
3. My bakery was very famous due to it was there where the crispiest and the
most bakery-fresh bread of the county was sold, even its ads appeared on
the TV and on the radio. I learn a lot of things as you have to keep as cool
as a cucumber if you want to have success in the business world or that
everything can go pear-chapped in a moment as it happened. It was the
Second War, and a lot of stores went broke including mine.
4. When my bakery went broke, the first though I had was hit the sauce,
fortunately, I ate humble pie before I did something dumb. Despite of being
broken, I didn’t give up and worked hard to save money up again and set up
again a business. When I was 32, it was when I met the woman who would
be the apple of my eye, but it was not as easy as pie, I had to go out a lot of
time with her before she gave me the “Yes, I do”
5. After several years, I was able to set up my business again, this time it was
a french food stand at the corner of my house, which with the years turned
into in a big restaurant and which at the present, is known for serving the
most tasty and most exotic dishes in the country and I am proud of it.
6. On most, I think that all the effort I put in these years paid dividends.
502
Noventa y nueve lección
Empezar
1. Cómo olvidar aquellos tiempos en los que solía viajar por el país en
busca de nuevos clientes. Yo diría que estar de negocios en diferentes
condados fue mi segunda pasión en la vida, la primera fue sin duda la alta
cocina, pero al principio no fue así. Al principio lo hice solo para ahorrar un
poco de dinero, pero fue allí cuando descubrí que llevar el pán a la casa no
era tan fácil como pensaba, pero no es momento de llorar por lo que ya
pasó.
7. Con el tiempo me ahorre suficiente dinero para poner en marcha mi propio
negocio, pero ¿de qué? Un amigo mío me recomendó que estableciera un
negocio relacionado con la comida. Pensé que la idea era buena, así que
decidí abrir una panadería en las afueras de mi encantadora ciudad. Para
entonces, ya tenía 25 años.
8. Mi panadería era muy famosa porque era allí donde se vendía el pan más
crujiente y fresco del condado, incluso sus anuncios aparecían en la
televisión y en la radio. Aprendí muchas cosas, como que tienes que
mantenerte la mente fria si quieres tener éxito en los negocios o que todo
puede ir mal de un momento a otro como sucedió. Era la Segunda Guerra,
y muchas tiendas quebraron, incluida la mía.
9. Cuando mi panadería quebró, lo primero que pensé fue enviar todo al
ddemonio, afortunadamente, pude recapacitar antes de hacer algo tonto. A
pesar de estar sin un centavo, no me di por vencido y trabajé duro para
ahorrar dinero nuevamente y establecer nuevamente un negocio. Cuando
tenía 32 años, fue cuando conocí a la mujer que sería la niña de mis ojos,
pero no fue fácil, tuve que salir mucho tiempo con ella antes de que me
diera el "Sí, acepto"
10. Después de varios años, pude volver a poner mi negocio, esta vez fue un
puesto de comida francesa en la esquina de mi casa, que con los años se
convirtió en un gran restaurante y que en la actualidad, es conocido por
servir los platos más sabrosos y exóticos del país y estoy orgulloso de ello.
11. En la mayoría, creo que todo el esfuerzo que puse enestos años dio sus
frutos.
503
Prepositional Regency
The regency is what complement can follow a verb, a noun or an adjective.
In time Con tiempo

On time A tiempo
On line En linea
On the move En camino
On the road En la autopista
At least Por lo menos
On campus En el campus
On the skirts of A las afueras de
On the right A la derecha
On the left A la izquierda
At the corner En la esquina
On one condition Con una condition
By the way A proposito
At last Al fin
On most En general
At the beginning Al principio
At the cash desk En la caja
On Monday El lunes
Delay on Retardo en
Sorry about Perdon por
Information on Informacion de
On vacations De vacaciones
On the cost En la costa
On business De negocios
At the party En la fiesta
On the telephone En el telefono
On diet A dieta
By car En carro
In fact De hecho
At this time of year En esta parte del año
At the moment En este momento
On the cell phone En el cellular
On the TV/radio En la television/radio
On the net En la red
By then Para entonces
At the other end of Al otro lado de
At the back of Hasta atras de
504
Writing

(250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
505
Eighty fifth lesson
Vacant
1. Hi, you guys, how are you?

2. Good. What about you?
3. I’m happy because I’m moving out to New York.
4. Great. When did you decide it?
5. This week.
6. And what are you going to do for a living?
7. This and that. Maybe, I’ll be again baby-sitter. I was always good at taking
care kids.
8. This morning I was after a new dishwasher in the morning newspaper and I
read an ad which you can be interested in.
9. Do you have the newspaper here?
10. Yeah, catch it!
11. If you want to work in one of most fascinating and popular places in the
America, this advertisement is for you. For expanding, we are looking for
someone who wishes to work in our new hotel located on five minutes from
New York. The person who is contracted will have to show that he/she has
experience working on high executives. If you think that this advertisement
is for you call us to the number 55116798 or mail us to the e-mail
nyhotelamail.com
12. Perfect. It’s exactly what I need.
13. Perfect. And when are you moving?
14. I think of moving by the July, after the kids have broken up the scholar year.
15. And what are you going to do with your things?
16. I’m going to sell them. I don’t want to spend on the moving truck.
17. Why don’t you ask for Bill his van.
18. That’s a good idea. Well, I have to go. Bye!
19. Bye!
506
Ochenta y quinta lección
Vacante
1. Hola, ¿cómo están?

2. Estoy bien. ¿Y tú?
3. Estoy feliz porque me voy a mudar a New York.
4. Que padre. ¿Cuándo lo decidiste?
5. Esta semana.
6. Y de que vas a trabajar?
7. De lo que sea. Tal vez, volveré a ser niñera. Siempre fui buena para cuidar
niños.
8. Esta mañana estaba buscando un lavavajillas nuevo en el periódico de la
mañana y leí un anuncio que te puede interesar.
9. ¿Tienes el periódico aquí?
10. ¡Sí, atraparlo!
11. Si quieres trabajar en uno de los lugares más populares y facinantes del
Reino Unido, este anuncio es para ti. Por expansión, estamos buscando a
alguien que desee trabajar en nuestro nuevo hotel ubicado a cinco minutos
de New York. La persona contratada tendrá que demostrar que tiene
experiencia trabajando con altos ejecutivos. Si cree que este anuncio es
para usted, llámenos al número 55116798 o envíenos un correo electrónico
al correo electrónico bristolshotelamail.com
12. Perfecto. Es exactamente lo que necesito.
13. Perfecto. ¿Y cuándo te mudas?
14. Pienso en mudarme en Julio, después de que los niños hayan terminado el
ciclo escolar.
15. ¿Y qué vas a hacer con tus cosas?
16. Las voy a vender. No quiero gastar en el camión de mudanzas.
17. ¿Por qué no le pides a Bill su camioneta?
18. Buena idea. Bueno, tengo que irme. ¡Adiós!
19. ¡Adiós!
507
Verb regency
Depend on Depender de
Ask for Pedir
Bet on Apostar en
Located on Localizado en
Pay for Pagar
Spend on Gastar en
Think of Pensar en
Work on Trabajar con
Worry about Preocuparse por
Adjective Predication
Good at Bueno para
508
Writing

(250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
509
Ninety-ninth lesson
Going out
1. Hi, David!
2. Hi, you guys, what have you been to? I’ve not seen you for a while.
3. Nothing interesting. What about you?
4. The day before Yesterday I played in a music festival in New York.
5. I didn’t know that you were a musician. What instrument do you play?
6. I play the guitar.
7. I though you played the keyboards.
8. No, my brother is who plays the keyboards. And what are you doing this
weekend?
9. We’re having a party.
10. Cool!
11. If you want, you can go.
12. What time is it?
13. It’s at four.
14. At that time, I have Spanish lesson. I believe I’ll be there about six.
15. Ok, are you going with Cathy?
16. No, we broke up last week.
17. What happen?
18. Well, the things started going wrong, so I decided to leave her.
19. What a bad thing! Well, see you on Saturday.
20. Bye!
21. Bye!
At party
22. David, please come in, make yourself home. I’m finishing making the dinner.
23. Do you need that I help you?
24. Now, you mention it, could you put the table, please?
25. Of course. And juere’s Brenda?
26. She went to walk the dog, she’ll be here soon.
27. I’ve finished putting the table. Juat else do I do?
28. Could you turn on the radio and play something, please?
29. Sure thing! Is there any problem with I’ve parked the car opposite your
house?
30. That space is reserved for the ambulances of the hospital that is at the
corner.
31. Ok, so, I’ll go to move ‘er to another place.
510
Saliendo
1. Hola, Fred
2. Hola, ¿Qué ha sido de tí? No te he visto por un tiempo.
3. Nada interesante. ¿Y tú?
4. Antier toqué en un festival de música en New York.
5. No sabía que eras músico. ¿Qué instrumento tocas?
6. Toco la guitarra.
7. Pensé que tocabas el teclado.
8. No, mi hermano es el que toca el teclado. ¿Y qué vas a hacer este fin de
semana?
9. Vamos a hacer una fiesta.
10. ¡Qué padre!
11. Si quieres, puedes ir.
12. ¿A qué horas es la fiesta?
13. A las cuatro.
14. A esa hora, tengo clases de español. Creo que estaré allá como a las seis.
15. Ok, ¿vas con Cathy?
16. No, nos separamos la semana pasada.
17. ¿Y eso?
18. Bueno, las cosas comenzaron a ir mal, así que decidí dejarla.
19. ¡Qué malo! Bueno, nos vemos el sábado.
20. ¡Adiós!
21. ¡Adios!
En la fiesta
22. Fred, por favor entra, siéntete como en tu casa. Estoy terminando de hacer la
cena.
23. ¿Necesitas que te ayude?
24. Ahora que lo mencionas, ¿podrías poner la mesa, por favor?
25. Claro. ¿Y dónde está Brenda?
26. Ella fue a pasear al perro, estará aquí pronto.
27. Ya terminé de poner la mesa. ¿Qué más hago?
28. ¿Podrías encender la radio y poner algo, por favor?
29. ¡Seguro! ¿Hay algún problema con que haya estacionado el coche frente a tu
casa?
30. Ese espacio está reservado para las ambulancias del hospital que está en la
esquina.
31. Ok, entonces, iré a moverlo a otro lugar.
511
Some expressions that are not as in Spanish
Pay attention Poner atencion

Have a party Hacer una fiesta
Be wrong Estar equivocado
Make a mistake Cometer un error
Play + instrument Tocar + instrument
Tell true Decir la verdad
Save money Ahorrar dinero
Make the bed Tender la cama
Walk the dog Pasear al perro
Have lessons Tomar clases
Play the CD/DVD Poner el disco/DVD
Go wrong Ir mal
Get on well Llevarse bien
Put the table Poner/acomodar los platos
Make dinner Hacer la cena
For a while For un tiempo
512
Writing

(250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
513
One hundred and twelfth lesson
London
1. Hi!
2. Hi!
3. Where were you?
4. Sorry, I tried to get sooner, but the tube was crowed.
5. Don’t worry, the good thing is that we can still get to the cinema.
6. In fact, I’d like you go with me to buy a sweater for my mum.
7. Where do you want to go?
8. I was thinking about going to the city centre, there’s a autumn sale in a very
big shop at Thomas avenue, but it’s very far from here.
9. Don’t worry, we can go on my motorbyke.
At the city centre
10. Well, we already got the present of your mum. What do we do now?
11. I’m dying of hungry, where do we go to eat?
12. In front, there’s a gastro PUB, why don’t we go there and buy some burgers
andchips.
13. And don’t forget a larger!
In the park
14. It was delicious, but I feel like a soda.

15. Take mine, but don’t throw the tin to the trashcan, I collect them.
16. How much were they?
17. 5 pounds and 50 pence.
18. It was very expensive.
19. Well, I’ve got still money to buy some sweets.
20. I’ve got a biscuit in my backpack, do you want it?
21. Sure!
At home
22. I ate a lot, I believe I’ll go to the chemist’s for a pill to the stomach.
23. Ok, but don’t do a lot of noisy, the children are sleeping.
24. They must be very tired, they spent all the holidays in the summer camp.
Perhaps, we can go next summer to York. We can stay in my parent’s
house. I believe my parents will be happy to see the children.
514
Ciento duodécima lección
Londres
1. ¡Hola!
2. ¡Hola!
3. ¿Dónde estabas?
4. Perdón, traté de llegar antes, pero el metro estaba abarrotado.
5. No te preocupes, lo bueno es que todavía podemos llegar al cine.
6. En realidad, me gustaría que fueras conmigo a comprar un suéter para mi
mamá.
7. ¿A dónde quieres ir?
8. Estaba pensando en ir al centro, hay una venta de otoño en una tienda muy
grande en la avenida Thomas , pero está muy lejos de aquí.
9. No te preocupes, podemos ir en mi moto.
En el centro de la ciudad
10. Bueno, ya tenemos el regalo de tu mamá. ¿Qué hacemos ahora?

11. Me muero de hambre, ¿a dónde vamos a comer?
12. En frente está un Gatro PUB, ¿por qué no vamos allí y compramos unas
hamburguesas y unas papas a la francesa?
13. ¡Y no te olvides de una cerveza!
En el parque
14. Estaba delicioso, pero se me antoja un refresco.

15. Toma el mio, pero no tires la lata a la basura, yo las colecciono.
16. ¿Cuánto fue?
17. 5 libras y 50 centavos.
18. Fue muy caro.
19. Bueno, todavía tengo dinero para comprar dulces.
20. Tengo una galleta en mi mochila, ¿quieres?
21. ¡Seguro!
En casa
22. Comí mucho, creo que iré a la farmacia por una pastilla para el estómago.
23. Ok, pero no hagas mucho ruido, los niños están durmiendo.
24. Deben estar muy cansados, pasaron todas las vacaciones en el campamento de
verano. Tal vez, podamos ir el próximo verano a York. Podemos quedarnos en la
casa de mis papás, creo que ellos estarán felices de ver a los niños
515
British English
Pronunciation
American British
Words ending in “er” are Faster /faster/ Faster /fasta/
pronounced /er/
Words ending in “ture” Architecture Architecture /arquitekchia/
are pronounced /chur/ /arquitekchur/
Some common words have a different pronunciation in British English
American British
Cousin /kousin/ /kasin/
Culture /kulchur/ /kolchia/
Doctor /doctor/ /dokta/
Fire /beautiful/ /faia/
Flower /flauguer/ /flagua/
Here /jir/ /jia/
Hour /auer/ /aua/
Lesson /leshon/ /leson/
Man /man/ /mn/
Mexican /meksikan/ /meksiken/
Sir /sir/ /sar/
Sure /shur/ /shor/
516
Irregular verbs
Some regular verbs are normally used as irregulars in British English.
Verb American British

Bet Betted
Burn Burned - burned
Dream Dreamed – Dreamed (most common) Dreamed - Dreamed (most
Dreamed - Dreamed common)
Dreamed – Dreamed
Kneel Kneeled Kneelt
Lean Leaned Leant
Learn Learned Leant
Spell Spelled Spelt
Spoil Spoiled Spoilt
Get is the only irregular verb which is different to the birtish english.
Get – Got – gotten (Am)
Get – got – got (UK)
Have just
In British English we use the structure “Past simple + just” instead of “Past perfect
+ just)
517
I cleaned just the floor (Am)
I have just cleaned the floor (UK)
518
Writing

(250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
519
Eighty-sixth lesson
Religion
1. Do we have a soul? Do the angels exist? Is there life after death? With me
to discuss these questions and many others is Mike Reynolds, specialist in
spiritual matters from the university of India.
2. Mike, tell us, what do you think about the religion?
3. I think the religion is part of the human being and it is a fundamental part of
his life.
4. Do you really believe that everybody has a spirit?
5. I do believe that everybody has a spirit, if we hadn’t, we wouldn’t be
humans. The spirit is the part of living being has and that can’t be touch,
something like the software of a computer, and I’m not the only who
believes this, psychologist and psychiatrist also believe in a force
unconnected to the body, but they call to this force “psyque”
6. Do you think that talking to pray is better than going with a professional
when a person suffers of a mental sickness?
7. Of course not, one thing is having spirit problems such as lack of faith,
values, so on and another is having one of the many mental sickness which
there are.
8. In your opinion, the idea of the psychology of going with a person to talk
about one’s problems is new?
9. No, in fact, religions such as Christianity, Judaism and Islam have done it
since thousands of years.
10. So, do you think that religion is better than psychologist?
11. I don’t think that neither of them is better than the another, I only say that
they are different ways to see the reality and that they both make an
excellent work helping people to overcome their faults, traumas and the paid
when loved one dies. In my opinion, they both are good options to help
people to go on.
12. Well, thank you for your time, Mike.
13. No, thanks to you for having invited me.
520
Octogésima sexta lección
Religión
1. ¿Tenemos alma? ¿existen los ángeles? ¿Hay vida después de la muerte?

Conmigo para discutir estas preguntas y muchas otras está Mike Reynolds,
especialista en asuntos espirituales de la universidad de la India.
2. Mike, cuéntanos, ¿qué opinas de la religión?
3. Creo que la religión es parte del ser humano y es una parte fundamental de
su vida.
4. ¿Realmente crees que todos tenemos un espíritu?
5. Creo que todo el mundo tiene un espíritu, si no lo hubiéramos hecho, no
seríamos humanos. El espíritu es la parte que el ser vivo tiene y que no se
puede tocar, algo así como el software de una computadora, y no soy el
único que cree esto, psicólogo y psiquiatra también creen en una fuerza
desconectada del cuerpo, pero llaman a esta fuerza "psyque"
6. ¿Crees que hablar orar es mejor que ir con un profesional cuando una
persona sufre de una enfermedad mental?
7. Por supuesto que no, una cosa es tener problemas espirituales como la
falta de fe, valores, etc. y otra es tener una de las muchas enfermedades
mentales que hay.
8. En su opinión, ¿la idea de la psicología de ir con una persona a hablar
sobre los problemas de uno es nueva?
9. No, de hecho, religiones como el cristianismo, el judaísmo y el islam lo han
hecho desde hace miles de años.
10. Entonces, ¿crees que la religión es mejor que el psicólogo?
11. No creo que ninguno de los dos sea mejor que el otro, solo digo que son
formas diferentes de ver la realidad y que ambos hacen un excelente
trabajo ayudando a las personas a superar sus faltas, traumas y el dolor
cuando un ser querido muere. En mi opinión, ambos son buenas opciones
para ayudar a las personas a seguir adelante.
12. Bueno, gracias por tu tiempo, Mike.
13. No, gracias a ti por haberme invitado.
521
Do emphatic
Do is used as an auxiliary in the affirmative form of the present simple for give
emphasis to the actions.
I believe it Lo creo pero puedo cambiar de opininon

I do believe it Aunque me demuestres lo contrario no dejare de
creerlo
I love you Te amo pero si encuentro a alguien major te dejo
I do love you Seras el peor pero aun asi te amo
In the same way we can use did in the past simple.
I believed it Lo creia pero cambie de opininon

I did believe it Lo creia fiel mente.
I loved you Te ame pero encuentre a alguien major y te deje
I did love you Eras el peor pero aun asi te amaba
522
Writing

(250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
523
Eighty fifth lesson
Films
1. Darling, what movie do we see?

2. I feel like a crime movie or a western.
3. I’m not sure. What does the magazine recommend us?
4. Let me see. Just hear this:
One of the best films that I have ever seen is Peaches Season: Iris Flower,
starring Miguel de la Torre. His performance as João Mateo is frightening
realistic and cleverly illustrates how a young man’s behaviour is at
university. Alongside him, the newcomer Fernanda Lobato displays some
excellent acting skills as the young Brazilian João’s love, who is studying
graphic design in Brazil at the same time João is reading law and who
eventually becomes his lover.
5. Brazil has some amazing landscapes and the movie's interesting locations
show us the real beauty of the country. The fascinating storyline based on a
novel by journalist Miguel Sanchez, blends fact and fiction in a very clever
way, sweeping us along with the events which lead the protagonists to let
her girlfriend. There are a number of scenes of shocking tension and the film
is frequently disturbing because of this, but at the same time it is totally
gripping.
6. Last but not least, there is a tremendous soundtrack with a wide range of
Brazilian music that will have you dancing in your seat at times.
7. It seems to be a good film.
8. Ok, so we’ll see that film.
9. We’d better hurry up, if not, we won’t arrive to the movie theater.
10. Love, you’d better put on a sweater. It’s chilly outside and it looks it’s going
to snow later.
11. Don’t worry about it. The forecast report said that it wasn’t going to snow
today.
12. Ok, so let’s go.
524
Ochenta y quinta lección
Peliculas
1. Querida, ¿qué película vemos?

2. Tengo ganas de ver una película policica o una película comercial.
3. No estoy seguro. ¿Qué nos recomienda la revista?
4. Déjame ver. Escucha esto:
Una de las mejores películas que he visto es Peaches Season: Iris Flower,
protagonizada por Miguel de la Torre. Su actuación como João Mateo es
aterradoramente realista e ilustra hábilmente cómo es el comportamiento de
un joven en la universidad. Junto a él, la recién llegada Fernanda Lobato
muestra excelentes habilidades de actuación como el amor del joven
brasileño João, que estudia diseño gráfico en Brasil al mismo tiempo que
João está estudiando derecho y que finalmente se convierte en su amante.
5. Brasil tiene algunos paísajes increíbles y las interesantes localizaciones de
la película nos muestran la verdadera belleza del país. La fascinante trama
basada en una novela del periodista Miguel Sanchez, mezcla realidad y
ficción de una manera muy inteligente, barriéndonos junto con los
acontecimientos que llevan a los protagonistas a dejar a su novia. Hay una
serie de escenas de tensión impactante y la película es a menudo
perturbadora debido a esto, pero al mismo tiempo es totalmente
apasionante.
6. Por último, pero no menos importante, hay una tremenda banda sonora con
una amplia gama de música brasileña que te hará bailar en tu asiento a
veces.
7. Parece ser una buena película independiente.
8. Ok, entonces veremos esa película.
9. Lo mejor es que nos apresuremos, si no, no llegaremos al cine.
10. Amor, será mejor que te pongas un suéter. Hace frío afuera y parece que
va a nevar más tarde.
11. No te preocupes por eso. El pronóstico decía que no iba a nevar hoy.
12. Ok, entonces vámonos.
525
Modal verbs II
Can’t
Can’t is used to talk about a thing that is wrong in the present based on
evidence.
This ticket can’t be right, it says 10 dollars for a cup of coffee.
Can’t have
Can’t have is used to talk about a thing that is wrong in the past based on
evidence.
This ticket can’t have been right, it says 10 dollars for a cup of coffee.
Can/could
We use can/could is used to talk theoretically/hypothetically.
Our company can/could produce 1000 cars in a month.
May/might/could be
We use “may/might/could be + ing” to speculate about events or situations in the

present or the future.
It’s 7. They can be watching the T.V. (son las siente, deben estar veindo la
television)
526
Writing

(250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
527
Ninety-ninth lesson
The media
1. What are you doing, David?

2. I’m reading the newspaper, they say that the Secretary of economy has left
from his party.
3. Let me see! ECONOMY SECRETARY QUIT PARTY He was one the big
cheese, why did he leave?
4. According to the newspaper, he kept a finger in many pies related with
corruption.
5. Well, he’d better find a good lawyer. What other headlines are there?
6. Well on the front page appears “UNIONS CLASH BOSSES”
7. It must be another case of lack of payment. What else?
8. They’re all the important headlines.
9. I’m boring, turn on radio to hear the news.
10. Hello, everyone, this is John Smith giving you the last news.
The day after tomorrow, the Secretary of education is to give a speech in
the senate to talk about the changes which there are going to be in the basic
and high education of our country.
11. “I’m glad to announce that, from now on, the students will not have to worry
about the quality of his/her studies. With this project, the estimate which is
given to schools and universities are to rise, and with this, they are to be
able buy better equipements and they are to be able rise the payment of
their teachers and professors”
12. Both the President and members of the democrac political party agree with
this project and it is expected to be santionated this Wednesday”
13. Turn it out. It doesn’t matter me.
14. So, what do we do?
15. Turn on the TV, maybe that Mexican opera soup. I heard that today started
its new season.
528
Los medios de comunicación
1. ¿Qué estás haciendo David?

2. Estoy leyendo el periódico, dicen que el ministro de Economía se ha salido
de su partido.
3. ¡Déjame ver! MINISTRO DE ECONOMÍA RENUNCIA A PARTIDO Era uno
de los meros meros del partido, ¿por qué se saldría?
4. Según el periódico, estaba metido en varios asuntos relacionados con
corrupción.
5. Bueno, será mejor que encuentre un buen abogado. ¿Qué otros titulares
hay?
6. Pues en primera plana aparece "SINDICATOS CHOCAN JEFES"
7. Debe ser otro caso de falta de pago. ¿Qué más?
8. Son todos los titulares importantes.
9. Estoy aburrido, enciende la radio para escuchar las noticias.
10. Hola a todos "Este es John Smith dándoles las últimas noticias.
Pasado mañana, el secretario de Educación va a dar un discurso en el
Senado para hablar de los cambios que va a haber en la educación básica
y superior de nuestro país.
11. "Me complace anunciar que, a partir de ahora, los estudiantes no tendrán
que preocuparse por la calidad de sus estudios. Con este proyecto, el
presupuesto que se les da a las escuelas y universidades aumentará, y con
esto, estaspodrán comprar mejores equipos y podrán aumentar el salario
de sus maestros y profesores"
12. Tanto el primer ministro como la reina están de acuerdo con este proyecto y
se espera que se apruebe en el Senado este miércoles".
13. Apagala. No me importa.
14. Entonces, que hacemos?
15. Prende la télé, tal vez ya este esa telenovela mexicana, escuché que hoy
va a empezar la nueva temporada.
529
To be infinitive
We use “be + infinitive” in formal speech:
1. In rules
Employees are to clean the equipment that they use in the laboratory.
2. In instructions
The human recourses department of the company is to organise employees’
the schedules.
3. In official plans
The president is to visit Europe next week.
This structure is manly found in news reports.
Was/were able to
We use “was/were able to” to:
1. Talk about an achievement

He was able to climb the Himalayas.
2. Talk about something was done with difficulty

After a long time, he was able to walk again.
3. Express that someone could do something in an specific situation

Were you able to go to the graduation with Katy?
530
Writing

(250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Do you agree or disagree with the idea about the midia can’t say all the time the
true?
British conture
Dentro de los medios de comunicacion el periodico The Gardian y la televisora BBC son de los más
recocidos a nivel mundial.
531
Unit
seventeenth
Literature
532
*Very Fomal English
*Participle Clauses
*Special uses of if
*Invertion
*Literary English
*Literary English II
*Enphasis / Emphatic do
533
One Hundred and thirteenth lesson
An elegant party
8. Good evening, Prime Minister.

1. Good evening, President.
2. How are you today?
3. One feel delight, the party has been pleasant.
4. One thinks the same. What are you, the right honourable friend, going to do
on vacations?
5. One wishes to go to a gallery in Paris. They say that it has the most modern
and beautiful partings in whole Europe. And you, President, what are you
going to do?
6. One wishes go to Africa, one hasn’t been to Sahara Desert.
7. Have you ever been to Egypt?
8. Yes, I enjoyed much the warm weather, the pyramids and the camels.
Definitely, riding camels was the best part of my travel.
9. You must speak very well Arabic.
10. In fact Yes.
11. You must have gone to the best language school in the country.
12. If fact not.
13. So how can you speak so well Arabic?
14. One is autodidactic. I learn by reading books with their translations, listening
to the radio and by using applications for learning language.
15. President, might one ask you a question?
16. Later, it seems that senator is going to give a speech.
17. Ladies and gentlemen, one wishes to inform you that our political party has
won the elections. It seems that the people of another political party
believed that they were better than we were. But at the end, they have
learned that they aren’t as strong as we are.
534
Ciento trece lección
Una fiesta elegante
1. Buenas noches, mi muy honorable amigo.

1. Buenas noches, primer ministro.
2. ¿Cómo estás esta noche?
3. Muy bien, la fiesta ha sido agradable.
4. Uno piensa lo mismo. ¿Y qué va a hacer usted, mi muy honorable amigo,
en vacaciones?
5. Deseo ir a una galería en París. Dicen que tiene las despedidas más
modernas y bellas de toda Europa. Y usted, primer ministro, ¿qué va a
hacer?
6. Deseo ir a África, no he estado en el desierto del Sahara.
7. ¿Alguna vez ha estado en Egipto?
8. Sí, disfruté mucho del clima cálido, las pirámides y los camellos.
Definitivamente, montar en camello fue la mejor parte de mi viaje.
9. Debe hablar muy bien árabe.
10. De hecho sí.
11. Debe haber ido a la mejor escuela de idiomas del país.
12. De hecho no.
13. Entonces, ¿cómo puede hablar tan bien árabe?
14. Soy autodidacta. Aprendo leyendo libros con sus traducciones, escuchando
la radio y usando aplicaciones para el aprendizaje de idiomas.
15. Primer ministro, ¿podría hacerle una pregunta?
16. Más tarde, parece que nuestro muy honorable amigo va a dar un discurso.
17. Damas y caballeros, les informar que nuestro partido político ha ganado las
elecciones. Parece que la gente del otro partido político creía que eran
mejores que nosotros. Pero al final, han aprendido que no son tan fuertes
como nosotros.
535
Very formal English and correct English
In very formal English and grammatically correct English we put the preposition
next to the wh-question.
In what classroom are you? (very formal/grammatically correct)
What classroom are you in? (informal)
Comparative
In very formal English we use “Personal subject pronoun + to be” in the

comparative.
She’s better than I am (very formal)
She’s better than I (formal)
She’s better than me (informal)
Might
We use “might” to ask for permission in very formal English.
Might one go to the bathroom? (very formal)
May I go to the bathroom? (formal)
Can I go to the bathroom? (informal)
If
In correct English we use “weather” instead of “if” in the reported speech.
He told us weather we want to play. (correct)
He told us if/whether we want to play. (formal)
536
Wish
“wish” instead of “want to” in more formal situations.
I wish to go to your party. (very formal)
I want to go to your party (formal)
Vocabulary
Neutral Very formal

If it was not for But for
Please If you please
Three times Thrice
Who Whom
Neutral Culto
Self-taught Autodidactic
Disgusting Ignoble
A lot/lots of Much
Much Many
Many
I, we One
To use (proceso) To employ
Tag-questions
In formal English we do not use the contractions in the questions tags.
We’re going to the party, are not we? (culto)
We’re going to the party, aren’t we (neutral)
We’re going to the party, right? (informal)
537
538
Writing

(250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
539
One hundred and fourteenth lesson
Job ads
1. Hi, Ted, what are you doing?

2. I’m looking for a new job.
3. Didn’t’ you like the journalist job?
4. Not at all. I want to try something new as translator, cook or stundman.
5. And what have you found?
6. Hear these ads!
7. We are looking for new talent who wants to work with us in our headquarters
located on Chicago. We’re looking for a person who has knowledge of data
processing and website development. The successful applicant must have
good teamwork skills. The salary will depend on qualifications and
experience. After the training period, there is a two months trial period.
8. We are looking for sales executives having worked in resorts. The candidate
must speak Spanish and French fluently or being native speaker of one or
both languages. Also, the candidate who wants to work with us must have a
driver’s license and must be articulate, outgoing with excellent interpersonal
skills. Part-time and full-time positions are available.
Competitive basic wage. Commissions and company car.
9. We have an opening for a website designer to start to work at once. The

person who wants work with us must be a team player. Our officines are in
Los Angeles for which the person who wants to apply for this position must
live in Los Angeles. Master degree required. Two days off per week.
Salary: 1950 dollars per month.
10. All of them sound good. I believe I’ll call all them first thing tomorrow, I’m
boring about sitting around.
11. Well, if you want to started not feeling boring, why don’t you start by
cleaning up the kitchen of the apartment.
540
Ciento decimocuarta lección
Anuncios de empleo
1. Hola, David, ¿qué estás haciendo?

2. Estoy buscando un nuevo trabajo.
3. ¿No te gustó el trabajo de periodista?
4. De nada. Quiero probar algo nuevo como traductor, cocinero o soldado.
5. ¿Y qué has encontrado?
6. Solo escucha estos anuncios.
7. Estamos buscando nuevos talentos que quieran trabajar con nosotros en

nuestra sede ubicada en Chicago. Estamos buscando una persona que
tenga conocimientos de procesamiento de datos y desarrollo de sitios web.
El solicitante exitoso debe tener buenas habilidades de trabajo en equipo.
El salario dependerá de la experiencia y de las cualidades. Después del
período de entrenamiento, hay un período de prueba de dos meses.
8. Estamos buscando ejecutivos de ventas que hayan trabajado en resorts. El

candidato debe hablar español y francés con fluidez o ser hablante nativo
de uno o ambos idiomas. Además, el candidato que quiera trabajar con
nosotros debe tener una licencia de conducir y debe ser articulado,
extrovertido con excelentes habilidades interpersonales. Hay puestos
disponibles a tiempo parcial y a tiempo completo.
Salario básico competitivo. Comisiones y coche de empresa.
9. Tenemos una oportunidad para que un diseñador de sitios web comience a

trabajar de inmediato. La persona que quiere trabajar con nosotros debe ser
un jugador de equipo. Nuestros officines están en Los Ángeles, por lo que
la persona que quiera solicitar este puesto debe vivir en Los Ángeles. Se
requiere maestría. Dos días libres por semana.
Salario: 950 libras por mes.
10. Todos ellos suenan bien. Creo que los llamaré a todos a primera hora de
mañana, me aburre sentarme.
11. Bueno, si quieres empezar a no sentirte aburrido, ¿por qué no empiezas
por limpiar la cocina del piso?
541
Participle clauses
We use participle clauses to substitub a relative clause in formal style.
We are looking for person who speaks Spanish.
We are looking for person speaking Spanish.
All the money which has been spent must be return.
All the money having spent must be return.
Participle clauses can have its own subject.
No one who has a family would say that.
No one having family would say that.
Sometime the participle clause can mean “como”.
It being too late, I couldn’t find a cab anywhere.

(como era muy tarde, no pude encontrar un cab)
542
Writing

(250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
543
One hundred and fifteenth lesson
Politicians
1. Good morning, I’m looking for the President.

2. Who is looking for him?
3. The Prime Minister.
4. The President is in a meeting. Should you want, you may take a sit here
while the President leaves.
5. Thank you very much!
6. Mister President, good morning, how are you today?

7. One is fine. Thank you very much. And you?
8. One is fine. Mister President, could we speak tomorrow about the new
commercial treaty between our two nations?
9. I’m sorry, but tomorrow, I’m returning to my natal city.
10. Might one ask you from where you are?
11. I’m from Texas.
12. Texas is a modern and charming city. One has been to there thrice.
13. Should you wish that one speak, if you please, so go to my office that they
make you an appointment for the next week.
14. With whom must I speak?
15. With my secretary.
16. Good afternoon, how can I help you?

17. I wish make an appointment for the next week to speak with the President.
18. Who are you, sir?
19. I’m the prime Minister.
20. Certainly, mister ambassador.
21. Could it be on Monday morning?
22. I’m sorry, the President has a meeting at that hour.
23. Could it be Wednesday afternoon?
24. I can’t at that hour. Could it be Friday morning?
25. Certainly, mister Ambassador. Your appointment is next Friday morning.
26. Thank you very much!
544
One hundred and fifteenth lección
Politicos
1. Buenos dias, busco al primer ministro.

2. Quien lo busca?
3. El embajador de Estados Unidos.
4. El primer ministro está en una reunion. Si lo desea, puede tomar asiento
mientras el primer ministro sale.
5. Muchas gracias.
6. Señor presidente, buenos dias, como se encuentra el dia de hoy?

7. Estoy bien. Muchas gracias. Y usted?
8. Me encuentro bien. Señor Presidente, podemos hablar mañana sobre el
nuevo tratado commercial entre nuestras dos naciones?
9. Lo siento, pero mañana, regreso a mi ciudad natal.
10. Puedo preguntarle dde donde es usted?
11. Soy de Texas.
12. Texas es una ciudad moderna y hermosa. He estado haya tres veces.
13. Si quiere que hablemos, por favour, vaya a mi oficina para que le hagan
una cita para la siguiente semana.
14. Con quien tengo que hablar.
15. Con mi secretaria.
16. Buenas tardes, como puedo ayudarlo?

17. Quiero haacer una cita para la siguiente semana para hablar con el primer
ministro.
18. Quien es usted, señor?
19. El Primer Ministro.
20. Seguro, señor Primer Ministro.
21. Podría ser el lunes en la mañana?
22. Lo siento, el primer ministro tiene una reunion a esa hora.
23. Podria ser el Jueves en la tarde?
24. Seguro, señor. Su cita es el siguiente viernes en la mañana.
25. Muchas gracias.
26. De nada.
545
Special uses of if
We use “if + will” in polite request.
If you will wait for Mister Bill, he’ll arrive in 5 minutes.
We can use “would” instead of “will to sound more polite.
If you would wait for Mister Bill, he’ll arrive in 5 minutes.
We can change “for” for “should in very formal and literary English. This can be
done only when “if” is at the beginning of the sentence.
Should we go to New York, we’ll arrive at there at midday.
We use “if + was/were + to infinitive” to talk about imaginary future situations.
If the machines were to be more intelligent, they could conquest the world.
We can use given, otherwise and provided instead of if.
Given the enormous quantity of people who attended to the concert, the band
decided to open other dates.
546
Writing
Rescribe un texto. Agrega por lo menos 5 caracteristicas del lenguaje muy formal
(250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Do you agree or disagree with the deplomats earn more than five times what a
common person earn a year?
547
One hundred and sixteenth lesson
Peaches’ season
1. First day of school, everyone’s felicity to return to the school could be seen
in the middle of the environment accompanied by the heat of the sun and
the fresh breeze of the summer.
2. Forth semester of the university, one step more to our life together, I though,
while Lidia and I entered to the school. Never have I thought to be so much
time with someone and there we were after four semesters, it is incredible
what a jelly can do.
3. We entered to the school and as all the semesters I went with her to her
classroom. After having let her in her classroom, I went mine. There, I came
across my friends Julian and Hernan, I had not seen them for ages, but it
was good, the adventure was about to commence …
4. That day, as most of the professors were absent, Lidia and I went to my
house. When we arrived at there, we realised that my mother and my sister
were not, on a table, they had let a note which said that they had gone to
the supermarket.
5. There was a silence, our faces found one to the another, she stooped her
face letting me see her love, her sensibility and her loyalty. I approached
her, I took her from the waist and kissed her, the love appeared, we went to
my parent’s room, and there, we dedicated to express our love physically.
548
One hundred and sixteenth lección
Temporada de Duraznos
1. Primer día de clases, la felicidad de todos, de regresar a la escuela, se

hacía notar en el ambiente acompañado por el calor del sol y la brisa fresca
del verano.
2. Cuarto semestre de la universidad, un paso más hacia nuestra vida juntos
pensé, mientras entrábamos Lidia y yo a la escuela. Nunca pensé durar
tanto con alguien, y ahí estábamos después de cuatro semestres, es
increíble lo que una gelatina puede hacer.
3. Entramos a la escuela y como todos los semestres la acompañe a su salón.
4Llegando allá me despedí de ella y me fui a mi salón. Allá encontré a
Julián y a Hernán, no los había visto desde hace un tiempo, pero estaba
bien, el desmadre iba a estar bueno.
4. Ese día como no habían asistido todos los profesores, Lidia y yo nos fuimos
a mi casa. Cuando llegamos, advertimos que mi mamá y mi hermana no
estaban, en la mesa, habían dejado una nota que decía que habían ido al
supermercado.
5. Hubo un silencio, nuestras caras se encontraron la una a la otra, ella bajo
su cara haciendo un gesto que me hacía entre ver su sensibilidad, su amor
y las ganas de estar conmigo. Me le acerque, la agarre de la cintura y la
bese, el amor se hizo presente, nos fuimos a la habitación de mis papás, y
ya ahí, nos dedicamos a expresar nuestro amor físicamente.
549
Inversion
We use the inversion to emphasise a phrase. This structure has the same form
that the interrogative form.
Never in my life had I felt so embarrassed.
Nowhere did he find peace.
The inversion can go in the middle of a sentence.
He had been in prison but rarely did he mention it.
With the words never, never before, rarely, seldom, hardly (ever), no sooner ___
than, the inversion is obligatory.
Never thought I that he did that.
With the words no sooner ___ than, only, not only ___ but also, not (even) once,
not until, on no account, under no circumstances, by no means, in no way,
nowhere, little can be used or not the inversion.
Under no circumstances can he go. = Under no circumstances he can go
The expression “it is/was” can be omitted in the inversion when it is used with only
Only after I had kids that could I understand my parents. (formal and literary)
It was only after I had kids that I could understand my parents. (neutral)
The expressions so + adjective _ that, only after and not only have a special order.
So happy was he that we gave all her money to the town.
Only after he grew up could he understand his parents.
550
Writing
Realiza una parafrasis verbal de esta parte de la historia (250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Do you agree or disagree with there should be more money to support writers?
551
One hundred and seventeenth lesson
Peaches’ season II
1. The sandy of the beach burned my feet while I went to the edge of the sea.
That day, my friends and I had left early from the university and as we did
not have anything to do, we decided to go to the beach. When we arrived at
there, we devoted to play soccer and eating. Luis made a grill with some
steams that he had found there and cooked delicious fish. It was a good
time. It was almost four, and everyone was preparing his things to go. As I
wanted to see the sunset one last time, I decided to stay. I went to some
rocks which were over there. The sight was stupendous. When I realized, I
could see a young woman who was watching the sunset too. She was very
beautiful, with an exceptional body. I approached shily to her. She saw me
with those eyes which made my legs trembled. I asked her name. She told
me that her name was Paula and that she attended at the same school as I.
I was not good at talking girls, but as I could, I asked out her. She accepted
and we arranged to meet the next day at Veloso’s café.
2. It was almost midday and Paula did not arrive, as it was getting late, so I
decided to go. When I was leaving from the coffee store, Paula appeared
running. While she was recovering, she told me that she was late for her
sister had asked her to help her to do some things at their house. As it was
late, and the afternoon was stupendous, I told her that we went to walk. We
traversed Ipanema until arriving at an ice-cream parlour. We talked about
many things, as she was studying photography and that she wanted to work
in a museum. She also told me that her favourite flower was Iris, unknown
flower for me by then. In the afternoon, we said goodbye, she said goodbye
with a kiss in the cheek and I went.
3. They were March’s vacations and as in all March’s vacations, I had gone to
Lidia’s house. I did not have problems with it, I have on well with her mother
and her sister, even I was teaching Spanish to her niece. The only problem
was her stepfather who always watched me with a suspicious sight, but,
exept that, all was going well in my life with her. That day, we decided to go
to a party which woould take place in the square in front of the municipal
building.
552
One hundred and seventeenth lesson
Temporada de Duraznos II
1. La arena de la playa quemaba mis pies mientras me dirigía a la orilla del

mar. Ese día mis amigos y yo habíamos salido temprano de la escuela y
como no teníamos nada que hacer, decidimos ir a la playa. Llegando allá,
nos dedicamos a jugar footenis y a nadar. Eran casi las cuatro, y todos ya
se estaban yendo. Decidí quedarme un poco más porque quería ver una
última vez el mar, así que me dirigí a unas piedras que estaban por ahí. La
vista se veía estupenda. Cuando me di cuenta, pude ver a una chava que
estaba viendo también el atardecer, era muy guapa, de cuerpo excepcional.
Tímidamente me le acerque. Ella me miro con esos ojos que hacían que me
temblaran las piernas. Como pude le pregunté su nombre. Me dijo que se
llamaba Paula y que iba a la misma escuela que yo. Yo no era muy hábil
para el ligue pero como pude, la invite a salir. Ella acepto y quedamos de
vernos al día siguiente día en el café Veloso.
2. Ya eran casi las doce del día y como no llegaba, decidí irme. Cuando salía
del café, Paula apareció corriendo. Agitada, me dijo que había llegado tarde
porque su hermana le había pedido que se quedara a ayudarle con algunas
cosas. Como ya era tarde y la noche estaba estupenda, decidí llevarla a
pasear, recorrimos todo Ipanema hasta llegar a una heladería donde le
compré un helado. Hablamos de muchas cosas, que estaba estudiando
fotografía y que quería trabajar en un museo. También me comento que su
flor favorita era Iris, flor desconocida para mi hasta entonces. Ya en la
noche nos despedimos, se despidió con un beso en la mejilla y me fui.
3. Eran las vacaciones de marzo, y como todas las vacaciones de marzo,

había ido a la casa de Lidia. No había problema, me llevaba bien con su
madre y con su hermana, incluso le estaba enseñando español a su
sobrina, el único problema era su padrastro, quien me veía siempre con una
mirada de desconfianza, pero, exceptuando eso, todo iba bien en mi vida
con ella. Ese día decidimos ir a la fiesta del pueblo,
553
So we hurried to let her niece slept and we went: Lidia, I, her sister and her
boyfriend. When we arrived at there, we separated, Lidia and I went to the hoops
games where I won a teddy snake, to which we decided to baptize as our reptilian
daughter. Later, we went to the square where there was a fireworks display. All the
sky illuminated with the colors of the fireworks. At midnight, the major appeared
from a balcon of the municipal building and pronounced a speech, of which I only
understood “Live the heroes of our patry”. After this, everyone returned to his
houses. When we arrived at Lilia’s mother’s house, I installed my bed in the sofa,
Lidia so brought me some sheets that I slept better. Before climbed to her room,
she gave me a kiss.
4. The next day Lidia rose early to give me a “morning surprise”. When we had
breakfast, I dared to tell her that I had felt in love with someone else. When I
told her it, she infuriated, and she told me that I had gotten bored of her,
which hurted me. I told her that I had not let love her, just I had been in love
with another person and I asked her whether she wanted to be with me. The
next time I was with Paula, I felt fear about the things with Lidia were not the
same, but for my surprise, the next weeks were like honey on flakes with
Lidia and I descending from the top of a hill which gave towards the Pao de
Acuçar and my “Corazón”, with whom I liked to stay at night until she went
to bed.
554
así que nos apuramos a dejar a su sobrina dormida y partimos; Lidia, yo, su
hermana y el novio de esta. Llegando allá, nos separamos, Lidia y yo fuimos al
juego de aros donde gané una serpiente de peluche, a la cual decidimos
Más tarde, fuimos a la plaza a ver como lanzaban cuetes. El espectáculo era
magnifico, todo se iluminaba con los colores de los cuetes en el cielo y todo el
mundo se divertía. A la media noche salió el alcalde al balcón del palacio
municipal y pronuncio su discurso, del que solo entendí “que vivan los héroes de la
patria”. Después de esto todo el mundo regreso a sus casas. Llegando a la casa
de Lidia, instale mi cama en el sillón, y me prepare para dormir. Lidia me había
bajado unas cobijas para que durmiera mejor, y antes de subir a su cuarto me dio
un beso.
4. Al día siguiente desperté, Lidia había bajado para darme el “mañanero”.

Mientras desayunábamos, me atrevi a contarle que me habai enamorado
de alguien más, a lo cual se mostró muy enojada diciendo que ya me había
aburrido de ella, lo cual me dolió. Le dije que no me había dejado de
quererla, simplemente me gustaba alguien más y le pregunte si quería
seguir conmigo. La primera vez que estuve con Paula sentía miedo de que
la relación con Lidia no fuera la misma, más para mi sorpresa, las
siguientes semanas fueron como miel sobre hojuelas, con Lidia y yo
rodando desde lo alto de una colina, y mi “corazón”, en la noche, con quien
me gustaba quedarme despierto hasta que se iba a dormir.
555
Literary English
Vocabulary
Neutral Literary
Calm Tranquillity
Chest Breast
Climate Clime
Country Land
Enemy Foe (used in poesy)
From now on Forth
Happiness Felicity
Heavens Sky (used in the religion)
Heaven Paradise
In this way Thus
Island Isle
Peak Fullness
Disgusting Ignoble
Horrible
Awful
Royal Kingly
Morning Morrow
Tomorrow
In the morning On the morrow
Handwriting Hand
Letter
Golden Gilt
Peak Fullness
Secular Unhallowed
So that So ____ that
To break To rend
To furbish To furbish
To refurnish
To live To live (Vivir, habitar, morar)
To make a mistake To err
To delight To wonder
To worry To fret
Where from Whence
556
Latin words
Informal Formal
Adolescence Teenager
Childhood Infance
Kidish Infantile
Devilish Diabolical
Friendly Amicable
Inner Internal (body)
Lower Inferior
Lying Mendacious
Momly Maternal
Dadly Paternal
557
Writing
Escribe una parafrasis de lo que se trata la historia (250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
558
Speaking
Do you agree or disagree with is important that kids read at school.
American culture
Tanto el inglés literio como el inglés formal utilizan muchas palabras de origen
latino, esto se debe a los años que estuvo conquistada por etranjeros despues de
la conquista normanda dde inglaterra.
Normalmente las palabras latinas se utilizan en el lenguaje formal, mientras que

las papabras de origen germanico se utilizan en los registros más bajos.
559
One hundred and eighteenth lesson
Peaches’ season (The end)
1. It was almost the middle of the semester and the tests were close, but the
most important is that was Paula’s birthday, I remember well it because that
day Vanessa reached, I saw it as a signal from the sky that my two loves
reached the same day.
That day, Paula and I had arranged to meet in the bridge which was
between the language building and the stairs before entering to the Italian
class in which we there were together to give her birthday present, so I
hurried to shower and to dress and I left. When I arrived at there, she had
not arrived yet, I waited a while and she arrived. I took out her letter from my
schoolbag and I gave it to her, it was a small letter involved in a small
envelope with a wax stamp with three poem sheets inside with purple
petals, with an Iris flower in the middle. As I felt embarrased, I decided to go.
In the distance, I could see how Paula read my letter and how suddenly she
moved her hand to her chest giving me to understand that my letter had
arrived to the deepest of her soul. In the classroom, Paula sat down beside
me, as I felt very nervous, I decided to go to buy some candies. When I
returned to the classroom, I gave a candy to Lidia and another one to Paula,
when I gave her candy to Paula, she applauded as a girl when they gave a
present that she has expected from a long time, I liked it much. The class
terminated, Paula had left earlier because she had to do a project, what
made me sad. We left from the classroom, Lidia and I. On the way, I told her
that I had given a letter to Paula, which made she infuriated. I let her in her
classroom and I went. Later, as we were on the bus to return to our houses,
I felt her a little distant, but for my surprise, when we were on the subway,
she gave a letter to me which said:
“Looooooove:
2. I know you really love me, you always show me that, I don’t know how you
make that but every day, each day that passes, you demonstrate me,
express me and transmit me all your love and that’s very beautiful because I
never imagined to find you, I never imagined you crossed in my life and you
were part of that, I didn’t imagine that there was somebody that loves me so
much, that take care of me, protect me, support me, console me, that is
always with me in the bads and the goods, I LOVE YOU like you’re, I don’t
want
560
One hundred and eighteenth lección
Temporada de Duraznos (El final)
1. Era ya casi mitad de semestre y los exámenes estaban próximos, pero

lo más importante es que era el cumpleaños de Paula, 28 de abril, lo
recuerdo bien porque ese día cumplía años Vanesa, yo lo veía como
una señal del cielo que mis dos amores cumplieran años el mismo día.
Aquel día, me había quedado de ver con Paula en el puente que
quedaba entre el edificio de idiomas y las escaleras antes de la clase
italiano, en la cual estábamos los tres, para darle su regalo de
cumpleaños, así que me apure a bañarme y a vestirme y me fui. Cuando
llegue todavía no llegaba, espere un poco y llego. Saqué su carta de mi
mochila y se la di, era una pequeña carta envuelta en un sobre
pequeño, con un sello de cera con tres hojas de poema y pétalos
morados, con una flor de Iris en medio.
Como me dio pena, decidí irme, desde lo lejos pude ver como Paula leía
mi carta y como súbitamente movió su mano hacia su pecho dándome a
entender que mi carta le había llegado a lo más profundo de su ser.
En el salón, Paula se sentó junto a mí, como me daba nervios tenerla
junto de mí, decidí ir a comprar unos dulces. Ya de regreso en el salón,
le di un dulce a Lidia y uno a Paula, cuando le hube dado su dulce a
Paula, ella aplaudió como una niña chiquita cuando le regalan algo en
su cumpleaños, me gustó mucho.
Acabo la clase, Paula había salido antes porque tenía que hacer un
proyecto de la escuela, cosa que me entristeció. Salimos de la clase,
Lidia y yo. En el camino a su salón le conté lo de la carta de Paula, lo
cual provocó el enojo de ella. La deje en su salón y me fui. Más tarde,
cuando íbamos de regreso en la micro, la sentí un poco distante, más
para mi sorpresa, cuando íbamos en el metro, me dio una carta que
decía así:
“Amooooor:
2. Yo se que me amas demasiado, me lo demuestras siempre, no se como

le haces pero diario, cada día que pasa me demuestras, me expresas,
me trasmites todo tu amor y es muy bonito porque nunca imagine
encontrarte, nunca imagine que te cruzarías en mi vida y formarías parte
de ella, no imagine que existiera alguien que me ame tanto, que me
cuide, proteja, apoye, consuele, que este siempre a mi lado tanto en los
momentos buenos como en los malos. TE AMO como eres, no kiero
561
change you anything because I love you in that way, I LOVE YOU so, I’m very
happy with you (cat’s paw) I try to understand you, to understand that with our love
is possible that you wanna share that with other people that we’re and we’ll be
happier but that’s hard for me this because I’ve always thought this, (that the
couples are of two) I’ve never thought that you can try to be happy not only with
one person but that sharing your love with more people too, but also think that is
better in this way, that You have the courage, confidence and honesty to tell me
what you really want with this you tell me what you’re like, you don’t hide that to
me, I believe that at time is better this to be cheated, I believe this got more worth
because it talks me ‘bout you and thought this is hard to me I wanna support you, I
wanna accept this, I know that in this way you’ll be happier and by sharing this with
me we’ll be very happy, I just want you to know that I really Iove you, I LOVE YOU
I LOVE YOU A LOT I LOVE YOU A LOT and I’m very happy with you.
When I finished to read her letter, I felt aims to throw it thought the window of the
subway, huge her and tell her that I already knew it and that I love her too. But I
didn’t. When I arrived home, I lied down on my bed looking at the roof feeling
satisfaction about what had happened in the day.
3. The sun illuminated my room while I was keeping a teddy bear that I had
bought to Paula. It was already the end of the semester and everyone
was nervous for the tests, but I was more nervous because that day
would be the day when I would confess my love to Paula. I had arranged
to meet her at Science Faculty beside the fountain. I was scared about
the weather were bad but for my surprise the day was stupendous with a
beautiful blue of the sky and an extraordinary sight. I was a long time
seeing the sea until Paula appeared. We were a long time talking and
while we were watching how the first star appeared in the firmament I
confessed my love to Paula what she answered me that she has already
boyfriend, it destroyed me. That night I could not sleep, the pain seized
me every time I remembered the moments that I spent with her, the time
I gave her letter and how I had met her at the rocks. I could not continue.
The next day I took my things and took the bus to Leblón, place where
my “Amor” lived. While I was on the bus, I saw how the sun hid into the
sea while I was going to an uncertain destiny. I arrived at her house and
I rang the bell. When she opened the door, I was prepared to finish the
relationship when she jumped crying and hugged me strongly. She was
in that way a long time until I felt that she had cried all she was inside of
her. Still wetted by her tears, she separated from me, she looked at my
eyes and told me “I’m pregnant”.
562
cambiarte nada porque así me gustas, así TE AMO, soy muy feliz contigo. (patita
de gato) Yo trato de entenderte, de entender que con nuestro amor es posible que
tu kieras compartirlo con mas personas que así somos y seremos mas felices pero
me cuesta trabajo aceptar que y seremos mas felices pero me cuesta trabajo
aceptar que puedo compartirte con alguien mas, me cuesta adaptarme a esto
porque siempre he pensado esto, (el que las parejas sean de dos) nunca me paso
por la cabeza que puedes intentar ser feliz no solo con una persona sino que
compartir tu amor con mas personas, pero también pienso que es mejor que sea
así, que tu tengas el valor, confianza y honestidad de decirme lo que realmente
quieres con esto me dices como eres, no me lo ocultas creo que a veces es mejor
esto a que seas engañado o engañada, creo que eso cuenta mas porque me
habla de ti y aunque me cueste trabajo quiero apoyarte, quiero aceptar esto, se
que así serás mas feliz y al compartirlo conmigo seremos muy felices, solo quiero
que sepas que te amo TE AMO TE AMO DEMASIADO TE AMO DEMASIADO y
soy muy feliz a tu lado. Cuando la leía, me dieron ganas de aventar su carta por la
ventana del metro y decirle que ya lo sabía y que yo también la amaba, lo cual no
hice. Llegué a mi casa y me acosté mirando al techo sintiendo satisfacción de lo
que había pasado en el día.
3. Los rayos del sol iluminaban mi recamara mientras guardaba en mi mochila

un oso de peluche que había comprado para Paula. Era ya final de
semestre y todos estaban nerviosos por los exámenes, pero más nervioso
estaba yo porque ese día sería el día en que le confesaría a Paula mi amor.
Había quedado de verla aquel día en la Facultad de Ciencias junto a la
fuente. Tenía miedo de que el clima estuviera feo más para mi sorpresa el
día se mostraba estupendo con un azul del cielo hermoso y una vista
extraordinaria. Estuve largo tiempo viendo el mar hasta que Paula apareció.
Estuvimos platicando hasta que oscureció y mientras mirábamos como la
luz de la primera estrella aparecía en el firmamento le confesé mi amor a lo
que ella respondió que ya tenía novio desde hace un mes, me destrozo.
Aquella noche no pude dormir, el dolor se apoderaba de mi cada vez que
recordaba los momentos que pasamos, la vez que le di su carta y como la
había conocido ese día en las rocas. No podía más, al siguiente día tome
mis cosas, agarre un camión y me dirigí hacia Leblon. Mientras iba en el
camión, veía cómo el sol se ocultaba en el mar mientras me dirigía hacia un
destino incierto. Llegue a su casa y toque el timbre de su departamento.
Cuando salió, me dispuse a terminar la relación, cuando salto llorando y me
abrazo. Estuvo así un largo rato hasta que sentí que ella había vaciado todo
lo que tenía adentro. Aun mojada por sus lagrima se separó de mí, me miro
a los ojos y me dijo “estoy embarazada”
563
Literary English II
Shall
In literary English we use “shall” instead of will with I and we
I shall go to the party. (very formal/literary)
I will go to the party. (formal)
I’ll go to the party. (informal)
If
In very formal and literary English we can change “if” for “should” at the beginning
of the clause.
Should you go to the party, I’ll go. (very formal/literary)
If you go to the party, I will go (formal)
If you go to the party, I’ll go. (neutral)
In formal and literary English, we can invert the verb instead of using if.
Come you, tell me! (lit)
If you come, tell me! (neutral)
In this cases negative are not contracted.
Had I not gone, this wouldn’t have happened.
Inversion
In literary English, we sometimes use the inversion with as, than and so +
adjective.
564
So tired was I that I arrived home and I fell sleep. (literary)
I was so tired that I arrived home and I fell sleep. (formal)
The people are stronger than do you think so. (literary)
The people arre stronger than you think so. (formal)
We often use the invention with the verbs said, asked, suggested etc when these
follow a direct speech (exept when the subject is a pronoun)
What did you think? Asked Henry. But What did you think? He asked.
We often the inversion with adverbial expressions of place.
Under the tree sat I. (lit)
I sat under the tree (formal)
I sat down under the tree (inf)
565
Writing
Escribe una critica de esta historia. (250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Do you agree or disagree with modern literature is better than old literature?
566
567
One hundred and nineteenth lesson
Letters
1. Under a huge apple tree did a man lie down without fretting about anything
more than enjoying the wonderful sight that the forests and the mountains of
his land offered to him. Beside him, it was his fiancée, Marian, to whom he
had known in his childhood and with whom for questions of the life he had
refound to married her. While they both lied down, a sound in the distance
interrupted their tranquillity, it was the lout of his servant, who brought an
important message to the man.
2. The man said “ “What happen, Ted”
3. To what the servant replied “Sir, a letter has arrived”
4. Furious the man said to him “For this reason you bother me”
5. To what the servant said “It’s a letter from New York, the messenger said
that it was important”
6. The man said “Ok, get back to the mansion”
After his servant gave the letter to him, the man started the difficult work to
find out who had sent the letter to him. After a long time thinking about it, the
man realised that the letter had been sent in a such tin, dirty and simple
envelop that no one of his family in his sane juice would have sent it, for
which the man said “it has been my uncle who has sent the letter, it’s the
only relative that still lived in that city.”
The man opened the letter and effectively it was one his uncle’s letter.
7. “Dear, nephew, if you have received this letter it means that I’ve already
died, but as I’ve told you several times juen I was alive, “the life continues”.
As you will know, I’ve never had kids which I decided to come into all my
enormous fortune to you for. Also, I let you my collection of guns, memories
juen I was a private investigator. You could find all the papers that you need
to come into my fortune under the giant whale statute that I have built by the
ocean juere your dad and me used to fish. I expect that you can have a
long, beautiful, calm life as I had and that you can be as hard as the steel
after having reading this letter, see you later, your uncle David.
8. After having reading this, the man did not say anything, he only asked for
having his horse ready to start the trip to his uncle’s house. When he was
riding his horse with direction to New York, the man remembered when he
went to his uncle’s house while he was seeing the ruins of an ancient city on
the top of a mountain. As he arrived at his uncle’s house, the man felt
exhausted and starving, for which he ordered to the servants to bring meal.
After having dinner, the man went bed to one of the rooms of the mansion,
when he looked through a window, the memories of his infancy came to his
mind, specially, the memories of someone came to his mind…
9. To be continued
568
Ciento diecinueve lección
Letras
1. Bajo un enorme manzano se acostaba un hombre sin preocuparse por nada
más que disfrutar de la maravillosa vista que los bosques y las montañas de
su tierra le ofrecían. A su lado, estaba su prometida, Marian, a quien había
conocido en su infancia y con quien por cuestiones de la vida se había
reencontrado para tener los días más felices de su vida. Mientras ambos se
acostaban, un sonido en la distancia interrumpió su tranquilidad, fue el
amante de su sirviente, quien trajo un mensaje importante al hombre.
2. El hombre dijo : "Qué pasa, David".
3. A lo que el sirviente respondió "ha llegado una carta, señor"
4. Furioso el hombre le dijo" Por esta razón me molestas"
5. A lo que dijo el sirviente "Es una carta de New York, el mensajero dijo que
era importante"
6. El hombre dijo "Ok, vuelve a la mansión"
Después de que su sirviente le dio la carta, el hombre comenzó el difícil
trabajo para averiguar quién le había enviado la carta.
"¿Quién me habrá enviado esta carta? Dijo el hombre.
Después de mucho tiempo pensándolo, se dio cuenta de que la carta había
sido enviada en un sobre tan pequeño y sucio que nadie de la familia real
en su jugo cuerdo la había enviado, por lo que el hombre dijo "ha sido el tío
de mi padre quien ha enviado la carta, era el único pariente que todavía
vivía en esa ciudad.
El hombre abrió la carta y efectivamente era una de las cartas de su tío.
7. "Querido, sobrino, si has recibido esta carta significa que ya he muerto,
pero como te he dicho enésimas veces cuando estaba vivo, "la vida
continúa". Como sabrás, nunca he tenido hijos por los que decidí entrar en
toda mi enorme fortuna para ti. Además, te dejo mi colección de armas,
recuerdos cuando era detective privado. Podrías encontrar todos los
papeles que necesitas para entrar en mi fortuna debajo del estatua del
perro gigante que me construi frente del oceano donde tu padre y yo
solíamos pescar. Espero que puedas tener una larga y hermosa vida
tranquila como la que yo tuve y que puedas ser tan duro como el acero después
de haber leído esta carta, hasta luego,
Tu tío David
8. Después de haber leído esto, el hombre no dijo nada, solo pidió tener su caballo
listo para comenzar el viaje a la casa de su tío. Cuando montaba su caballo en
dirección a New York, el hombre recordó cuando fue a la casa de su tío mientras
veía las ruinas de una antigua ciudad en la cima de una montaña. Cuando llegó a
la casa de su tío, el hombre se sintió agotado y hambriento, por lo que ordenó a
los sirvientes que trajeran comida. Después de cenar, el hombre se fue a la cama
a una de las habitaciones de la mansión, cuando miró por una ventana, le vinieron
a la mente los recuerdos de su infancia, especialmente, los recuerdos de alguien
vinieron a su mente.
9. Continuará
569
Emphasis
There are many ways to emphasis in English. Some of them are:
1. Using so and such with adjectives.
“He’s such a nice man, you should marry him?
I’m so happy to see you
2. Using exaggerated vocabulary.
We’re starving.
3. Using intensifying adverbs.
She’s absolutely wonderful.
4. Using simile.
Her eyes as blue as the sky.
4. Using the expression “on Earth”
Why on Earth did you say that?
5. Changing the order of the words.
My brother cut down the apple tree (without emphasis)
It was my brother who cut down the apple tree (emphasis in the brother)
It was the apple tree that my brother cut down (emphasis in the tree)
570
Writing
Escribe una continuacion para esta historia. Utiliza por lo menos 20 palabras
literareas. (250 palabras)
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________
Speaking
Do you agree or disagree with the people is speak using words of other
languagues?
571
Appendix
572
Irregular verbs
Here a list of the most common irregular verbs in English.
 be (am, is, are) – was, were – been

 bear – bore – borne
 beat – beat – beaten
 become – became - become
 begin – began – begun
 bend – bent – bent
 bet – bet – bet
 bind – bound – bound
 bite – bit – bitten
 bleed – bled – bled
 blow – blew – blown
 break – broke – broken
 breed – bred – bred
 bring – brought – brought
 build – built – built
 burn – burned – burned
 burst – burst – burst
 buy – bought – bought
 can – could – (been able to)
 catch – caught – caught
 choose – chose – chosen
 cling – clung – clung
 come – came – come
 cost – cost – cost
 creep – crept – crept
 cut – cut – cut
 deal – dealt – dealt
 dig – dug – dug
 do – did – done
 draw – drew – drawn
 dream – dreamed – dreamed
 drink – drank – drunk
 drive – drove – driven
 eat – ate – eaten
 fall – fell – fallen
 feed – fed – fed
 feel – felt – felt
 fight – fought – fought
573
 find – found – found
 flee – fled – fled
 fling – flung – flung
 fly – flew – flown
 forbid – forbade – forbidden
 forget – forgot – forgotten
 forgive – forgave - forgiven
 forsake – forsook – forsaken
 freeze – froze – frozen
 get – got – gotten
 give – gave – given
 go – went – gone
 grow – grew – grown
 hang – hung/hanged – hung
 have – had – had
 hear – heard – heard
 hide – hid – hidden
 hit – hit – hit
 hold – held – held
 hurt – hurt – hurt
 keep – kept – kept
 know – knew – known
 lay – laid – laid
 lead – led – led
 lean – leant – leant
 learn – learned/learned – learned
 leave – left – left
 lend – lent – lent
 let – let – let
 lie – lay – lain
 lose – lost – lost
 make – made – made
 mean – meant – meant
 meet – met – met
 pay – paid – paid
 prove – proved – proved/proven
 put – put – put
 quit – quit – quit
 read – read – read
 rend – rent – rent
 ride – rode – ridden
 ring – rang – rung
 rise – rose – risen
574
 run – ran – run
 saw – sawed – sawn/sawed
 say – said – said
 see – saw – seen
 seek – sought – sought
 sell – sold – sold
 send – sent – sent
 set – set – set
 shake – shook – shaken
 shoot – shot – shot
 show – showed – shown
 shrink – shrank – shrunk
 shrive – shrove – shriven
 shut – shut – shut
 sing – sang – sung
 sink – sank – sunk
 sit – sat – sat
 sleep – slept – slept
 sling – slung – slung
 slink – slunk – slunk
 smell – smelled/smelled – smelled
 speak – spoke – spoken
 spell – spelled/spelt – spelled/spelt
 spend – spent – spent
 spread – spread – spread
 spring – sprang – sprung
 stand – stood – stood
 stave – staved/stove – staved/stove
 steal – stole – stolen
 stink – stank – stunk
 strike – struck – stricken
 swear – swore – sworn
 swim – swam – swum
 swing – swung – swung
 take – took – taken
 teach – taught – taught
 tear – tore – torn
 tell – told – told
 think – thought – thought
 throw – threw – thrown
 thrust – thrust/thrusted – thrust/thrusted
 wake – woke – woken
 wear – wore – worn
575
 weep – wept – wept
 win – won – won
 wring – wrang/wrung – wrung
 write – wrote – written
576
Verbs
Here are the 400 most common English verbs.
Verb Meaning
Ta abandon Abandonar
To embrace Abrazar
To open Abrir
To bore Aburrir
To accept Aceptar
To advise Aconsejar
To remember Acordar
To act Actuar
To accuse Acusar
To guess Adivinar
To admire Admirar
To accept Admitir
To adore Adorar
To warn Advertir
To affect Afectar
To affirm Afirmar
To thank Agradecer
To drown Ahogar
To love Amar
To announce Anunciar
To appear Aparecer
To separate Apartar
To applaud Aplaudir
To contribute Aportar
To lean Apoyar
To appreciate Apreciar
To learn Aprender
To approve Aprobar
To pull Arrastrar
To repair Arreglar
To regret Arrepentir
To arrest Arrestar
To risk Arriesgar
To murder Asesinar
To assassinate
To secure Asegurar
To attend Asistir
577
To scared Asustar
To attack Atacar
To attract Atraer
To catch Atrapar
To cross Atravesar
To increase Aumentar
To advance Avanzar
To shame Avergonzar
To help Ayudar
To dance Bailar
To bath Bañar
To whip Batir
To drink Beber
To kiss Besar
To tan Broncear
To fall Caerse
To calm Calmar
To change Cambiar
To walk Caminar
To cancel Cancelar
To tire Cansar
To sing Cantar
To marry Casar
To dig Cavar
To hunt Cazar
To close Cerrar
To earn Cobrar
To cook Cocinar
To fuck Coger
To place Colocar
To color Colorear
To combine Combinar
To begin Comenzar
To eat Comer
To share Compartir
To complete Completar
To repair Componer
To behave Comportar
To buy Comprar
To understand Comprender
To compete Concursar
To trust Confiar
To confirm Confirmar
To drive Conducir
To conjugate Conjugar
578
To know Conocer
To conquer Conquistar
To get Conseguir
To maintain Conservar
To consider Considerar
To build Construir
To count Contar
To answer Contestar
To continue Continuar
To control Controlar
To copy Copiar
To correct Corregir
To run Correr
To cut Cortar
To cost Costar
To create Crear
To grown Crecer
To believe Creer
To cover Cubrir
To recover Curar
To damage Dañar
To give Dar
To say Decir
To tell
To decide Decidir
To declare Declarar
To dedicate Dedicar
To defend Defender
To let Dejar
To spell Deletrear
To demonstrate Demostrar
To disappear Desaparecer
To develop Desarrollarse
To unplug Desconectar
To describe Describir
To discover Descubrir
To neglect Descuidar
To destroy Destruir
To wish Desear
To disobey Desobedecer
To detest Detestar
To undress Desvestir
To draw Dibujar
To apologize Disculpar
To discuss Discutir
579
To enjoy Disfrutar
To design Diseñar
To provide Disponer
To distinguish Distinguir
To amuse Divertir
To hurt Doler
To divorce Divorciar
To donate Donar
To sleep Dormir
To doubt Dudar
To last Durar
To choose Elegir
To push Empujar
To bewitch Encantar
To find Encontrar
To deceive Engañar
To anger Enojar
To enrich Enriquecer
To practice Ensayar
To teach Enseñar
To understand Entender
To give Entregar
To train Entrenar
To send Enviar
To climb Escalar
To choose Escoger
To listen Escuchar
To write Escribir
To wait Esperar
To hope
To study Estudiar
To avoid Evitar
To dig Excavar
To exist Existir
To experiment Experimentar
To explain Explicar
To explore Explorar
To express Expresar
To miss Extrañar
To import Importar
To fail Fallar
To form Formar
To fry Freír
To work Funcionar
To smoke Fumar
580
To win Ganar
To guarantee Garantizar
To spend Gastar
To shout Gritar
To keep Guardar
To guide Guiar
To like Gustar
To talk Hablar
To do Hacer
To make
To boil Hervir
To injure Herir
To bake Hornear
To flee Huir
To sink Hundir
To identify Identificar
To imagine Imaginar
To begin Iniciar
To register Inscribir
To inspire Inspirar
To try Intentar
To interest Interesar
To interrogate Interrogar
To flood Inundar
To invent Inventar
To research Investigar
To go Ir
To invite Invitar
To pull Jalar
To play Jugar
To swear Jurar
To regret Lamentar
To hurt Lastimar
To wash Lavar
To read Leer
To clean Limpiar
To call Llamar
To arrive Llegar
To fill Llenar
To cry Llorar
To rain Llover
To achieve Lograr
To fight Luchar
To maltreat Maltratar
To send Mandar
581
To order Mandar (dar
órdenes)
To drive Manejar
To support Mantener
To mark Marcar
To cheaw Masticar
To kill Matar
To measure Medir
To improve Mejorar
To memorize Memorizar
To lie Mentir
To mix Mesclar
To put Meter
To look Mirar
To wet Mojar
To bother Molestar
Mirir Morir
To show Mostrar
Move Mover
To swim Nadar
To need Necesitar
To negate Negar
To snow Nevar
To obligate Obligar
To watch Observar
To hide Ocultar
To hear Oír
To forget Olvidar
To order Ordenar
To tidy Ordenar (poner en
orden)
To hate Odiar
To organize Organizar
To offer Ofrecer
To pay Pagar
To stop Parar
To participate Participar
To split Partir
to leave Partir (irse)
To pass Pasar
To ask Pedir
To beat Pegar
To attach Pegar
(pegamento)
To comb Peinar
582
To fight Pelear
To think Pensar
To loose Perder
To forgive Perdonar
To allow Permitir
To put Poner
To prefer Preferir
To ask Preguntar
To worry Preocupar
To present Presentar
To borrow Prestar
To lend (a alguien)
To prevent Prevenir
To prove Probar
To produce Producir
To prohibit Prohibir
To promise Prometer
To pronounce Pronunciar
To protect Proteger
To stay Quedar
(permanecer)
To complain Quejar
To burn Quemar
To want Querer
To take Quitar
To receive Recibir
To reject Rechazar
To protest Reclamar
To collect Recoger
To recommend Recomendar
To recognize Reconocer
To remember Recordar
To laugh Reír
To give Regalar
To repair Reparar
To distribute Repartir
To repeat Repetir
To rescue Rescatar
To resist Resistir
To resolve Resolver
To answer Responder
To review Revisar
To steal (general) Robar
To mug (en la
calle o en el
583
transporte barlico)
To rob (banco)
To break Romper
To know Saber
To jump Saltar
To leave Salir
To greet Saludar
To save Salvar
To dry Secar
To follow Seguir
To sit Sentar
To feel Sentir
To ask Solicitar
To sound Sonar
To smile Sonreír
To dream Soñar
To blow Soplar
To support Soportar
To surprise Sorprender
To survive Sobrevivir
To raise Subir
To highlight Subrayar
To happen Suceder
To suffer Sufrir
To suggest Sugerir
To suppose Suponer
To throw Tirar
To call Telefonear
To finish Terminar
To touch Tocar
To play Tocar
(instrumento)
To take Tomar
To work Trabajar
To translate Traducir
To bring Traer
To try Tratar
To use Usar/utilizar
To see Ver
To sell Vender
To come Venir
To win Vencer
To dress Vestir
To travel Viajar
To visit Visitar
584
To live Vivir
To fly Volar
To become Volver (se)
585
Phrasal Verbs
Here are the most common phrasal verbs in English.
Ask out Inviter a salir I asked out Rachael

Be off Irse (en el momento) I’m off
Estar de vacaciones
Be over Acabar It’s over
Be up Ser de
Book into Reservar (para alguien mas) The agency travel booked us
into a hotel on the beach
Break down Descomponerse The car broke down
Break into Entrar (a una casa (robar)) The robber broke into the
house
Break up Salir de las escuela (terminar las I break up the semester in
clases) november
Terminar el semestre
Cortar (relacion) Ann broke up with his
boyfriend yesterday
Break off Poner fin a the treaty broke off several
years of conflicts
Call back Llamar (regresar la llamada) I have to go. I call you back
later
Call for Requerir I call for you send me the
documents
Call off Cancelar (un evento The concert was called off
preprogramado) because of the rain
Call up Hechar una llamada Call up Ann to know if she’s
coming
Carry off Sacar adelante He carried off his family by
himself
Carry on Seguir (haciendo algo)
Carry out Cumplir I always carry out my
promises
Carry Llevar acabo The police carried thought an
through operation agains the crime
Bring about Provocar He tried to bring about David
to fight with him
Bring Reanimar The doctors could bring
(a)round (a)round the man
Bring up Educar (un niño) I was brought up in
Sacar el tema de/hablar de Cambridge
Jennifer brought up my new
586
job
Calm down Calmarse Calm down!
Catch up on Ponerse al corriente
Catch up Alcanzar (igualar)
with
Check in Registrarse (un hotel)
Check out Registrarse de salida (de un hotel)
Check up on Comprobar (informacion)
Investigar (algo o a alguien)
Close down Clausurar
Come Encontrarse (alguien o algo por
across accidente)
Come down Caer
Come down Estar enfermo de
with Tener (una enfermedad)
Come in Entrar
Come into Heredar
Come out Salir
Salir a la venta
Come round Volver en si
Come up Acercarse
Come up Sugerir/pensar/encontrar/proponer
with una idea, un plan o una solucion
Cut down Talar
Reducir (+ verbo)
Cut down on Reducir (+ sustantivo)
Hacer recortes en
Cut off Cortar (completamente) I cut off mi finger
Die down Calmarse/tranquilizarse The wind died down
(viento/fuego/ruido)
Do up Remodelar We’re doing up my apartment
Do with Se me antoja
Do without Vivir sin
Drag along Arrastrar
Draw back Hacerse para atras
Dress up Vestir (de gala) I dressed up for Mary’s
wedding
Drop in (to) Visitar (a) I drop in (to) my parents on
vacations
Drop out Dejar (de estudiar) I dropped out when I was 22
End up Terminar I ended up going on foot
Face up with Afrontar
Fall apart Desacerse The robber tried to fall apart
of the evidence
Fall behind Atrasarse The plane fell behind
587
Fall out Pelear(se) The two men fell out outside
the house
Feel like Tener ganas de I feel like a cup of coffe
Fill in Llenar (un espacio en blanco/una
forma)
Find out Descubrir
Fit in Caber The sofa doesn’t fit in the
living-room
Fit with in Encajar
Get ahead Salir Adelante
Get around Moverse (desplazarse de un lugar
a otro)
Go on Escapar (de un peligro) (salirse de
vacations un lugar incomodo)
Irse de vacaciones
Ho on Salirse con las suya
vacations
with
Get by Arreglarselas
Get down Ponerse a
Get down to Ir al grano
Get from Escaparse (de alguien)
Get in Entrar (carro)
Get back Regresar (de un lugar)
Get off Bajarse (carro)
Get on Llevarse bien
Lazarse (hacer algo o ir a un lugar)
Continuar hacienda algo que ya no
se hacia o que se tiene miedo de
continuar)
Go out Andar (novios)
Get out of Irse/ salir (con necesidad)
Levantarse (de la cama)
Evitar hacer algo que no quieres,
especialmente poniendo escusas
Get over Recuperarse
Mejorarse (enfermedad)
Get over Hacer/terminar (algo que no
with quieres hacer)
Get through Terminar (algo)
Get up Despertarse
Give away Donar
Regular
Give in darse por vencido
Give off Emitir
Give out Distribuir
588
No resistir
Give up Rendirse
Give up on Perder la fe
Go ahead Llevar acabo
Go around Ir por ahi
Go back Ir de regreso
Go by Pasar (el tiempo)
Go Bajar (las escaleras)
downstairs
Go in Entrar
Go for Elegir
Go off Explotar (una bomba)
Dejar de gustar
Go on Pasar
Go out Salir
Go over Darle vueltas
Go through Ir mal
Tener que pasar
Go up Aumentar
Subir
Go upstairs Subir (las escaleras)
Hang around Pasar (el tiempo con alguien)
Hang up Colgar (telefono)
Hit back Atacar a alguien que te ataco o te
critico
Hit it off Llevarse bien (la primera vez que
se conocieron)
Hold back Aguantar(se)/contener (emosion)
Hold on Esperar (telefono)
Agarrarse (sujetarse)
Hold up Hacer esperar
Hacer que alguien llegue tarde
Atracar
Keep away Mantenerse lejos
Keep on Insister
Keep in Castirgar (un niño)
Keep down Disminuir
Keep to Seguir adelante con
Keep up Seguir el ritmo
Key in Teclear
Knock out Noquear
Knock down Demoler
Let off Quedar libre
Lit up Iluminar
Live up to Estar a la altura
589
Log in Iniciar session
Log off Cerrar session
Look after Cuidar
Look down Ver por debajo
on
Look for Buscar
Look forward Tener muchas ganas de (que algo
to pase)
Look into Investigar
Look thought Leer (normalmente rapidamente)
Look up Buscar (en el diccionario o en el
directorio)
Look up to Admirar
Make for Dirigirse hacia
Make out Alcanzar a ver/escuchar/
Poder entender
Make up Hacer las pases
Maquillarse
Inventar
Make up for Compensar
Miss out Perder (la oportundiad de hacer
algo)
Move in Mudarse
Pass away Fallecer
Pass off Hacer pasar por
Pay off Liquidar/pagar (una deuda)
Pick up Aprender (un idioma o habilidad)
Recoger
Pull away Arrancar
Pull on Vestirse (rapidamente)
Pull up Detenerse (carro)
Put down Bajar (algo que estas agarrando)
Put off Desalentar
Posponer
Put out Apagar (fuego, luz)
Put through Pasar (por telefono)
Put together Armar (algo)
Put up Protestar
Dar alojamiento
Quedarse (en un lugar
temporalmente o de vacaciones)
Eregir/construer/levantar
Put up with Tolelar
Run away Huir
Run into Encontrarse (a alguien)
590
Pegarse/estrellarse/chocar (con
algo sin querer)
Run out of Quedarse sin
Save up Ahorrar
Sell out Agotarse (algo en venta)
Venderse (acabarse)
Sell out of Vender todo
Send off Enviar
Set about Ponerse a
Set aside Dejar de (momentaneamente)
Set back Retrasar(se)
Set off/out Salir de viaje
Set up Poner (un negocio)
Shut down Cerrar (un negocio)
Slip on Ponerse (algo rapidamente)
Slip out Salirse (comentario)
Stand out Resaltar
Start out Empezar a trabajar
Empezar (poniendo enfasis en el
inicio)
Stop over Quedarse (en un lugar camino una
o dos noches cuando se va en
camino a otro lugar o de regreso a
casa)
Take after Parecerse (a alguien de la familia)
Actuar como/ser como (alguien de
la familia)
Take back Regresar
Take in Captar (entender)
Engañar (passive)
Take off Despegar
Take on Hacerse cargo de
Take out Sacar
Take over Encangarse de
Take up Empezar (un nuevo hobby o
deporte)
Ocupar 8tiempo)
Talk into Convencer (a alguien de que haga
algo)
Team up Hacer equipo
Tell apart Distinguir
Diferenciar
Team up Hacer equipo
Tidy up Recoger (cuarto)
Turn back Regresar (un camino cuando se
591
tiene un mal precentimiento)
Turn down Bajar (el volumen) Can you turn out the radio?
Rechazar
Turn into Convertirse en
Turn off Apagar
Turn on Prender
Turn out Acudir
Turn up Subir (volume)
Calentarse (maquina)
Aparecer
Wake up Despertarse
Wear off Desaparecer (sentimiento o efecto
de algo)
Write down Anotar
Write up Escribir (cuando se saaca la
informacion de varias fuentes)
Work on Hacer (algo que se lleva rato
haciendo o que se esta
desarrollando
Work out Calculary
Resolver
592
Numbers
0 Zero 10 Ten
1 One 11 Eleven
2 Two 12 Twelve
3 Three 13 Thirteen
4 Four 14 Fourteen
5 Five 15 Fifteen
6 Six 16 Sixteen
7 Seven 17 Seventeen
8 Eight 18 Eighteen
9 Nine 19 Nineteen
Numbers from 20 to 99
20 Twenty 60 Sixty
30 Thirty 70 Seventy
40 Forty 80 Eighty
50 Fifty 90 Ninety
The numbers with ten and unit are built by putting the ten + hyphen + unit.
Example: 21 = Twenty-one
32 = Thirty-two
100 One hundred 600 Six hundred

200 Two hundred 700 Seven hundred
300 Three hundred 800 eight hundred
400 Four hundred 900 Nine hundred
500 Five hundred
One can be changed for a in informal speech.
593
The numbers with hundred got ten, unit or they both, it puts “and” between the
hundred and the rest of the number.
Example: 100 = One hundred
101 = One hundred and one
121 = One hundred and twenty-one
1000 One thousand

1002 One thousand two
1032 One thousand thirty-two
1432 One thousand four hundred and thirty-two
15432 Fifteen thousand four hundred and thirty-two
When we talk about years, we pronounce the numbers as they were separated
tens.
Ex. The year 1994 is pronounced as nineteen ninety-four, and not “one thousand
nine hundred and ninety-four.
100000 One hundred thousand

100001 One hundred thousand one
100021 One hundred thousand and twenty-one
100321 One hundred thousand three hundred and twenty-one
104321 One hundred and four thousand three hundred and twenty-
one
154321 One hundred and fifty-four thousand three hundred and
twenty-one
1000000 One million
594
Vocabulary
Unit 1
Country
United States Estados Unidos
Mexico México
United States Inglaterra
Spain España
France Francia
Italy Italia
Germany Alemania
Russia Rusia
China China
Japan Japón
Canada Canadá
Brazil Brasil
Australia Australia
Scotland Escocia
Ireland Irlanda
Holland Holanda
Turkey Turquía
Greece Grecia
Thailand Tailandia
Professions
Lawyer Abogado
Professor Profesor
Teacher Maestro
Doctor Doctor
Architect Arquitecto
Engineer Ingeniero
Accountant Contador
Designer Diseñador
Psychologist Psicólogo
Builder Albañil
Pilot Piloto
Carpenter Carpintero
Plumber Plomero
Electrician Electricista
Seller Vendedor
Cab driver Cabsta
Driver Conductor
Cook Cocinero
Housewife Ama de casa
Adjectives
595
Happy Feliz
Strong Fuerte
New Nuevo
Young Joven
Tall Alto
Hot Caliente
Big Grande
Cheap Barato
Long Largo
Beautiful Bonito
Fast Rápido
Rich Rico
Slim Delgado
Sad Triste
Weak Débil
Old Viejo
Old Viejo
Short Chaparro
Cold Frio
Small Pequeño
Expensive Caro
Short Corto
Ugly Feo
Slow Lento
Poor Pobre
Fat Gordo
Basic phrases
Good morning Buenos días
Good afternoon Buenas tardes
Good evening Buenas noches
Good night Buenas noches (cuando se va a dormir)
Have a nice day Que tenga un buen día
Hello Hola
Hi Hola (informal)
What’s your name? Como se llama?
My name is Me llamo
How are you? Como estas
How are you? Como te va
Fine Bien
Bad Mal
So-so Mas o menos
How old are you? Cuantos años tiene
Where are you from? De donde es
I’m from Soy de
Where do you live? Donde vive
596
I live in Vivo en
Goodbye Adiós
See you Nos vemos
See you later Hasta pronto
Animals
Cat Gato
Dog Perro
Bird Pájaro
Mouse Ratón
Fish Pez
Horse Caballo
Elephant Elefante
Giraffe Jirafa
Pig Cerdo
Shark Tiburón
Whale Ballena
Turtle Tortuga
Tortoise Tortuga (terrestre)
Monkey Mono
Lion León
Bear Oso
Duck Pato
Ant Hormiga
Cow Vaca
Snake Víbora
Adjectives II
Lazy Flojo
Patient Paciente
Calm Tranquilo
Hard-working Trabajador
Educated Educado
Rude Grosero
Show-off Presumido
Extrovertive Extrovertido
Shy Tímido
Tender Cariñoso
Friendly Amistoso
Funny Divertido
Comprehensive Comprensivo
Jealous Celoso
Brave Valiente
Courageous
Kind Amable
Introvertive Introvertido
Responsible Responsable
597
Compromised Comprometido
Lying Mentiroso
Unit 2
Colors
Color Color
Green Verde
Red Rojo
Orange Naranja
White Blanco
Purple Morado
Yellow Amarillo
Black Negro
Blue Azul
Brown Cafe
Gray Gris
Pink Rosa
Golden Dorado
Silver Plateado
Colorful De colores
Light Claro
Dark Obscuro
Family
Dad Padre
Mom Madre
Grandpa Abuelo
Grandma Abuela
Brother Hermano
Sister Hermana
Son Hijo
Daughter Hija
Grandson Nieto
Granddaughter Nieta
Uncle Tío
Aunt Tía
Nephew Sobrino
Niece Sobrina
Cousin Primo
Cousin Prima
Dad Papa
Mom Mamá
Great-grandpa Bisabuelo
Great-grandma Bisabuela
Parts of the body
Body Cuerpo
Head Cabeza
598
Hair Cabello
Eye Ojo
Mouth Boca
Lip Labio
Tooth Diente
Ear Oreja
Nose Nariz
Neck Cuello
Shoulder hombro
Arm Brazo
Elbow Codo
Hand Mano
Nail Uña
Finger Dedo
Leg Pierna
Knee Rodilla
Foot Pie
Back Espalda
City
City Ciudad
Restaurant Restaurant
Hotel Hotel
Hospital Hospital
Airport Aeropuerto
Port Puerto
Coach station Central camionera
Park Parque
School Escuela
University Universidad
Bank Banco
Storeping center Centro comercial
Square Plaza
Market Mercado
Movie theater Cine
Monument Monumento
Museum Museo
Avenue Avenida
Street Calle
Castle Castillo
Church Iglesia
House Casa
House
Apartment Departamento
Block of apartments Unidad habitacional
Living-room Sala
599
Dinner room Comedor
Kitchen Cocina
Bathroom Baño
Room Cuarto
Attic Ático
Basement Sótano
Yard Jardín
Garage Cochera
Floor Piso
Stairs Escaleras
Door Puerta
Window Ventana
Table Mesa
Sofa Sillón
Armchair Sillón chiquito
Classroom
Chair Silla
Pen Pluma
Pencil Lápiz
Notebook Cuaderno
Eraser Goma
Sharpener Sacapuntas
Book Libro
Rucksack Mochila
Color Color
Case Estuchera
Sheet Hoja
Stapler Engrapadora
Durex Diurex
Scissors Tijeras
Ruler Regla
Brand text Marcador de textos
Draft Borrador
Whiteboard Pizarrón
Concealer Corrector
Staple Grapa
Animals II
Eagle Águila
Crocodile Cocodrilo
Camel Camello
Kangaroo Canguro
Tiger Tigre
Rabbit Conejo
Bee Abeja
Spider Araña
600
Donkey Burro
Scorpion Escorpión
Ken Gallina
Cock Gallo
Bull Toro
Fly Mosca
Mosquito Mosquito
Penguin Pingüino
Fox Zorro
Sheep Oveja
Octopus Pulpo
Zebra Cebra
Unit 3
Ver lista de verbos Lección 15
Art
Art Arte
Music Música
Song Canción
Guitar Guitarra
Piano Piano
Bass Bajo
Drums Batería
Musician Musico
Painting Pintura
Painter Pintor
Sculpture Escultura
Theater Teatro
Work Obra
Literature Literatura
Writer Escritor
Novel Novela
Tail Cuento
Dance Danza
Architecture Arquitectura
Weather
Weather Clima
Boiling hot De 30 grados en adelante
Hot Mucho calor
Warm Calor
Fine Rico
Cool Frio
Chilly Mucho frio
Cold Muchisimo frio
Freezing cold De menos 5 para abajo
Rainy Lluvioso
601
Windy Con viento
Snowy Con nieve
Wet Húmedo
Cloudy Nublado
Sunny Soleado
Rain Lluvia
Wind Viento
Sunny Sol
Snow Nieve
Cloud Nube
Very cold Mucho frio
Very hot Mucho calor
Fuggy Con niebla
Fog Niebla
Time
Millennium Milenio
Century Siglo
Hour Hora
Minute Minuto
Second Segundo
Clock Reloj
Watch Reloj (de pulsera)
Year Año
Month Mes
Week Semana
Day Dia
Morning Mañana
Afternoon Tarde
Night Noche
Night Madrugada
Season of the year Estacion del año
Spring Primavera
Summer Verano
Fall Otoño
Winter invierno
Means of transport
Means of transport Medios de transporte
Subway Metro
Train Tren
Airplane Avion
Ship Barco
Motorcycle Moto
Bus Camion
Cab Cab
Helicopter Helicóptero
602
Horse Caballo
On foot A pie
Tram Tren via
Bicycle biclicleta
Coach Autobus
Van Camioneta
Cycle-rickshaw Bicicab
Clothes
Clothes Ropa
Shoe Zapato
Sock Calcetín
Pants Pantalón
T-shirt Playera
Shirt Camisa
Costume Traje
Dress Vestido
Trainers Tenis
High-heels Zapatilla
Sweatshirt Sudadera
Jacket Chamarra
Tie Corbata
Button Botón
Hat Sombrero
Cap Gorra
Scarf Bufanda
Skirt Falda
Jeans Pantalón de mezclilla
Shorts Short
Unit 4
Health
Health Salud
Sickness Enfermedad
Sick Enfermo
Cold Resfriado
Flu Gripe
Fever Fiebre
Vomit Vomito
Diarrhoea Diarrea
Pain Dolor
Headache Dolor de cabeza
Throat pain Dolor de garganta
Stomach ache Dolor de estomago
Itch Comezón
Fracture Fractura
Runny nose Escurrimiento nasal
603
Dizziness Mareo
Medicine Medicina
Pill Pastilla
Injection Inyección
Plaster Yeso
Food
Fruit Fruta
Orange Naranja
Banana Plátano
Apple Manzana
Pear Pera
Melon Melón
Watermelon Sandia
Pineapple Piña
Guava Guayaba
Strawberry Fresa
Cerise Cereza
Vegetable Verdura
Potato Papa
Tomato Jitomate
Carrot Zanahoria
Lettuce Lechuga
Lemon Limón
Avocado Aguacate
Chilli Chile
Onion Cebolla
Meat Carne
Beef Carne de res
Pork Carne de puerco
Ham Jamón
Chicken Pollo
Sea fruit Mariscos
Fish Pescado
Octopus Pulpo
Lobster Langosta
Shrimp Camarón
Drink Bebida
Water Agua
Coffee Café
Tea Te
Juice Jugo
Beer Cerveza
Bitter Cerveza (obscura)
Wine Vino
Coke Refresco
604
Milk Leche
Condiment Condimentos
Salt Sal
Pepper Pimienta
Sugar Azúcar
Cinnamon Canela
Bread Pan
Dairy Lácteos
Cheese Queso
Cream Crema
Pasta Pasta
Egg Huevo
Flour Harina
Seasoning Aderezo
Mayonnaise Mayonesa
Ketchup Capsu
Sauce Salsa
Walnut Nuez
Rice Arroz
Bean Frijol
Raisin Pasa
Jam Mermelada
Soft toffee Cajeta
Honey Miel
Snacks Antojitos
Pizza Pizza
Hamburger Hamburguesa
Hot-dog Hot-dog
Fries Papas a la francesa
Dessert Postre
Ice cream Helado
Cake Pastel
Jelly Gelatina
Restaurant
Coffee store Cafetería
Waiter Mesero
Reservation Reservación
Menu Menú
Entrance Entrada
Starter Entremés
Main dish Plato principal
Plate Plato
Bowl Plato hondo
Glass Vaso
Bottle Botella
605
Glass Copa
Cutlery Cubiertos
Knife Cuchillo
Fork Tenedor
Spoon Cuchara
Serviette Servilleta
Hotel
Single room Cuarto para una persona
Double room Cuarto doble
Air acconditionant Aire acondicionado
Facilities Instalaciones
Swimming pool Alberca
Room service Servicio a la habitación
All include Todo incluido
Break-fast include Desayuno incluido
Bellhop Botones
Luggage Equipaje
Reception Recepción
Spa Spa
Resort Resort
Sea Mar
Beach Playa
See sight Con vista al mar
Housekeeper Mucama
Receptionist Recepcionista
Towel Toalla
Regulations Reglamento
Lenguagues
American Estadunidense
Mexican Mexicano
English Inglés
Spanish Español
French Francés
Italian Italiano
German Alemán
Russian Ruso
Chinese Chino
Japanese Japón
Canadian Canadiense
Brazilian Brasileño
Australian Australiano
Scottish Escoses
Irish Irlandés
Dutch Holandés
Turkish Turco
606
Greek Griego
Thai Tailandés
Unit 5
Adjectives III
Wide Ancho
Thin Flaco
Sport Deportivo
Hard Duro
Easy Fácil
Fine Fino
Free Gratis
Thickness Grueso
Good-looking Guapo
Pretty Lindo
Medium-size Mediano
Modern Moderno
Dead Muerto
Old-fashioned Pasado de moda
Heavy Pesado
Possible Posible
Tasty Rico (de sabor)
Noisy Ruidoso
Quiet Silencioso
Alive Vivo
City II
BAR Bar
night club Antro
mail office Oficina de correos
Delegation Delegación
Police station Estación de policía
Firefighter station Estación de bomberos
Building Edificio
Jail Cárcel
Cemetery Cementerio
Aquarium Acuario
Zoo Zoológico
Stadium Estadio
Cathedral Catedral
Library Biblioteca
Neighborhood Colonia
Skyscraper Rascacielos
Office Oficina
Prison Prison
Parking Estacionamiento
Nature
607
Nature Naturaleza
Desert Desierto
Rainforest Selva
Forest Bosque
Mountain Montaña
Coast Costa
Fild Campo
Town Pueblo
Island Isla
Lake Lago
River Rio
Ocean Océano
Golf Golfo
Continent Continente
America America
Europe Europa
Asia Asia
Africa Africa
Oceania Oceania
Human body II
Eyebrow Ceja
Eyelash Pestaña
Cheek Cachete
Medium-high Estatura media
Short Chaparro
Thin Complexión delgada
Dick Anchita
Potbellied Barrigón
Chubby Llenito
Straight Lacio
Wavy Ondulado
Curly Rizado
Curly Chino
Bald Pelón
Bald Calvo
Freckle Pecas
Wrinkle Arrugas
Personality
Personality Personalidad
Nice Agradable
Active Activo
Adorable Adorable
Polite Cortez
Learned Culto
Sweet Dulce
608
Educated Educado
Mature Maduro
Ordinated Ordenado
Optimist Optimista
Pacific Pacifico
Sensitive Sensible
Simpatico Simpático
Sincere Sincero
Sociable Sociable
Rational Racional
Pretty Lindo
Stores
Stationary store Papelería
Bakery Panadería
Book store Librería
Butcher’s Carnicería
Ice cream parrot Peletería
Grocery’s Verdulería
Toy store Juguetería
Hairdresser Peluquería
Jewelry Joyería
Coffee store Cafetería
Florist’s Florería
cake store Pastelería
Optician’s store Óptica
Fishmonger’s Pescaderia
Shoe store Zapatería
Perfumery Perfumería
Store Tienda
Clothing store Tienda de ropa
Car agency Agencia de autos
Laundry Lavandería
Unit 6
Messure
Pound Pound
Gram Gramo
Litre Litro
Inventions
Television Televisión
Cell phone Celular
Video games Video juegos
Computer Computadora
Laptop Laptop
Internet Internet
Camera Cámara fotografica
609
Camera movie Cámara de video
Radio Radio
Satellite Satélite
Antenna Antena
Satellite dish Antena parabólica
- Sin vocabulario
Movie theater
Timetable Horario
Function Función
Entrance Entrada
Hoarding Cartelera
Popcorn Palomitas
Horror De terror
Action Acción
Thriller Pelicula de suspenso
Love Amor
Romantic Romántica
Western Pelicula del oeste
Science fiction De ciencia ficción
Wedding
Wedding Boda
Husband Marido
Wife Mujer
Husband Esposo
Wife Esposa
Groom Novio (de altar)
Bride Novia (de altar)
Fiancé Novio (de mucho tiempo)
Fiancée Novia (de mucho tiempo)
Boyfriend Novio
Girlfriend Novia
Maid of honour Dama de honor
Guest Invitado
Marriage Matrimonio
Engagement Noviazgo
Priest Padre
Judge Juez
Wedding hall Salon de bodas
Civil registry Registro civil
Environment
Environment Medio ambiente
Global warming Calentamiento global
Greenhouse effect Efecto invernadero
Climatic change Cambio climático
Ozone layer Capa de ozono
610
Pollution Contaminación
Melting of the poles Derretimiento de los polos
Rising sea levels Aumento del nível del mar
Renewable energies Energías renovables
Solar energy Energía solar
Wind energy Energía eólica
Nuclear energy Energía nuclear
Oil spill Derrame gasero
Trash Basura
Extinction Extinción
Fossil fuel Combustibles fósiles
Deforestation Deforestación
Recycling Reciclaje
Temperature Temperatura
Unit 7
City problems
Crime Delincuencia
Overpopulation Sobrepoblación
Health II
Hiccup Hipo
Bruise Contusion
Weal Roncha
Bruise Moreton
Dent Golpe
Poisoning Intoxicacion
Burn Quemadura
Tablet Tableta
Antibiotic Antibiotico
Serum Suero
Dressing Vendaje
Stich Puntada
Analgesic Analgesico
Rest Reposo
Syrup Jarabe
Vaccine Vacuna
Thermometer Termometro
Syringe Jeringa
Blood Sangre
Analysis Analisis
House II
Bedsit Cuarto
Studio apartment Cuarto con cocina y baño
Apartmentshare Departamento compartido
Houseshare Casa compartida
Cottage Cabaña
611
Residential area Area residencial
Suburbs Suburbios
Roof Techo
Two-floor De dos pisos
Two-bedroom De dos recamaras
Ensuite bathroom Baño propio
Balcony Balcon
Terrace Terraza
Bedroom Recamara
Master bedroom Recamara para padres
Kid’s bedroom Recamara para niño
Fireplace Chimenea
In rent Se renta
Rent Renta
Deposit Deposito
Apartmentmate Compañero de departamento
Roomie Compañero de cuarto
Neighbor Vecino
Kitchen
Cook Estufa
Refrigerator Refrigerador
Freezer Congelador
Oven Horno
Microwave Microondas
Liquidiser Licuadora
Frying pan Sartén
Pan Olla
Ladle Cucharon
Smoothie Licuado
Fried Frito
Boiled Herbido
Grilled Asado
Roast Rostizado
Baked Horneado
Sweet Dulce
Salty Salado
Chilly Picoso
Bitter Amargo
House III
Cupboard Alacena
(kitchen) sink Fregadero
Lamp Lampara
Sink Lababo
Bath Tina
Mirrow Espejo
612
Wardrobe Ropero
Carpet Alfombra
Rug Tapete
Curtains Cortinas
Desk Escritorio
Bookcase Librero
Fish tank Pecera
Pot(flower) Maseta
Vase Florero
Mattress Colchon
Blanket Cobija
Sheet Sabana
Pillow Almohada
Bedspread Colcha
Cities
Mexico City Ciudad de Mexico
Los Angeles Los Ángeles
Rome Roma
Paris Paris
Lisbon Lisboa
Touristic place Destino turistico
Theme park Parque de diversiones
Beautiful Feria
Fountain Fuente
Gallery Galeria
Palace Palacio
Ruins Ruinas
Gas station Gasolinera
Dock Muelle
Concert hall Sala de conciertos
Points of the compass Puntos cardinals
North Norte
South Sur
East Este
West Oeste
North-east Noreste
Towel Toalla
Baggage Maleta
Airport
Airplane ticket Boleto de avion
Passport Pasaporte
Seat Asiento
Airline Compañia aerea
Arrival Llegada
Boarding pass Boletos de embarque
613
Carry-on luggage Equipaje de mano
Cockpit Cabina
Crew Tripulacion
Customs Aduana
Delayed Atraso
Departures Salida
Destination Destino
Emergency landing Eterrizaje de emergencia
Flight number Numero de vuelo
Gate Puerta (para abordar)
International flight Vuelo internacional
Landing Aterrizaje
Country País
State Estado
County Municipio
Region Region
Ciudad Ciudad
Pueblo Pueblo
Village Aldea
Unit 8
Sport
Sport Deporte
Match Partido
Referee Arbitro
Coach Entrenador
Player Jugador
Team Equipo
Pitch Cancha
Soccer Fotball
Basketball Baloncesto
Volleyball Boliball
Baseball Baseball
Football Football americano
Swimming Natacion
Box Box
Yoga Yoga
Golf Golf
Skiing Ski
Cycling Ciclismo
Hocky Hocki
Marathon Maraton
Tennis Tenis
Means of transport
Drive license Permiso de conducir
Rent Renta
614
Road Carretera
Motorway Autopista
Road Camino
Emotions
Frightened Aterrado
Anxious Ansioso
Scared Asustado
Uneasy Inquieto
Content Content
Petrified Petrificado
Tense Tenso
Delighted Deleitado
Pleased Agradecido
Terrified Aterrorizado
Sports II
Satisfied Satisfecho
Surfing Sorfeo
Kayaking Canotaje
Rafting Rafting
Climbing Escalar
Rowing Canotaje
Snorkelling Esnorquear
Scuba diving Bucear
Ice-skating Patina en hielo
Canoeing Rapidos
Water-skiing Esqui acuatico
Rollerblading Patinar
Snowboarding Patina en nieve
Country II
South Africa Sudafrica
Portugal Portugal
Netherlands Holanda
Holland
Norway Noruega
Sweden Suecia
Finland Filandia
Switzerland Suiza
Czech Rebarlic Rebarlica checa
Egypt Egipto
Israel Israel
United Arab Emirates Arabia saudita
India India
North Korea Corea del norte
Argentine Argentina
Greece Grecia
615
Vietnam Vietnam
Denmark Dinamarca
Cuba Cuba
Peru Peru
New Zealand Nueva Zelanda
Learned Culto
Clever Listo
Unit 9
Environment II
Greenhouse gases Gases de efecto invernadero
Carbon dioxide Dioccido de carbono
Fertilizer Fertilisantes
Hydraulic energy Energía hidráulica
Thermal energy Energía térmica
Ecological Ecológico
Chemical products Productos químicos
Diesel Diesel
Gaseum Petróleo
Oil Aceite
Target gas Gas metano
Degradable Degradable
Organic Orgánico
Inorganic Inorgánico
Plastic Plástico
Glass Vidrio
Newspaper Papel
Plastic bottle Envase de plástico
Education
Education Educación
Kinder yard Guardería
Kinder yard Kínder
Elementary school PriMaría
Jr. High School Secundaria
High school Preparatoria
Postgraduate Posgrado
Master’s Maestría
Doctorate Doctorado
Faculty Facultad
Basic education Educación básica
Upper secondary education Educación media superior
Baccalaureate Bachillerato
Higher education Educación superior
University degree Titulo
Graduate Licenciado
Degree Carrera
616
Study plan Plan de estudios
Campus Campus
Rector Rector
Subjects
Subject Materia
Phisics Física
Chemistry Química
Biology Biología
Maths Matemáticas
Geography Geografía
History Historia
Literature Literatura
Sociology Sociología
Politics Ciencias políticas
Journalist Periodismo
Law Derecho
Psychologist Psicología
Medicine Medicina
Philosophy Filosofía
Economy Economía
Computer science Computación
Pedagogy Pedagogía
Translation Traducción
Dentistry Odontología
Grammar
Noun Sustantivo
Pronoun Pronombre
Adjective Adjetivo
Verb Verbo
Adverb Adverbio
Preposition Preposición
Conjunction Conjunción
Locution Locución
Onomatopoeia Onomatopeya
Interjection Interjección
Infinitive Infinitivo
Participle Participio
Gerund Gerundio
Sentence Oración
Grammar Gramática
Phonetics Fonética
Morphology Morfología
Syntaxes Sincabs
Tense Tiempo
Mood Modo
617
Unit 10
Work
Curriculum vitae Curriculum
Vacant Vacante
Full-time Tiempo comleto
Part-time Medio tiempo
Per hours Por horas
Office Oficina
Firm Empresa
Position Puesto
Salary Sueldo
Well-paid Bien pagado
Underpaid Mal pagado
Redundancy Despido
Social security Seguro social
Vacancy Vacante
Opening (inf)
Worker Trabajador
Employee (formal)
Interview Entrevista
Self-employed Trabajador independiente
Buss Jefe
Manager Gerente
Personal things
Binoculars Vinoculares
Map Mapa
Sun cream Protector solar
Cool box Hielera
Insect repellent Repelente de insectos
Sunglasses Lentes de sol
Rucksack Mochila
Snorkel Snorkel
Life jacket Salvavidas
Money belt Cangurera
Compass Compass
Passport Pasaporte
Tropical wet Clima tropical
Tropical dry Clima seco
Desert Desertico
Mediterranean Mediterraneo
Humid subtropical Subtropical
Humid oceanic Oceanico
Humid continental Humedo
Artic Artico
Mammal Mamifero
618
Animals IV
Wolf Lobo
Panda (bear) Panda
Hippopotamus Hipopotamo
Squirrel Ardilla
Insect Insecto
Butterfly Mariposa
Roach Cucaracha
Bird Ave
Pigeon Paloma
Dove Paloma (blanca)
Ostrich Aveztruz
Turkey Pavo
Hummingbird Colibri
Reptile Reptil
Lizard Lagartija
Amphibian Anfibio
Frog Rana
Dolphin Delfin
Bat Murcielago
Marsupial Marsupial
Koala beard Koala
Unit 11
Professions II
Flight attendant Aeromoza
Farmer Agricultor
Actor Actor
Firefighter Bomber
Cashier Cajero
Barman Cantinero
Surgeon Cirujano
Dentist Dentista
Nurse Enfermero
Hairstylist Estilista
Farmer Granjero
Computer technician Informatico
Retired Jubilado
Baby-sitter Niñera
Baker Panadero
Hairdresser Peluquero
Journalist Periodista
Policeman Policia
Vet Veterinario
Shoemaker Zapatero
Car crash Choque
619
Accidents
Plane crash Desplome de un avion
Dreadful crash Choque de varios carros
Robbery Asalto
Theft Robo (en general)
Burglary Robo (a una casa)
Robbery Robo (a un lugar)
Flood Inundacion
Fire Incendio
Drought Sequia
Earthquake Terremoto
Tornado Tornado
Hurricane Huracan
Volcanic eruption Erupcion volcanica
Tidal wave Maremoto
War Guerra
Hunger Hambre
Poverty Pobreza
Social inequality Desigualdad social
Death Muerto
Demonstration Manifestacion
Work II
Employment Empleo
Situation
Work (inf)
Unemployment Desempleo
Redundancy rate Taza de desempleo
Economically active population Población economicamente active
Home office Trabajo en casa
Workforce Fuerza laboral
Home-based worker Trabajador que trabaja desde casa
Flexible time Horario flexible
Fixed-term employee Persona que trabaja por contratos de
tiempo definido
Sick pay Es el pago que se le da a una persona
que esta enferma
Statutory miniMom wage Salario minimo establecido por la ley
Working hours Horas de trabajo
Sales-driven Facilidad de venta
Interpersonal skills habilidades interpersonales
Basic wage Salario base
Pension Jubilacion
Self-started Emprendedor
Teamwork skills Actitud para el trabajo en equipo
Application Solicitud
620
Human resources Recursos humanos
Unit 11
House III
Two-bedroom De dos recamaras
Laundry room Lavadero
Mortgage Hipoteca
Furnished Amueblado
Unfurnished Sin muebles
Refurbish Remodelado
Airy Ventilado
Light Iluminado
Loo Baño (informal)
Spacious Espacioso
Quiet Tranquilo
Sloppy Descuidado
Central Centrica
Rustic Rustica
Luxurious Lujoso
Noisy Ruidoso
Abandoned Abandonada
Elegant Elegante
Rundown Destartalada
Dilapidated Deteriorada
Clothes II
Footwear Calzado
Jeweller Joyeria
Headgear Accesorios para la cabeza
Bracelet Bracelete
Earring Arete
Necklace Collar
Ring Anillo
Crown Corona
Brooch Broche
Pearl Perla
Charm Dije
Diamond Diamante
Gold Oro
Silver Plata
Fabric Tela
Silk Seda
Cotton Algodon
Fur De piel
Synthetic Sintetico
Sweatshirt Sudadera
Human body III
621
Bone Hueso
Crain Cráneo
Muscle Musculo
Organ Organo
Heart Corazón
Brain Cerebro
Lung Pulmón
Kidney Riñon
Liver Higado
Back La espalda
Rib Costilla
Chest Pecho
Wrist Muñeca
Thumb Pulgar
Beard Barba
Mustache Bigote
Chin Barbilla
Chin Mentón
Tongue Lengua
Throat Garganta
Space
Universe Universo
Planet Planeta
Galaxy Galaxia
Star Estrella
Solar system Sistema solar
Mercury Mercurio
Venus Venus
Earth Tierra
Mars Marte
Jupiter Jupiter
Uranus Urano
Neptune Neptuno
Pluto Pluton
Sun Sol
Moon Luna
Meteorite Meteorito
Falling star Estrella fugas
Spaceship Nave especial
Astronaut Astronauta
Alien Alien
Politics
Politics Politica
President Presidente
King Rey
622
Secretary Ministro
Member of parliament Diputado
Senator Senador
Governor Gobernador
Mayor Alcalde
Civic Ciudadano
Politician Politico
Elections Elecciones
Vote Voto
Political party Partido politico
Government Gobierno
Monarchy Monarquia
Democracy Democracia
Communism Comunismo
Socialism Socialismo
Candidate Candidato
Constitution Constitucion
Seasons of the year
Season Estacion del año
Spring Primavera
Summer Verano
Fall Otoño
Winter Invierno
Video games
Console Consola
Control Control
Video game Videojuego
Graphic Graficos
Multi-player Multijugador
Suitable for all ages Para todas las edades
Gamer Jugador de videojuegos
Screen Pantalla
Artificial intelligence Inteligencia artificial
Joystick Palanca de mando
Memory card Tarjeta de memoria
Unit 12
Computer
CPU Cpu
Keyboard Teclado
Mouse Maus
Software Software
Hardware Hadware
Program Programa
User Usuario
Password Contraseña
623
Application Aplicacion
Interface Interfas
Broadband Banda ancha
Browser Navegador
Desktop Escritorio
Hard disk Disco duro
Folder Carpeta
Virus Virus
Home page Pagina principal
Antivirus Antivirus
Key Tecla
Key word Palabra clave
Crime
Gas Patrulla
Police station Estacion de policia
Crime Delito
Body Cuerpo
Accomplice Complice
Fine Multa
Homicide Homicidio
Violation Violacion
Kidnapping Secuestro
Extortion Extorcion
Subornation Soborno
Fraud Fraude
Narcotraffic Narcotrafico
Terrorism Terrorismo
Scam Estafa
Murderer Asesino
Assassin Asesino (de personas importantes)
Rapist Violador
Terrorist Terrorista
Swindler Estafador
Drug trafficker Narcotrafico
Professions III
Technician Tecnico
Cameraman Camarografo
Photograph Fotografo
Movie director Director
Instructor Instructor
Pet sitter Cuidador de mascotas
Miner Minero
Glazier Vidirero
Receptionist Recepcionista
Counsellor Abogado de oficio
624
Mechanic Mecanico
Soldier Soldado
Biologist Biologo
Crown Payaso
Chemist Quimico
Fisherman/fisher Pescador
Dustman Señor de la basura
Psychiatrist Psiquiatra
Researcher Investigador
Miner Marinero
Travel agent Agente de viajes
Justice
Court Corte
Jury Jurado
Accused Acusado
Sentence Sentencia
Verdict Veredicto
Victim Victima
Evidence Prueba
Evidence Evidencia
Murder weapon Arma homicida
Crime scene Ecena del crimen
Innocent Inocente
Guilty Culpable
Witness Testigo
Law Ley
Article Articulo
Code Codigo
Life sentence Cadena perpetua
Court Tribunal
Bail Fianza
Hearing Audiencia
Personal things
Life jacket Chaleco salvavidas
Life belt Salvavidas
First aid kit Botiquin de primeros auxilios
Fire extinguer Extinguidor
Axe Acha
Whistle Silbato
Torch Lampara
Unit 14
Adjectives VI
Colorful Colorido
Amenities
Gas Gas
625
Electricity Electricidad
Internet connectivity Internet
Running water Agua
All mod cons Con todos los servicios
Close all amenities En zona centrica
Walking distance to A 5 minutos de
Estate agent Vendedor (de casas)
Unit 14
Culture
Culture Cultura
Temple Templo
Pyramid Piramide
Wall Muralla
Cave Cueva
Amazing Incredible (informal)
Fascinating Facinante
Ancient Antiguo
Elegant Elegante
Traditional Tradicional
Enchanting Encantador
Stone Piedra
Brick Ladrillo
Marble Marmol
Steel Acero
Concrete Contreto
Wood De madera
Glass Vidrio
Prehispanic Prehispanico
Medieval Medieval
Roman Romano
Germanic Germano
Viking Vikingo
Mayan Maya
Empire Imperio
Conqueror Conquistador
Animals VI
Kitten Gatito
Puppy Perrito
Leopard Leopard
Peacock Pavo real
Wasp Avispa
Dragonfly Libelula
Iguana Iguana
Polar bear Oso polar
Lemur Lemur
626
Sea-horse Caballito de mar
Tiger Tigre
Anaconda Anaconda
Capybara Capibara
Tucan
Racoon Mapache
While shark Tiburon ballena
Orca Orca
Cobra Cobra
Armadillo Armadillo
Porcupine Puerco espin
Goods
Toaster Tostador
Blender Licuadora
Fan Ventilador
Coffee maker Cafeteria
Kettle Tetera
Iron Plancha
Vacuum cleaner Aspiradora
Sandwich toaster Sanwichera
Food V
Fat Grasa
Protein Proteina
Vitamin Vitamina
Carbohydrate Carboidrato
Mineral Mineral
Purée Pure
Olive oil Aceite de oilivo
Olive Aceituna
Sardine Sardina
Bread roll Telera
Boiled egg Huevo hervido
Lentil Lenteja
Starving Hambriento
Thirsty Sediento
Unit 15
Arts
Flute Flauta
Double bass Contrabajo
Trumpet Trumpeta
Sculptor Escultor
Dancer Bailarin
Fame
Famous Famoso
Celebrity Celebridad
627
Paparazzi Paparazzi
Mansion Mansion
Limousine Limosina
Gossip Chisme
Animals VII
Tail Cola
Beak Pico
Wing Ala
Colmillo
Paw Pata
Palaeontologist Paleontologo
Dinosaur Dinosaurio
Woolly mammoth Mamuth lanudo
Communication
Social network Red social
Internet Internet
Message Mensaje
Mail Correo
e-mail Correo electronico
Unit 16
Music
Music instrument Instrument musical
Acoustic guitar
Electric guitar Guitarra Acustica
Bass guitar Bajo
Double bass Guitarra electrica
Piano Piano
Kewboard Teclado
Flout Flauta
Saxophone Saxofon
Trumpet Trumpeta
British English
Ver vocabulario que viene al final del
libro
Religion
Religion Religion
Bible Biblia
Spirit Espiritu
Good Dios
Goddess Diosa
Angel Angel
Devil Diablo
Faith Fe
Paradise Paraiso
Saint Santo
628
Sin Pecado
Soul Alma
Christianity Cristianismo
Judaism Judaismo
Buddhism Budaismo
Islam Islam
Christ Cristo
Coran Coran
Mass Misa
Baptism Bautizo
Contract Contrato
Movie theater III
Helmed Dirigiddo
Highly recommended Muy recomendable
Hammily acted Sobreactudado
Script Guion
Plot Trama
Cast Reparto
Role Papel
Box office Taquilla
See it Hay que verla
Masterpiece Obra maestra
Credit Credito
Credits at the end Creditos finales
Cameo Aparicion
Genres of movie
Horror De terror
Action De accion
War De Guerra
Love De amor
Romantic Romantica
Crime Policiaca
Thriller Pelicula de suspenso
Western Pelicula del oeste
Block-buster Pelicula taquillera
Heist movie pelicula de atraco
Indi Independiente
Slasher Pelicula de terror muy fuerte
Biographical picture Pelicula bibliografica
Animated feature Animada
Sci-fi De iencia ficcion
Swashbuckler De espadas
Weepy/weeper Pelicula que te hace llorar
Sword and sandals Epica
Media
629
Medium Medio de comunicacion
Television Television
Radio Radio
Press Prensa
Newspaper Periodico
News Noticia(s)
Fake news Noticia falsa
Breaking news Noticia de ultima hora
News Noticiero
Radio station Estacion de radio
Unit 17
Diplomacy
Diplomatic Diplomatico
Treaty Tratado
Ambassador Embajador
Embassy Embajada
Expressions
Mm Mm
Er Mm (pensando)
Wow Guau
Ah Ah
Oh Oh
Damm A vale verga
Oh no O que la (como cuando te acuerdas de
algo)
Literary english
Ver vocabulario el vocabulario que esta
en la lección
Literary english II
Ver vocabulario el vocabulario que esta
en la lección
Adjectives III
Giant Gigante
Wonderful Maravilloso
Exquisite Esquisito
Enormous Enorme
Magnificent Magnifico
Furious Furioso
Tiny Diminuto
Starving Hambriento
Extra vocabulary
Stock exchange Bolsa de valores
Stockbroker Corridor de bolsa
Investment Inversion
Investor Invencionista
630
Foreign currency Divisa
Exportation Exportacion
Importation Importacion
Social movement Movimiento social
Historical event Evento historico
Conquest Conquista
Healthy Salud
AIDS Sida
Ebola Ebola
Business Negocios
Headline Encabezado
Front page Primera plana
Meset Meseta
Mountain range Cordillera
mountain range Cadena montañosa
Reef Arecife
Full stop Punto
Comma Coma
Colon Dos puntos
Semicolon Punto y coma
Question mark Signo de interrogacion
Exclamation mark Signo de admiracion
Inverted commas Comillas
Hyphen Guion
Accent mark Acento
Apostrophe Apostrofe
Parentheses Parentesis
Slash Barra
Capital letter Letra mayuscula
Lowercase letter Letra minuscula
Cock/ dick Verga

Pussy Coño/panocha
Tit Teta
Balls Huevos
Arse Culo
Bitch Puta
Shit Caca
Piss Miados
Fart Pedo
To fuck Coger
Fucking Chingados
Puta (adj)
What/where/who/etc. + the fuck Que/donde/quien chingados (enojo)
What/where/who/etc. + the hell Que/donde/quien chingados (sorpresa)
631
To wank Chaquetearse/ hacerse una chaqueta
What the fuck! Que pedo
Shit! Ya valio verga
Son of a bitch Hijo de puta
Hijo de su puta madre
Fuck you! Vete a la verga (cuando algo no te
parece)
Chinga tu madre
Mode Moda
Old-fashioned Pasado de moda
Denim dress Vestido de mezcliya
Short-sleeved De manga corta
V-neck Cuello en V
Spotted Con manchas
Baggy Guango
Long-sleeved De manga larga
Polo neck De cuello de Tortuga
Plain Sencillo
Checked A cuadros
Leggings Leggins
Evening dress Vestido de noche
Circle Circulo
Triangle Triangulo
Square Cuadrado
Rectangule Rectangulo
Oval Ovalo
Round Redondo
Circular Circular
Triangular Triangular
Rectangular Rectangular
Oval Ovalado
In bold Negritas
632
Bibliography
Michel Swam, Practical English Usage, Seatle
Raymond Murphy, Essencial Grammar in Use, Cambridge
Raymond Murphy, Grammar in Use, Cambridge
Martin Hewings, Advanced Grammar in Use, Cambridge
H.Q. Michell, Traveller A1, MM Barlications
H.Q. Michell, Traveller A2, MM Barlications
H.Q. Michell, Traveller B1, MM Barlications
H.Q. Michell, Traveller B2, MM Barlications
H.Q. Michell, Traveller C1, MM Barlications
Anthony Bulger, El inglés, Assimil
David Applefield, El inglés americano, Assimil
Anthony Bulger, Inglés perfeccionamiento, Assimil
Claude Chapuis/Peter Dunn/Alfred Fontenilles, Inglés de los Negocios, Assimil
Annette Capel/Wendy Sharp, Objective First, Cambridge University Press
Felicity O’Dell/Annie Broadhead, Objective Advanced, Cambridge University Press
Los datos culturales han sido todamos de diferentes fuentes y corresponden a

informacion obtenido en el año 2022. Por la que la informacion que aparece en
ellas puede ser diferente si se consulta este libro en años posteriors. También,
esta informacion cultural puede estar basada en la informacion y las expreciencias
que tiene el autor de este libro.
633
Sobre el autor
Miguel Mateo ha estudiado más de cinco idiomas en instituciones como el Instituto

Politécnico Nacional, el Centro Cultural Brasil en México, la Weslley University and
la Universitat Politecnica de Valencia. Tambén ha recibido formación docente de
universidades como la Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México y la Arizona
State University. Ha trabajado como maestro de inglés y francés y ha enseñado
cursos de cuatro habilidades, de comprensión de lectura, de conversación y de
preparación para los examenes de CAE, DELF, DELE y CILS.
Cursos y certificaciones
 Arizona State University TESOL (ASU)

 Teaching Knowledge Test Module 1 (Band 3)
 Certificate Teach English Now! Teaching Lenguague Online (Arizona
State University)
 Certificate Teach English Online (Cambridge University)
 TOEFL ITP B2
 Certificate Upper-Intermediate English: Business (Universitat de Valencia)
 Constancia de posesión del idioma inglés (UNAM)
 Constancia de comprensión de lectura en inglés (UNAM)
 Gramática del inglés B1
 Taller de conversación en Ingles avanzado
 TOEFL Test Preparation: The Insider’s Guide
 CELPE-BRAS Intermediario Superior

 Constancia de posesión del idioma portugués (UNAM)
 Curso de Cultura y Civilización lusófona
 Constancia de posesión del idioma italiano (UNAM)

 Certificate Italian Lenguague and Culture: Advanced (Weslley)
 Taller de Letteratura italiana contemporanea
 DELF B2
 Constancia de posesión del idioma alemán (UNAM)
634
635

American English For Spanish Speakers

Cargado por

Información del documento

Título original

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

American English For Spanish Speakers

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

2022

American English For Spanish

Como mi objetivo no es solo enseñarte el lenguaje formal si no también otros

Este libro se divide en 17 unidades, cada una compuesta de 7 lecciones. También

15. Present simple

22. Modal verbs (can, could, may, might)

29. Past simple

36. Future simple

43. Subjunctive present

50. Present continuous

57. Conditional type 0

64. Present perfect

71. Present perfect continuous

78. Conditional type 3

85. Purpose clauses

92. Passive voice of the simple tenses

99. Direct speech/ Indirect speech

113. Was/were able to/ would rather have/ would prefer to

El idioma tiene 26 vocales.

La letra “Ñ” no existe en inglés.

Las consonantes b, c, d, f, k, l, m, n, p, q, t, w, x, e y se pronuncian igual que en

La “h” al inicio de palabra se pronuncial como jota.

La J siempre suena como una I griega vibrada.

La R siempre suena como la erre en “Rata”

La V suena como una b vibrada.

La Z suena como una ese vibrada.

Las consonants dobles se pronuncian como una.

Swimming /suiming/ not /suimming/

Para fines practicos, te sugerimos aprenderte la table de abajo en lo que aprendes

/a/ /e/ /i/ /o/ /u/ /ə/

La E final de palabras polisilabas es muda.

La terminación “ture” se pronuncial /chur/.

La terminación “tion” se pronuncial /shion/.

En la combinación wr se pronuncial solo la erre.

La combinación Tw se pronuncial /tu/.

La Sh se pronuncial como la equis en Xola.

En la combinacion S + consonante solo se pronuncial el sonido de la ese.

En la combinación Kn solo se pronuncial la / N/.

What a beautiful woman = /uata biutiful woman/

Good afternoon = /godafternun/

Por su puesto esto no es una explicación exaustiva de la pronunciación del inglés

Regla Español Inglés

La terminación “uro” y Futuro Future

Desde este punto, es necesario que escuhes grabaciones para el nivel A1 de

Vocabulary and reading tips

1. Hello, my name is Miguel and this is my wife María.

1. Hola, mi nombre es Miguel y ella es mi esposa María.

Personal subject pronoun Pronombre personal

a. Substituir todo lo que no es humano

c. Con el clima y la hora.

En inglés no existe el pronombre usted, en su lugar se usa you.

Llena cada espacio en blanco con el pronombre personal que le corresponda.

1. Hello, ________ Miguel. I’m from ________. (Mexico)

Escribe una breve presentación de tí. (50 palabras)

Contesta las siguientes preguntas.

What’s his name?

I’m from ______________.

What does he/she do?

I’m a/an ______________.

Una linda mujer

1. Acabo de ver a la mujer más hermosa que haya visto.

El verbo “to be” es el equivalente al inglés de los verbos ser y estar.

Recuerda que en inglés es obligatorio el uso del pronombre personal, entonces es

1. Hello, Miguel. I’m from . (Mexico)

11. is Daniel ____.?

___ plus _ is _ _ times _ is ___

___ divided by _ is _ minus is __